The Samantha Wolf Mysteries Box Set: Books 1-3
Date: 2016-01-04 05:00:00+00:00
Keywords: Mystery
Description: Free with Kindle Unlimited It's a little Nancy Drew and a little Scooby-Doo! Whether you’re craving a good, old-fashioned mystery or you’re looking for a clean read for your child, this is the series for you! Sam and Ally are two twelve-year-old girls growing up on the coast of the Pacific Northwest, in Washington State. While they encounter and battle all the normal, preteen issues in today’s world, they also manage to always find a good mystery to solve! What’s even more endearing is how they do it. Unlike so many of the novels and series out there on the market, The Samantha Wolf Mysteries
Publisher: Tara Ellis Publications

The Samantha Wolf Mysteries

Books 1-3

The Mystery of Hollow Inn

The Secret of Camp Whispering Pines

The Beach House Mystery

TARA ELLIS

The Samantha Wolf Mysteries – Box Set

Copyright © 2016 Tara Ellis

1st Edition January 2016

Cover Design© Melchelle Designs
http://melchelledesigns.com

Cover Models:  Breanna Dahl and Janae Dahl

Photographer: Tara Ellis Photography

All rights reserved.  No part of this book may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted by any means without the written permission of the author.

This is a work of fiction.  Names, characters, places and incidents are either the product of the author’s imagination or are used fictitiously, and any resemblance to actual persons, living or dead, business establishments, events, or locals is entirely coincidental.

Thank you for purchasing this special box set edition of The Samantha Wolf Mysteries! It includes the first three books in the series:

- The Mystery of Hollow Inn
- The Secret of Camp Whispering Pines
- The Beach House Mystery

The fourth book is now also available!

- The Heiress of Covington Ranch

Find the whole series here!

http://www.amazon.com/gp/product/B0184A7QJA

Join my newsletter and be notified of all future, new releases and great sales: eepurl.com/bzdHA5

The Mystery of Hollow Inn

The Mystery of Hollow Inn

Samantha Wolf Mysteries Book  #1

TARA ELLIS

ISBN: 1494441020

ISBN-13: 978-1494441029

The Mystery of Hollow Inn

Copyright © 2013 Tara Ellis

3nd Edition October 2015

Cover Design© Melchelle Designs
http://melchelledesigns.com/

Cover Models:  Breanna Dahl and Janae Dahl

Photographer: Tara Ellis Photography

All rights reserved.  No part of this book may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted by any means without the written permission of the author.

This is a work of fiction.  Names, characters, places and incidents are either the product of the author’s imagination or are used fictitiously, and any resemblance to actual persons, living or dead, business establishments, events, or locals is entirely coincidental.

To all of the wonderful stories I read as a child that inspired me to create my own, mystery-filled world

The Samantha Wolf Mysteries

1      The Mystery of Hollow Inn

2      The Secret of Camp Whispering Pines

3      The Beach House Mystery

4      The Heiress of Covington Ranch

Find these titles at Tara’s author page!

www.amazon.com/author/taraellis

CONTENTS

The Mystery of Hollow Inn

The Samantha Wolf Mysteries

CONTENTS

1 HOLLOW INN

2 THE LEGEND

3 VOICES FROM THE PAST

4 A GHOSTLY ENCOUNTER

5 SECRETS

6 FLORENCE LAKE

7 THE JOURNAL

8 A POEM

9 CABIN IN THE WOODS

10 CLUES

11 A CONFESSION

12 GOLD MINE

13 DISCOVERY

14 NARROW ESCAPE

15 THE INHERITANCE

16 GOING HOME

ABOUT THE AUTHOR

The Secret of Camp Whispering Pines

Samantha Wolf Mysteries

1 SUMMER CAMP!

2 WHISPERING PINES

3 CABIN NAVAHO

4 FIRST IMPRESSIONS

5 RUMORS

6 SINK OR SWIM

7 TRADITIONS

8 FAMILY SECRETS

9 LEGEND OF THE WOODS

10 DESTROYED!

11 ISOLATION

12 CREEK WALKING

13 SANDY

14 TRAIL OF DANGER

15 THE MASK OF ZORRO

16 SABOTAGED!

17 PIECES OF A PUZZLE

18 ANSWERS IN THE DARK

19 THE TRUTH WON’T SET YOU FREE

20 WHAT FRIENDS ARE FOR

21 UNEXPECTED RESCUE

22 REVELATIONS

23 BARGES

ABOUT THE AUTHOR

The Beach House Mystery

Samantha Wolf Mysteries

CONTENTS

1 A LATE SUMMER SURPRISE

2 FINDING THE COVE

3 THE BEACH HOUSE

4 SAND ON YOUR FEET & WIND IN YOUR HAIR

5 ODD NEIGHBORS

6 THE SECRETS OF WOOD COVE

7 BROTHERS!

8 EXPLORING THE MARINA

9 A CHANCE ENCOUNTER

10 TRAIL OF CONFUSION

11 A DARING RESCUE!

12 COMPARING NOTES

13 MOVING SHADOWS

14 CLUES AND ACCUSATIONS

15 MAYBE BROTHERS AREN’T SO BAD AFTER ALL

16 HERE BE DRAGONS

17 CAPTAIN BROWN

18 NO TURNING BACK NOW

19 DEAD MAN’S POINT

20 THE TREASURE

21 GOT A LADDER?

22 PIRATES AND A SEA MONSTER

23 A NEW TALE TO TELL

ABOUT THE AUTHOR

1 HOLLOW INN

Sam and Ally step from the bus into the hot summer day and look at the surrounding countryside. “The Rocky Mountains are even bigger than I remember,” Sam observes, gazing at the Montana hills with her pale green eyes. The tall twelve-year-old pulls her brown, shoulder length hair back from her round face.

The last time her parents brought her to Montana was years ago for a family reunion, but that was at a lake miles from here. She’s never been this deep in the mountains, or in this part of the state.

She turns to her best friend Ally, who’s setting their luggage near a bench in front of the small bus depot. Sam is excited to have her along.  They’ve been planning their trip for the past three months. It took a lot of begging, pleading, and promises, but eventually their parents said yes.

“The scenery is the only good thing I can say about the bus ride,” Ally answers. “I can’t wait until we get to the inn.” Running her fingers through her short, unruly red hair, she stretches dramatically before flattening the wrinkles in her shirt. The spunky pre-teen stands a couple of inches shorter than Sam. The freckles that run across the bridge of her nose, combined with her blue eyes, give away her Irish heritage.

Pulling a phone out of her back pocket, Ally turns in circles, holding it up to the sky. “One bar,” she announces with disdain. Typing furiously, she quickly sends out messages to her parents and friends, as if the end of the world were looming. They were been warned about the lack of cell and computer service out here.

Sam smiles at her friend, remembering how Ally was so eager to make the ten hour trek just this morning. “Oh, don’t complain. There are worse things than not having your phone and the trip really wasn’t that bad. But I think that a long swim in the lake Aunt Beth told me about sounds wonderful right now!” The heat of the day is starting to fade, but it’s still warm enough to cause sweat to bead at the base of her neck.

“Excuse me.”

Sam turns quickly to face a handsome young man of about seventeen. He’s wearing a dark tank top over bared muscular shoulders, and thick blonde hair outlines his lean features.

“Yes?” she asks uncertainly.

“You must be Samantha Wolf and Alyson Parker?” Cringing at their formal names, the two girls nod simultaneously and he flashes a warm smile. “Hi, my name is Ted Baker,” he says, as he turns and begins gathering up their bags.

Sam steps out of his way and notices the Hollow Inn logo on the front of his shirt. “Nice to meet you, Ted,” she says politely. “Please just call us Sam and Ally. Everybody does.”

“Sure,” he agrees, walking around them.  “Your Aunt Beth really wanted to come herself, but there was a little problem at the inn this afternoon.”

“What kind of problem?” Sam asks. “Is everything okay?”

Ignoring the question, Ted places their bags into the back of an old station wagon idling nearby and opens the rear doors for them. Ally climbs into the air-conditioned vehicle eagerly, but Sam hesitates. She’s tempted to call her aunt and confirm the change in plans. Unfortunately, her number is scribbled in a notebook that is packed away in the back of the car and she doesn’t want to make Ted feel uncomfortable. Her phone might not even work.

“Hey Ted! How are things at the inn? I heard about the…mishap.”

Spinning around, Sam discovers that the voice belongs to an older man that runs the depot. He greeted the bus driver and welcomed everyone when they arrived. Any question about Ted’s intentions evaporates, but the comment seems ominous.

“It’s just fine, Mr. Harrison. We’ve got to run. Have a good evening.”

The dismissal is clear, but Mr. Harrison lingers, meeting Sam’s gaze.

“Come on Sam, your aunt and uncle are waiting,” Ted insists.

Breaking away from the steady gaze of Mr. Harrison, Sam is rewarded by another charming smile from Ted. Settling into the back seat next to Ally, she isn’t convinced of the sincerity behind it. “So what happened?” she presses, looking at his reflection in the rear view mirror.

“Oh, it’s nothing serious, but I’d better let Mrs. Clark explain it to you herself.”

The two girls exchange a look as they fasten their seat belts, but refrain from asking more questions about it. It’s obvious he doesn’t want to tell them.

“So what’s your job at the inn, Ted?” Ally inquires as the car pulls away from the depot.  The change of topic seems to make him relax and he leans back in his seat.

“I take care of all the odd jobs around the resort,” he answers pleasantly. “I guess you could call me the handyman if you wanted to give me a title.”

“How many people are working there now?” Sam asks. “I didn’t think my aunt and uncle hired the full staff yet.”

“No, you’re right, they haven’t. There are plenty of people available for the jobs around here, but unfortunately a lot of the folks in these hills tend to be superstitious. We’ve talked enough about jobs, though. I hear you’re from the west coast. What’s it like?”

“Yeah, we’re from Washington State,” Sam confirms, noting his reluctance to talk about the inn once again. “We live in a really small, quiet town near the ocean. During the summer it’s full of tourists and the traffic is a mess. When Aunt Beth invited us here for a visit, we just jumped at the chance. I’ve only seen pictures of the house, but it looks like a mansion!”

“It is a mansion, actually,” Ted explains. “A very old one. It was built over a hundred years ago. The Hollows have always owned it. It’s only been since your Uncle Bill bought the place two years ago that it’s been used as an inn.” It’s obvious Ted knows a lot of the local history and enjoys explaining it. “I don’t mean to sound negative,” he continues. “But I’m not so sure that it will work out for them.”

“Why do you say that?” Ally asks. They turn onto a narrow country road and head up into the woods, leaving the small town behind.

“Because…” he trails off, glancing up into the rear view mirror and then looking quickly away. He seems to come to a decision. “Because of the Hollow Legend,” he states matter-of-factly.

Sam leans forward from the back seat eagerly. “Ooh, a legend? Is that what you meant by people being superstitious?” Sam is nearly bouncing in the seat with anticipation, and forces herself to be still. Ted is like a timid rabbit. She can tell it won’t take much to scare him away from the topic.

“Yeah, that’s what fuels all the stories. I guess I just assumed that your aunt already told you about it. Everyone around here knows the story. But I’ve already said too much, Sam. She must not have wanted to worry you about it. Please don’t let her know I told you. I haven’t had this job for too long and I would hate to mess it up. I need it for the whole summer.”

“Don’t worry, Ted,” Sam says quickly, feeling a little guilty now. It really seems like he respects her aunt and uncle. “Aunt Beth isn’t like that.  I’m sure that the only reason she hasn’t told me about it is because she doesn’t believe it. If she thought it was important, she would have said something. She and Uncle Bill are so excited about this place, it would take a lot more than a silly legend to make them worry.”

The paved road gives way to loose gravel and Ted slows the car slightly. Rolling down the window, he produces a bag of sunflower seeds from the glove compartment and turns to face the girls. “Want some?” When Sam and Ally both shake their heads, he shrugs and tosses a handful in his mouth.

The air blowing in through the open window is surprisingly cool. Sam rolls down her own window, breathing in the fresh air tinged with the smell of warm cedar. Pulling some stray hairs across her forehead, she gazes happily at the beautiful scenery rushing past. These woods are different than the ones back home. The trees are bigger and the forest appears denser. Instead of moss hanging off the branches, sweet smelling pine needles cover the dry ground.

Sighing, she leans contently against the door.  It’s great to be out of school. She hasn’t seen her aunt and uncle in almost three years and has been dreaming about this adventure for weeks.  Some of her friends don’t understand how she can be excited about spending so much time away from her computer and instant messaging. To be honest, her parents only allowed her to have a smart phone since her twelfth birthday, six months ago, and she finds all the drama associated with it stressful.

Ally seems to thrive in the whole social media thing, but Sam often finds herself wishing she could just shut it off, without the fear of everyone thinking she’s weird. She can’t think of a better vacation than being tucked away deep in the woods without any pressure to text everyone all the time. Now, to top it all off, there’s even a legend! Grinning, she turns to Ally and finds her friend frowning at her phone.

“It’s gone,” Ally says pathetically. “There’s NO signal at all, Sam!  OMG, I don’t know if I can do this.”

For a moment, Sam thinks she actually sees tears threatening in her friend’s eyes, but then Ally tosses the phone on the seat and crosses her arms over her chest.

“I don’t need it, Sam. I don’t care. Chelsie was like, being all stupid anyways. And then Crystal was all agreeing with her and Matt was even posting snaps of their conversation! Can you believe that? He got like, twenty likes in five minutes and tagged me in it!”

Sam silently studies her friend, trying to decide if she is joking or not. Sometimes it’s hard to tell. Ted is methodically eating his sunflower seeds, but Sam suspects he is listening carefully to their ridiculous conversation.

Ally then turns to Sam with a flourish and stares back at her for a full minute before they both start laughing.

“Maybe Ted can drive us into town tomorrow so you can intervene and prevent the world from falling apart,” Sam suggests.

They both laugh even harder.

“No, I think I’ll go along with the whole ‘I didn’t have a choice’ option instead and go hide at your aunt’s inn. Even if there is some big mystery we aren’t allowed to talk about and a spooky legend!” Ally directs the last part to Ted, and when he looks at her, she smiles expectantly.

Ted turns back to the road and drives in silence for a few minutes.

“Oh come on, Ted,” Sam pleads. “I won’t tell Aunt Beth. Don’t you think we should know about it if we’re going to be staying there?”

“In these woods,” he says solemnly, gesturing at the trees surrounding them, “the Hollow Legend is more than just superstition.” He glances in the rear view mirror to gaze at the girl seated behind him. The serious look on her face reminds him of the woman who gave him this summer job.

Leaning towards Ally, Sam speaks to her softly. “Aunt Beth did seem distracted this morning when I called her from home before we left. She isn’t the sort of person to tell people her problems, but I could tell by her voice that something was wrong. I think Ted knows what it is.” She thinks of the old mansion, set deep in the woods. A quiver of anticipation crawls down her spine.

“I guess I might as well tell you that it’s the legend that keeps people from working for your uncle.” Ted continues, unaware of the whispered conversation between the two girls. “Now, after the…uh, accidents, the stories are starting to turn customers away from Hollow Inn, too.”

“Well now you have to tell us what the legend is,” Ally complains.

“Then you can’t let on that you know about it,” he says, switching on the headlights to push back the gathering darkness. When both Sam and Ally nod eagerly, he clears his throat and the girls settle back in anticipation of the story to come.

2 THE LEGEND

“Okay, so generations ago a gold miner built a mansion for his beautiful bride-to-be,” Ted begins. “He thought she should have only the best. His name was Shawn Hollow. The inn was named after him.” He pauses long enough to point out a lake far down in a valley below them. The setting sun reflects off the water and rests on the outstretched limbs of the trees lining the shore.

“That’s Florence Lake,” Ted explains. “Old Shawn named it after his wife. The inn is on the far end, up that side of the mountain. You can see the lake from there. You’ll find that a lot of the landmarks on the Hollow Estate are named after family members, especially their children. Well, all except for their youngest son. Nothing is named for him. There were four boys, altogether.”

A question hangs between Sam and Ally. Why was the youngest boy left out?  They soon have the answer.

“Joseph Hollow,” Ted announces like a carnival barker. “That’s whose ghost is supposedly haunting Hollow Inn, and-”

“A ghost!” Sam interrupts. “You can’t be serious!”

“There are no such things as ghosts,” Ally declares, looking to Sam for confirmation, while nervously biting at her fingernails.

“I know. It sounds crazy.” Ted throws the empty sunflower seed wrapper onto the passenger seat. “I thought the same thing when I came to work here. But not anymore.”

Sam waits for a punch line, but none is offered. She laughs half-heartedly at the suggestion that Ted might actually believe a ghost roams the halls of Hollow Inn. “And now what do you think?” she jeers.

“Well, I don’t really believe in all of the haunting that’s supposedly happening, but there are some strange things going on,” Ted points out. “For instance, sounds that seem to be coming from the walls bother people during the night. A lady who was staying there claimed she was awakened by someone calling her name. When she looked around the room and saw the window open, she thought maybe she’d just heard the wind. But the same thing happened the next night. Only that time, she swore she saw a dark figure looming over her in the moonlight. Needless to say, she left the next morning. Stories like that spread like wildfire around here.”

“How do you know that she really saw anything?” Sam asks. “She probably heard the rumors too, and let her imagination get the better of her.”

“Maybe,” Ted agrees. “But the strange thing is that the room she stayed in was the late Joseph Hollow’s bedroom. You can laugh, but I’ve heard some weird things around the place myself. It’s not just the sounds, though. The real reason your aunt couldn’t come get you, Sam, is because of the vandalism.”

“What!” Sam exclaims.

“Yeah, it’s really hurt business. The whispers of a ghost might actually lure some customers in, but the other stuff is definitely running them off. It’s senseless stuff. Bushes are cut or pulled up, windows broken, tires on guest cars are slashed and their belongings are disturbed. Nothing too serious, but enough to keep the rumors flying and make people afraid to stay at the inn. I didn’t want to talk about it in front of Mr. Harrison. Your aunt asked me not to say anything to you, either. She doesn’t want to scare you.”

“Well, I think it does sound pretty spooky,” Ally says quietly. The idea of ghosts doesn’t do anything to brighten her outlook on their trip, especially since she can’t even call for help. Reaching instinctively for her phone, she looks at Sam, and then at the suddenly threatening woods, before sitting back farther in the seat. Pressing her lips together, Ally shoves the unusable phone deep into her pocket.

Sam pats her friend on the shoulder and tries to give her a reassuring smile. “I’m not going to worry about it, Ally. This all seems like a common story for an old house. As for the vandalism, it’s probably the local kids trying to scare people. I hope something is done about it soon, though. I couldn’t stand to see Aunt Beth and Uncle Bill lose everything they’ve put into fixing up the old place.”

The car pushes a little harder as they reach the far end of Florence Lake and start up another steep incline. The sun is now only a faint glow on the horizon, below the lake.

“Now,” Sam continues, turning back to Ted. “I suppose the legend is about how Joseph Hollow’s ghost came to be haunting Hollow Inn?”

“Exactly,” Ted confirms, flashing another smile over his shoulder. Spitting the last of the sunflower shells out the open window, he quickly closes it against the cool mountain night air.

“Florence died while giving birth to their fourth child, Joseph. Shawn believed that it was the boy’s fault. As a result, Joseph grew up being resented and unfairly treated by his father. When Joseph was sixteen, Mr. Hollow called his four sons together: Christopher, Michael, Thomas and Joseph.

“He told them he was getting to be an old man and had made a new will. The three older boys would be allowed to stay in the house. All of their lives if they wanted to. They would be given a generous monthly allowance, monitored by Mr. Hollow’s attorney. Joseph would only receive a small amount of money. Once Shawn died, the kid would be on his own.”

“How horrible!” Ally exclaims from the backseat. “How could he be so cruel to his own son?”

Ted puts his hand up to stop her. “It may have been a low thing to do, Ally, but Joseph didn’t exactly have a reputation for being the ideal son, either.”

“What do you mean?” Sam asks.

“It’s said that Joseph was a troublemaker from day one. He enjoyed causing mischief and problems for everyone around him. He would go into the garden and pull up plants or break dishes in the kitchen, as well as other things, on purpose. Some people thought that Shawn Hollow planned to write him out of his will because he was afraid of him.”

“Well, who could blame Joseph?” Ally protests. “How was he expected to act, knowing how his father felt about him?” She couldn’t imagine what it would feel like to know that your own father didn’t love you.

“The only thing people saw was a young boy who couldn’t control his temper,” Ted tries to explain.

Sam quickly makes the connection. “So that’s why everyone thinks he’s to blame for the vandalism around the mansion.”

“But I thought that he was thrown out of the house?” Ally questions, a confused look on her face. “Don’t ghosts haunt the places where they die?”

“The will was never carried out,” Ted continues. “The very same night that old Shawn announced his intentions, he died in his sleep. The new will he promised was never found. He was a miserly man, and it was no secret that he didn’t trust anyone but himself with his money. The four boys knew that Shawn hid most of his earnings somewhere in the mansion. They were bound and determined to find it.

“Now, Joseph’s three older brothers were just as greedy as their father had been. They didn’t plan on sharing the money with a younger brother who was never meant to have it.

“About a week after Shawn died, Joseph’s body was found in Florence Lake. His boat was overturned. The sheriff was satisfied with the explanation that Joseph accidentally drowned, although everyone knew that he was an excellent swimmer.

“As far as I know,” Ted finishes, “according to the townspeople, the other three boys grew old in the house. They were basically hermits, obsessed with finding the money. They never did, though, and they blamed their failure on Joseph. They said that he kept them from it. They believed Joseph’s ghost would stay there forever, guarding the money that he felt belonged to him and driving off anyone who tried to take the house away. In the end, he finally got the place all to himself, even if he was only a ghost. That’s it. That’s how it all began.”

As they continue through the woods, the night wins its battle and closes around them. Occasionally, the headlights expose the glowing eyes of small animals. Over the next crest, the outline of the large mansion comes into view. A full moon is already working its way up the sky behind them, illuminating the tips of the tallest trees and casting shadows where there wouldn’t normally be any. There is no mistaking the structure for anything but Hollow Inn, and Ted turns the station wagon up the long driveway.

“The story might be convincing,” Sam says out of the darkness, “but I don’t believe in ghosts. If there is something strange going on at Hollow Inn, I’m going to find out what it is.”

3 VOICES FROM THE PAST

“You two must be exhausted!”

A short, rather plump woman in her mid-forties embraces the young girls at the front door. After taking off an apron covering her summer dress, she brushes a stray hair from her face. “How was your trip?” she asks, looking from one girl to the other. “I hope it wasn’t too long. I know it isn’t your idea of a fun day!”

“It was fine, Aunt Beth,” Sam assures her, after returning the hug.

They stand in a large entry way at the bottom of massive oak stairs that blend into the hardwood floor. To the left is an old, ornate desk set up against the wall. On top of it sits a fancy guest book for people to sign. Beyond it is an arched entrance to a grand room, and Sam can see glimpses of dark, antique furniture facing a large bay window. She can only imagine the view from there in the daylight.

“The scenery on the way up was wonderful!” Sam continues, still looking around. To the right, mouth-watering smells drift through slatted double doors which have to lead to the kitchen. “Ted kept us entertained on the drive here.” Glancing over at the blushing man still holding their bags, she smiles.

“What she means,” Ally quickly explains, “is that he told us some funny stories about the people around here.”

Beth looks skeptically at Ted for a moment, but lets it go. “Thank you for getting the girls, Ted. You’re a lifesaver,” she says warmly, taking the luggage from him. She lifts the bags with ease, revealing that perhaps the plumpness is misleading.

Ted nods politely and heads back out the door. “You’re welcome, Mrs. Clark. It was my pleasure. I’ve really got to go now, though. I still have some things to do before turning in tonight.” He waves goodbye and then closes the door behind him.

“So, obviously, you’re Ally,” Beth says, setting the bags at the foot of the stairs. “Sam has told me enough about you that I think I could pick you out of a crowd!” Smiling, she clasps Ally’s hands, and her positive energy is contagious.

Ally nods in confirmation, thinking that maybe it really won’t be so bad out here after all.

“Sorry about the lack of cell service,” Beth says to them both, as if reading Ally’s mind. “They’ve been telling us for the past year that it will improve, but so far it hasn’t happened. We have internet access, but it’s on a dial-up modem and patchy. We’re the last house on a private road, so we aren’t exactly at the top of the list for extended services. Most guests don’t seem to mind, though. They come here expecting to escape the stress of daily life and actually enjoy not being available at the drop of a hat.

“Down the hall is a phone that you’re welcome to use anytime.” She points to a narrow hall past the stairs. “I’m sure your parents would like to know you got here safely, so why don’t you go call them now while I dish up some food? I prepared a late dinner for you.”

Sam’s stomach grumbles at the thought of eating, and she realizes just how hungry she is. “Thanks, Aunt Beth! I forgot to call before we left the bus station, so I’m sure Mom is waiting to hear from us.”

After the girls place quick calls to home, they join Beth in the big country kitchen. In contrast to the warm, dark colors of the main house, this area is bright and cheery. It’s obvious that the kitchen was recently remodeled. While still charming, it lacks the old, antique feel of the foyer.

“Welcome to my room,” Beth says happily. She stands at a large butcher-top table at the far end. “We wanted to keep the old charm of the inn, but I refused to work in a hundred-year-old kitchen! Besides,” she adds, placing bowls of delicious looking stew in front of them, “I love all that wood, but a kitchen needs to be…light. You know, a place that energizes you and makes you want to run around!” Laughing at herself, she scoops out a third bowl. “I ate earlier, but this smells so good that I think I’m going to have seconds!”

Sam and Ally eagerly sit down and start eating while Beth adds fresh rolls to the meal and pours glasses of milk. She then joins them, talking in between mouthfuls, waving a roll in the air. “Don’t worry about your bags. Your Uncle Bill can take them up to your rooms later when he gets here. He wasn’t able to meet you because he had to go to a town in the opposite direction.

“As you’ve seen, we are quite remote here. The two closest towns are almost an hour’s drive. The bus depot is in Jackson, which doesn’t have much more than the depot, post office, bar and church. Bill had to go to Sunnydale, where they have several stores, to get some special fixtures. We’re still in the process of doing some remodeling,” she adds hastily, looking down at her bowl.

“Oh…Mr. Harrison at the depot said something about a ‘mishap’ here. Is everything okay?” Sam asks innocently.

Putting her spoon down, Beth studies her niece for a moment. “That Mr. Harrison is a busybody,” she finally says, her food forgotten. “It was nothing, just some local kids jumping on the legend bandwagon.”

“Legend?” Ally asks hesitantly, looking guiltily at Sam. It’s not like they’re lying, but neither girl feels right about misleading their host.

“Please,” Beth states, smiling again. “Don’t try to tell me that Ted didn’t give you all the details on the way here.”

When Sam starts to deny it, Beth holds up a hand. “I’ve been around awhile, Sam. Long enough to know how to read people. Don’t worry about it,” she continues, seeing the look of concern on Sam’s face. “I don’t mind. You would have heard about it eventually. Kinda hard to avoid it out here. It’s just a bunch of folklore anyways. I don’t put much merit in it. There have been some unexplained occurrences, but certainly nothing that I would say a ghost is capable of. Regardless of which it is, though, ghosts or kids, it still upsets paying guests.”

“What sort of things have been happening, Mrs. Clark?” Ally asks tentatively.

“Ally, please call me Aunt Beth. And it’s just some mindless vandalism around the grounds. Visitors get spooked over little things. An old house makes a lot of noise, but fueled by the legend, it becomes whispering ghosts as far as the guests are concerned.”

“What I don’t understand,” Sam says, “is how anyone can know the story in such detail when it happened so long ago. Do you think any of it is even true?”

“Well, it’s only been ten years since Mr. Hollow’s last son died. No one lived here since then, and everyone says it’s because the place has such a strange reputation. No one wanted to buy it. Ten years isn’t very long, though. As for knowing the distant past, the realtors we bought the house from said they found Shawn Hollow’s journal when they cleaned up the place. The three boys passed on the stories from that book themselves, telling how it all began.”

“Do you have the journal?” Sam asks with excitement. “Can we see it?”

Beth laughs at her niece’s enthusiasm. “Sure, Sam. I’ll try to find it.” Placing her empty bowl in the dishwasher, she looks at the ceiling. “I think it’s in one of the old trunks in the attic.”

Sam is surprised when her aunt walks briskly from the room. She didn’t expect her to go look for it right now.

“Your Aunt Beth is really nice,” Ally says, watching her leave. “I hope she isn’t just pretending not to be mad.”

“No, if she were mad, she would say so.  Aunt Beth doesn’t mess around that way. She’ll let you know what she’s thinking. I found that out at a young age.” Smiling now, Sam finishes the last bite of stew and adds her bowl to the washer. “Just don’t break something and try to hide it. That makes her really mad.”

Ally laughs at this and helps Sam finish clean up the dinner. By the time they figure out where things go, they hear Beth coming back down the stairs. Moments later, she reappears through the swinging kitchen doors, holding a large hardcover book in the crook of her arm. Its yellowing pages are visible between the worn covers.

“Here it is!” Beth exclaims. “It was right on top of the second chest I opened. Read all you like, girls. You’ll probably find it quite entertaining. I haven’t read it myself, but Shawn Hollow was said to be a fine writer.”

Sam carefully takes the book from her aunt and randomly picks a page to read out loud.

“July 19, 1925 Today Florence went into labor with our fourth child. I’ve sent Christopher for Doctor Suthers. He should return by morning. It’s different this time. The pain seems to be worse and Miss Nancy can’t keep dear Florence calm. It’s almost as if the baby is fighting her.”

Sam says nothing, but turns eagerly to the next entry.

“July 20, 1925 Florence died this morning. Christopher returned by dawn, as I expected, but the doctor arrived too late. From her death I acquired a son, but I can’t possibly love someone who killed the only person in my life who loved me back.”

“My,” Aunt Beth exhales. “That certainly is a sad story, for both Shawn and Joseph. It wasn’t the boy’s fault, but I sympathize with how Shawn must have felt in that moment.”

“You really haven’t read this, Aunt Beth?” Sam asks, surprised. “I thought that’s how you know so much.”

“No, I’ve only skimmed over a few pages. I think the only person to read the whole thing was Thomas Hollow. He was the last son that lived here. He died ten years ago, in 2003, and was the one who found the journal. He told the stories, and they’ve continued to be passed on. I imagine they’ve been changed a bit in order to suit the imaginations of paranoid neighbors.”

The doors to the kitchen open again and a tall older man with slightly graying hair steps into the room.

“Uncle Bill!” Sam exclaims, jumping from her chair.

Mr. Clark sets down his bag of groceries and embraces his niece, then steps back. “Look at you!” he says, surprised. “You’ve grown up so much over the last three years!”

Sam grins at her uncle, and introduces Ally before sitting back down.

“Welcome to Hollow Inn,” Uncle Bill says to them both. “We’re sure glad that you were able to come.”

Ted appears behind Bill, loaded down with more bags of groceries. He sets them on the counter and then quietly excuses himself.

While unloading the bags and putting away the food, Uncle Bill notices the journal sitting out on the table. “What’s this?” he asks, raising his eyebrows at Beth.

“The girls were curious about the inn’s past.” She quickly closes the book.

“All that legend stuff is a lot of hogwash,” he says, scowling. “There’s no such thing as ghosts.” He promptly changes the subject. “Where are the Andersons and that Steve fellow?”

“Mr. Smith was scheduled to leave this afternoon, and the Andersons decided to…check out early,” Beth finishes, glancing at the girls.

“What do you mean, ‘check out early’?” Bill doesn’t pick up on the subtle hint to let it go. “I thought they were paid up until next week?”

“Well, you know how things go,” Beth explains, wringing her hands nervously. “Plans change.”

Bill starts to ask another question, but a more obvious look from Beth silences him.

“You mean you don’t have anyone staying on this whole estate right now?” Sam asks, now understanding the seriousness of the situation. It’s summertime. The rooms should be full.

“No,” her aunt admits hesitantly. “No one except for the hired help, of course.”

“Now, Sam,” Bill says, heading back out of the kitchen. “You wipe that look off your face. Beth and I don’t want you worrying about us having enough customers. We’re doing just fine. I’ll get your bags and show you two to your rooms. Lord knows we’ve got plenty to choose from!”

Sam and Ally say goodnight to Aunt Beth and go out to the entry hall where Bill has already started up the creaky stairs with their belongings. At the top, the hallway branches off in both directions. They turn to the right, passing several closed doors.

“I hope you like the rooms,” he says, as they finally stop towards the end of the long hall that runs the length of the house on the second floor. “There’s a connecting door between you, and if you need anything just dial zero on the phone. It’s an intercom, too, so you can speak directly with us in our room and in the kitchen.” He tells them both goodnight and heads back down the stairs.

Sam and Ally let themselves in and marvel at the large rooms, decorated with antiques. After briefly running around and inspecting everything, they choose which one they want, and then admit how tired they are. Even though it’s barely eleven, they say goodnight and get ready for bed.

As Sam slides under the covers of her huge, old-fashioned four-poster bed, silence settles over Hollow Inn. Although she can barely keep her eyes open, she can’t resist the journal that she brought upstairs with her.

Propping herself up with multiple pillows, Sam places the book in her lap and stares at the front cover. She tries to imagine what it would have been like to sit in the same room ninety years ago. “What were Joseph and Shawn like?” she asks herself out loud. Maybe, she thinks, this journal will tell me. But fatigue sets in quickly and she soon finds the handwritten words blurring. After reading the first line over again three times, she realizes the diary will have to wait until morning. “I guess I’m sleepier than I thought,” she admits to the empty room.

She sets the heavy book on the nightstand and clicks off the lamp. Shadows swallow the room, having already claimed the rest of the inn, and the full moon sends streaks of silver through the thin curtains. With thoughts of Shawn and Joseph Hollow dancing through her mind, Sam is soon fast asleep.

4 A GHOSTLY ENCOUNTER

A soft thud. A light scraping sound of wood against wood. Another soft thud. Is she dreaming? Sam tries to pull herself up through heavy webs of sleep. Another unmistakable sound: someone breathing close to her head. Now she comes fully awake with a start.

“Who’s there?” she cries out, her voice a hoarse croak. Trying desperately to rub the sleep from her eyes, she pushes herself up against the headboard.

Swallowing a knot of rising panic that threatens to overtake her, she searches the thick darkness as her eyes adjust. At last, she makes out a dark shape moving ever so slightly, as if trying to quietly back away from the bed without being spotted.

Paralyzed with fear, Sam blinks rapidly, hoping that her mind is seeing something that isn’t really there. It’s just my imagination…it’s just my imagination, she murmurs to herself. Her heartbeat hammers in her head so loudly she can’t hear anything else. Holding her breath, she waits…there! Yes, there is definitely someone moving near the foot of the bed!

When she hears the same undeniable scraping sound as before, it breaks through the paralysis. Lunging for the bedside lamp, Sam cries out her uncle’s name without even realizing it.

“Bill!  Bill!  Uncle Bill!” Her screams of terror echo down the halls as her fingers curl around the lamp’s string. She pulls it frantically, squinting against the sudden flood of light. Spinning back to face the foot of the bed…Sam finds absolutely nothing!

The door to her room slams open and Bill stands in the doorway, his breaths coming in ragged gasps. Beth soon appears behind him, her face a mixture of concern and fear. Then the pounding starts.

“Sam! Sam, open the door!” Ally’s worried shouts come from the other side of their connecting door. “Open the door, Sam!  Sam!”

Bill walks quickly across the room, looking around him as he goes. Beth rushes to Sam’s side, taking her niece by the shoulders. Before Beth has a chance to ask any questions, Bill releases the lock and Ally nearly falls through the entrance.

“Sam, you’re OK!” Ally exclaims, throwing herself at her friend and embracing her.

“What in tarnation happened in here?” Bill asks, seating himself on the edge of the bed.

“I’m sorry,” Sam apologizes. “I didn’t mean to scream, it just came out. There was someone…or something in my room.”

“What?” Beth gasps.

Ally’s freckles stand out a bit more as the color drains from her face. She resumes biting her nails.

“Who was here?” Bill asks logically. “Where did they go? I didn’t pass anyone in the hall.”

“I don’t know,” Sam admits. “Some noises woke me up. A figure was standing by the bed, trying to back away slowly so I wouldn’t see it in the dark. When I finally got my senses about me and turned on the light, it was gone.” For some reason, Sam looks over at the nightstand and feels relief at the sight of the journal still lying there.

“I don’t like this,” Beth says, gripping Sam’s hand tightly. “I should have never had you two come out here with all the problems we’ve been having. Maybe you should go back home tomorrow and come visit us later, when things settle down.”

“Oh, no!” Sam exclaims, alarmed. “Please don’t make us go home, Aunt Beth. I’m fine. Really. Maybe I was just dreaming, what with all the talk about ghosts right before we went to bed. I do get bad nightmares sometimes.”

“Sam is right, Beth,” Bill says reassuringly. “Nobody was hurt. If anyone was in the room, I would have seen them. If Sam and Ally want to stay, I don’t see any harm in it.”

Beth doesn’t look convinced, but nods her head in agreement anyways. “Do you want to stay, Ally?” she asks, looking now at the frightened girl.

Ally glances back and forth between Sam and Beth, and then shrugs. “Sure, why not,” she says with a confidence she doesn’t feel.

“Okay, then,” Bill says decisively, slapping the tops of his thighs. “You stay. Maybe you should sleep in here with Sam tonight, though.”

“Sure!” Ally agrees eagerly, already jumping under the covers. She doesn’t need any coaxing.

“Are you sure you’re okay, Sam?” Beth persists, as she stands to go. “You seemed so scared. I feel horrible about this.”

“I’m fine, Aunt Beth. You know what an active imagination I have. I just had a dream and was slow to wake up.”

“Come on, Beth,” Bill says, reassuring her. “Let’s let them get some sleep. If they have any problems, I’m sure they’ll holler.” Grinning now, he tells the girls goodnight and ushers Beth from the room, closing the door behind them.

Sam and Ally sit for a moment, looking at each other.

“Do you really think it was a dream?” Ally asks quietly.

Sam slowly shakes her head back and forth.

Ally swallows, looking around the room. “Why not?” she finally asks.

“Because,” Sam explains, “I didn’t lock that connecting door.”

5 SECRETS

The second day of their vacation greets Sam and Ally with a warm morning full of birdsong. Sam showers and dresses quickly in a pair of cut-offs and a light, bright red t-shirt. Drying her long hair vigorously with a towel, she walks into the adjoining room, where Ally is seated at an antique vanity.

“How does Florence Lake sound?” Sam asks happily, trying to forget the night before.

“It sounds like a good idea,” Ally replies, applying some lip gloss. She turns on the old swivel stool, and looks at Sam solemnly.

“Don’t look at me like that,” Sam says. “I’m sure there’s nothing to worry about. I just don’t want Aunt Beth to send us home. If she knew that wasn’t a dream I had last night, we’d be on the first bus out of here.”

“I know,” Ally replies. “It’s just that I feel like we’re deceiving your aunt. I guess there’s no real harm in it, though.” Sighing, she makes up her mind and jumps up from the chair. “Let’s try to pretend like the whole thing never happened, and have some fun.”

“That’s what I want to hear!” Sam exclaims as they head for the door.

The two girls descend the staircase, following the delicious aroma of bacon and eggs cooking. They quicken their pace and enter the kitchen, now filled with morning sunshine. Aunt Beth is standing over the stove, making breakfast.

“Good morning, girls!” Beth says cheerfully, dishing up the eggs. “How did you sleep the rest of the night?”

“I slept great, Aunt Beth,” Sam answers as she sits down. After sampling some of the bacon, Sam realizes someone is missing. “Where’s Uncle Bill?”

“He had to go back into town. We need some new lights for the walk outside.” Beth explains as she sits beside Sam and takes a long swallow of juice.

“Why didn’t he get them last night?” Ally asks.

“Because they weren’t needed then,” Sam says firmly. “I couldn’t help but notice the lights on the way in last night, there are so many along the front walk. They seemed to be working fine then. What happened, Aunt Beth?”

Beth glances briefly at Sam before smoothing back the hair from her forehead. “Oh, it’s just someone playing more tricks again.”

“That’s not playing, that’s vandalism. How long has this been happening?” Sam looks steadily at her aunt, urging her to confide in them.

“I told you last night not to worry about it, Sam. Really, it’s nothing your uncle and I can’t handle. If I thought that it was serious, I would notify the police. But what would I tell them? I haven’t seen anyone do the deeds, and I don’t think they would believe me if I said a ghost was doing it. I wouldn’t believe it.” Beth looks down at her hands, trying to hide the lack of conviction on her face.

“You haven’t reported any of this stuff to the police?” Sam asks, her expression incredulous. “I don’t understand that.”

“Well, we made reports the two times that tires were slashed. The car owners had to have a report for their insurance company. But the other stuff’s all small things that are not even worth our home owner’s deductible. It’s cheaper to just replace those things ourselves. The police know about it, but not officially.

“Besides, you don’t understand how things work in the small communities out here. If we reported all of the minor damage going on, it would only fuel the rumors and make our situation worse. Better to keep it to ourselves and not let the culprits get the attention they want.”

Tapping the table in concentration, Sam thinks about what her aunt has said. Some of it makes sense. “What about a security camera?” she finally asks. “My dad got one last year to put over the garage. It’s not that expensive.”

“Your Uncle Bill already thought of that, Sam,” Beth answers with a smile. “None of the local stores has what he wants, though, so it’s on order. It should come in sometime next week.”

“Well, good!” Sam is relieved they are at least doing that much. “If you need any help with things today, please let us know.”

“Oh, no you don’t!” Beth protests. “You girls are here to have fun, not to help run the inn. Why don’t you go out to Florence Lake? It’s about four miles round trip by the trail. You can even pack a picnic lunch if you like, and make a day of it. The trail is well groomed, so you can’t get lost. It’s one of my favorite places around here.”

Sam and Ally smile at each other. “Aunt Beth, you must be a mind reader,” Sam says. “We saw Florence Lake on our way up. I was going to ask if it would be okay to go explore it.”

“Explore all you want! There’s even a boat tied up to the dock at the end of the trail. I know you can row, Sam, but how about you, Ally?”

“My family has a canoe we take to the local lakes, so I learned how to row a long time ago.”

“Good! Just be sure that you both put on a lifejacket. They’re in the boat. That is a requirement. I trust that you will follow the rules, and be back before dinner so that I don’t worry.” She looks expectantly at Sam.

“Of course, Aunt Beth! I promise,” Sam assures her.

After clearing the table and making a big lunch for later that afternoon, Sam and Ally head out into the warm, inviting morning.

6 FLORENCE LAKE

The boat that Beth mentioned turns out to be a very old rowboat that looks as if it might not float once they get in it. Emerging from the thick woods, they can’t help but spot it right away.

“That’s the boat?” Ally asks skeptically. Wiping her forehead, she sets down their lunch and pulls out two water bottles. It was a decent hike. Beth was right about the trail; it was clearly marked and impossible to miss.

Taking the water from Ally, Sam squints towards the weathered dock. An eagle calls out from overhead and she shifts her attention to the sky. The beauty of the place is breathtaking. Even from within the forest, they knew they were on special ground. Looking back at the water spread out before them, she tries to gauge how far across it is.

“That’s got to be the boat,” Sam finally says. “I don’t see any other docks.”

Florence Lake is bigger than it looked from the road last night. It’s at least a good mile to the other side, and Sam can’t even see the far end, which bends around to the right and out of sight. She’ll have to ask her uncle about fishing. That would be fun.

“Well, let’s at least check it out,” Sam suggests, walking out onto the dock cautiously. “Aunt Beth wouldn’t have told us to go out in it if it wasn’t safe.”

Upon closer inspection, they find that it is like the dock, weathered but sound. Four life vests are neatly tucked away in a center bench, and two sturdy oars are stowed in the bottom of the boat. “All it needs is a little paint!” Sam announces, smiling at Ally.

Ally doesn’t look all that convinced as she gingerly climbs in, but the boat proves reliable as they put the oars in the locks and start rowing out to the center of the lake. It isn’t a big boat, but it’s wide enough that it isn’t too wobbly and is easy to handle.

The sun is full upon their backs now as they sit facing each other. Sam rows backwards and Ally forwards, with the small bench in between them. Shards of light are reflected back at them off the deep, murky water in a dazzling display. The Rockies cut a jagged horizon in the distance, reminding them of their remoteness. They feel instantly cleansed of city life. The only sound other than the eagle is the splashing of the old wooden oars breaking the surface of the lake.

After about ten minutes of rowing, Sam and Ally decide to let the boat drift and share a can of pop.

“Wow!” Sam exclaims, after taking a long swallow and passing the can to Ally. “Have you ever seen anything more beautiful?”

Taking the offered can with one hand, Ally makes small swirls in the water with the other. I think I’m already getting a blister, she thinks, looking at the red marks on her fingers. “I have to admit,” she answers, “I really am glad that I came, even though my phone doesn’t work. Your aunt and uncle are wonderful and this might be more relaxing than a sunset on the-”

Ally’s hand freezes above the water, and the pop can slips from her fingers, clinking into the bottom of the boat.

The clatter draws Sam from her daydream and she stares, puzzled, at the still form of her friend.

“What is it, Ally?” she asks quietly.

“I saw something, Sam,” she whispers, pulling her hand into the boat. “Something big.”

Sam sighs and tries to smile. “It was just a fish. I’m sure there are some big ones in here.” But she isn’t sure enough to convince even herself.

“It wasn’t a fish!” Ally counters. “I know what a fish looks like, and they don’t have rubber fins.”

“Rubber fins? You mean like the kind you use for swimming? Who would be in the lake? No one else is here. This is on my aunt and uncle’s property. It’s not like there’s a scuba shop nearby. It has to be something else. It’s easy to see shapes-”

The right side of the boat suddenly rises up, as if a large swell hit it.

Sam realizes in shock that the boat is going to capsize. She hears a muffled scream of alarm as Ally plunges into the cold water, and then the bottom of the boat is on top of her!

****

The next few seconds fly by in a blur of confusion as Sam swims out from under the overturned boat and breaks through the water’s surface. Her lifejacket has come off from the force of hitting the water. That’ll teach me not to simply slip it over my head without fastening the clasps, she thinks, as she struggles to remain calm. Closing her eyes, she treads water and concentrates on breathing slowly. She’s a very strong swimmer but open water has always freaked her out.

She can hear Ally calling to her, but fights to control her rising panic before responding, sure that at any moment something is going to grab her feet. She finally turns at the sound of splashing behind her and watches as Ally swims smoothly up to her. Thankfully, Ally’s lifejacket is still on, and she has Sam’s vest in one of her hands.

“Here, you lost something,” Ally gasps, looking down into the dark water as they both float next to the upside-down boat.

“Thanks.” Sam takes it gratefully. They are both good swimmers, but have enough sense to know they can’t take chances this far from shore. “What in the world happened?” she asks Ally, hoping that she saw something.

“The only thing I know is that I want to get out of here now,” Ally replies, grabbing a side of the boat. “There’s no way we’re going to get this boat turned back over out here, but we might be able to swim and pull it to shore. We aren’t that far away.”

“Yeah, okay…let’s get out of here,” Sam agrees as she quickly paddles to the opposite side of the boat. With some effort, they begin to swim for the dock. Within twenty minutes they reach their destination. After turning the boat upright, they collapse on the end of the pier, exhausted.

“Well, that was definitely not a fish,” Ally says, stating the obvious. She sits up to wring the water out of her shirt. “Maybe we’ll see whoever it was when they get out of the water.”

“Not likely,” Sam says, shaking her head. “There are hundreds of places along the shore where someone could climb out unnoticed. And something tells me whoever it was doesn’t want to be seen.”

“Sam, let’s go back now.” Ally suddenly realizes how serious the situation could have been. She nervously scans the lake while pulling her sopping wet old high tops back on, and stands up. “I think it’s clear we’re not wanted here.”

“That’s exactly why we’re staying!” Sam says stubbornly. “Or at least until we’re dry and have some lunch. Thank goodness we left our food on the dock!”

“I don’t see how you can think of eating when someone just tried to drown us,” Ally protests. But she bites into the ham sandwich Sam gives her and chews hungrily.

Within an hour, they are just about dry and heading back on the trail towards the inn. Ally has to walk quickly to keep up with Sam’s fast pace. “Your aunt’s going to flip when she finds out about this.”

“No,” Sam objects. “We aren’t going to tell her anything except what a wonderful day we’ve had.”

“Why not?” Ally asks, getting frustrated. “They need to do something, Sam, or at least know what someone did to us, even if it does mean having to go home. We need to think about what’s best for your aunt and uncle, too.”

“That’s exactly why we aren’t going to tell them,” Sam explains, noting Ally’s questioning look. “I think,” Sam continues, “that whoever was in the lake is the same person who’s ‘haunting’ the inn. They knew we had life vests on and weren’t that far from shore. I don’t think they meant us any real harm.

“Don’t you see? They believe that by scaring us, they’ll also scare Aunt Beth and Uncle Bill. And if they scare the guests, too, that could even bankrupt Hollow Inn. That must be their goal; they want my aunt and uncle to give up and leave.”

“But who would do such a thing, and why?” Ally asks.

“The ‘who’, I don’t know,” Sam answers, “but the why is pretty obvious. Someone is still trying to find Shawn Hollow’s money.”

“Of course!” Ally shouts, now seeing Sam’s train of thought. “Without anyone around to get in their way, it would make hunting for it a lot easier. But what can we do?”

Sam stops in the middle of the forest path and faces Ally. “I’ll tell you what we’re going to do,” she says defiantly. “We’re going to find it first! And we’ll start by reading that journal from cover to cover.”

7 THE JOURNAL

Sam and Ally emerge from the woods at the edge of the clearing where Hollow Inn stands. They lingered on their way back so her aunt wouldn’t wonder why they didn’t stay at the lake longer. It’s now about 4:30, and evening is drawing near. A breeze rustles through the many trees scattered on the slope in front of the big house, causing birds to take flight. A few land on the rim of a bronze bird bath with an angel in the middle.

“This is an incredible place, Ally. I won’t let anyone steal it from them,” Sam vows as they make their way towards the inn.

They walk slowly along a rock path, past the bird bath, and then a bungalow where the staff live. As they reach the back door of the inn, they smell onions frying and bread baking. Sam is thinking over the events of the day when they walk into the kitchen. She doesn’t hear the question her aunt asks her.

“Sam,” Beth repeats. “I said, ‘how was the lake’?”

Sam snaps to attention and blushes. “Sorry, Aunt Beth,” she apologizes. “I was just daydreaming about how beautiful this whole place is. I can see why you love it so much.”

“Thank you, dear,” Beth replies. “I take that to mean you had a nice time? Did you find the boat?”

“Oh, we found it all right!” Ally chirps, then stammers, “I mean, it was right where you said it would be.” Before Beth can ask any more questions, the two girls excuse themselves and run upstairs, saying they need to change.

“Dinner will be ready in about forty-five minutes!” Beth calls after them.

“That was close!” Sam says, once they are in Ally’s room.

“Yeah, sorry, I almost slipped. I’m just not used to keeping things from people. I hope you’re right about not telling them.”

“I’m sure I am,” Sam assures her friend, as she passes through the connecting door and disappears into her own room. At least I hope I am, she thinks to herself.

Sighing, she picks up the old book. “I know there must be something in here about where the money is,” she says out loud to no one in particular. Always eager to solve a mystery, this is the first time Sam has actually found one. The logical part of her brain says to go downstairs right now and tell her aunt what happened at the lake. But the adventurous spirit in her says otherwise.

“I have a feeling,” she says softly to the diary in her hands, “that if you can tell us where the money is, we’ll find our ghost. And I’m willing to bet that it’s not Joseph Hollow.”

***

Sam and Ally make it back downstairs in time to help set the big, formal dining room table. It’s opposite the kitchen on the other side of the foyer and adjoins a large family room that they glimpsed last night. Just like the stairs, the table and all the original furniture in the other impressive room are made of a dark, rich oak.

Dinner consists of a large pot roast accompanied by all the traditional trimmings. The girls offered to help earlier, but Beth explained that they employed one maid to take care of cleaning the guest rooms and to help serve meals.

As they sit down to eat, Ted and the maid join the four of them. It’s obvious immediately that Bill and Beth are well liked by their employees. As they exchange happy chatter, not one word of the “ghost,” or the disabled lights is mentioned.

Sam is aching to get back upstairs to the journal, but she follows her uncle obligingly into the family room after supper. She is there to visit with them, after all. The mystery can wait for a little while.

Ted excuses himself for the evening, and the maid busies herself with clearing the table, flatly refusing any assistance from Sam and Ally. Bill lights a sweet-smelling pipe, taking Sam back to other nights of family gatherings.

“So, Sam,” he says, “what do you think of the old place?”

“I was just telling Aunt Beth this afternoon how wonderful I think it is,” she replies sincerely. “You’ve put a lot of work into it.”

“Thank you so much for inviting us,” Ally adds. “We’re really enjoying ourselves.” She glances guiltily at Sam, unnoticed by Mr. Clark.

“Well, I know there isn’t that much to do around here.” Bill stretches out on an old leather recliner and puts his feet up. “It’s just a place to relax and enjoy nature.”

“There’s plenty to do,” Sam tells him, taking a seat on the overstuffed couch. “You just have to know where to look.”

“Fortunately, we know where some of those places are!” Beth says happily. “In fact, Ted has agreed to lead you on a hike tomorrow to one of the popular features, if you’re interested.”

“Of course we are!” Ally says, intrigued. “What is it?”

“Mr. Hollow named several natural formations after his family, like the lake,” Beth explains. “One of them is a bluff that overlooks the valley. It’s a ways to get to it, but a very nice hike. The property spreads out for almost two hundred acres, so you can go a long ways before you are actually lost!”

“Good thing I brought a compass with me then,” Sam tells her. “I didn’t realize it was that big!”

“If we can get things on track with the inn,” Bill explains, “we want to build cabins down on the lake to rent out, a central hall for guest activities, and a small store.”

“That sounds amazing!” Ally says. “My parents would love to stay at something like that. You could even rent out boats and maybe get some horses and do trail rides and…”

“Whoa…,” Bill laughs, holding out his hands. “One hurdle at a time. First, we have to get past this whole legend thing and bring in some paying customers. Maybe if we can make it more than a couple days without stories about mysterious disruptions here, we’ll be okay.”

Sam and Ally look at each other, glad that they decided to keep the lake incident to themselves. If a story like that made it back to town, it would be hard to explain. It would be better to keep it under wraps until they figured out who was behind it.

“Have you seen these pictures before, Sam?”

Turning, she finds that her aunt has brought out a large photo album. Beth has it opened to some old pictures of Sam as a toddler. Laughing, she shakes her head and takes the album into her lap.

“Wow,” Sam groans.

Ally scoots in close and the girls spend the next hour going through the whole album, talking about the family reunions and other events where the photos were taken.

When they get to the end, Aunt Beth puts the album away and tells the girls to follow her. Intrigued, they are led through a maze of rooms at the back of the house, until they eventually reach a small, neat library. There, Beth turns on the inn’s only computer and invites them to get caught up with their friends.

Ally eagerly logs on to her favorite social media account, but soon discovers just how slow a dial-up modem is. After waiting nearly five minutes to load just one video, the girls quickly give up and turn the computer off. Sam is almost relieved, happy instead to explore some of the rooms before returning to where her aunt and uncle are.

Uncle Bill smiles when they enter the room, patting his generous stomach. “I’ll take a big slice of that chocolate cake you’ve got stashed out there,” he says eagerly to Aunt Beth.

“I’m sure you will!” she says, smiling broadly. “How about you girls?” she asks, heading for the kitchen. “Would you like a piece?”

Though it sounds good, Sam can’t wait another minute to get upstairs. “None for me, thanks,” she says quickly. “I’m pretty tired. I think I’ll turn in early.”

“Me too!” Ally adds.

“Well, I think that’s a good idea,” Beth agrees. “You’ll need to be up bright and early tomorrow morning for your hike.” They all exchange goodnights. Soon Sam and Ally are seated on Sam’s bed, the journal between them.

“You read it,” Ally says, folding her legs under her nightgown. “You’re a much better reader than I am.”

“Okay,” Sam agrees, opening the old book to the first page. “Here goes!”

June 18, 1903

Well, I’ve finally done it! I’ve built the house of our dreams for my beautiful wife. Two years ago I felt that all was lost with the death of my brother in the mine. However, I have found a way to honor his memory by turning this property into something else.

We’re set high up in the mountains, with our nearest neighbor ten miles away. If you look out the front yard, you can see a lake nestled in the woods. I’m naming this lake after Florence, since their beauty is comparable. When our children arrive I will in turn name a landmark after each of them, so our names will linger long after our souls are laid to rest.”

“Geez,” Ally sighs, “your aunt was right. Shawn really was a poetic writer.”

“I’m more interested in the mine he mentioned,” Sam states. “Is that how he got all his money? A gold mine?”

Hoping for more answers, Sam continues reading for another hour, but soon becomes discouraged. Most of the journal contains boring tales of kids doing unspectacular things and neighbors coming for visits. After skimming several more pages, she finally finds something fascinating:

November 15, 1924

Last week I hired a young girl from town to sit as a midwife with Florence. With the other three boys to look after and the property to manage, I just don’t have the time for Florence. Nancy seems to be quite able as a midwife and she fits in very nicely. I’m already feeling a kind of kinship towards her. She was orphaned at the age of twelve and she says this is her first real home.

Sam closes the book and creases her brow. “This is almost where we were last night, when Florence dies. You’d think he would have said something about his money by now.” Sam looks at her friend for confirmation.

“I suppose you’re right,” Ally admits, heading for her room. “If there really were something in there, I think the son who already found and read the book would have discovered what it was. Or whoever else has read it since then.”

Trying not to give up hope, Sam picks up her cup of water off the nightstand and takes a long drink. Her throat is dry after reading out loud for so long. “Not necessarily,” she calls to Ally in the other room, flipping through the pages with her other hand. “They might not have figured it out if it weren’t obvious.”

“Time for some fun!” Ally suddenly yells, appearing back at the door with two large pillows in her hands. Before Sam can tell her to wait, a pillow comes sailing and hits her square in the chest, knocking the glass from her hand.

“No!” she gasps, looking down in horror at the old journal in her lap, now soaked with water.

“I’m so sorry!” Ally cries, running to the bed, the other pillow falling to the floor.

“Quick, get me a towel or something!” Sam pleads, not knowing what else to do. Ally runs across the hall to the nearest bathroom and reappears with two towels and a washcloth, looking pale.

Sam has the journal open on the floor, desperately trying to mop the water off with the hem of her nightshirt. The old ink starts to smear, and tears spring to her eyes as the reality of the situation sets in.

Taking one of the towels from Ally, she presses down gently and blots at the paper, with better results. Taking several breaths, she tells herself not to freak out. Maybe it’s just a few pages.

After some careful work, she gets to the back cover. The inside is obviously hand sewn, with a yellowing, printed fabric tacked to some kind of board. The water has soaked through it, and Sam is afraid that it could fall apart if she touches it. It might be better to just let it dry.

Looking at it more carefully, she notices that the wet fabric has become transparent. Underneath is an unmistakable outline of a folded sheet of paper. “What’s this?” she mutters softly, feeling along the slightly raised edge. “Ally, please go get me the scissors I saw on the dresser.”

Confused, Ally does as she asks and finds the scissors next to the rest of a small manicure set. “What are you going to do?” she asks, handing them to Sam.

Without replying, Sam shoves a metal point into the sewn seam of the cover and quickly cuts the old fabric open.

8 A POEM

“What in the world!” Ally exclaims. “You don’t have any right to do that! It’s bad enough we spilled water on it. Have you gone crazy? Your aunt is going to…” She breaks off her complaints abruptly as Sam withdraws a yellowed, thankfully dry piece of paper from inside the journal’s back cover.

“A map!” Sam practically yells. But her look of accomplishment turns to one of confusion as she carefully unfolds the document.

“What is it?” Ally asks, curious now, trying to peer over Sam’s shoulder.

“Well, it’s not a map,” Sam says lamely. “It looks like it’s some sort of poem.” She stares at it intensely for a minute, and then suddenly her face brightens again. “Ally,” she says, “I was right in the first place! I mean, it’s not the kind of map where ‘X’ marks the spot, but I think it tells us where the money is. Only…I can’t figure it out.”

“Read it to me!” Ally presses. “Maybe if we put our heads together, we can make some sense of it.”

Nodding, Sam holds up the fragile piece of paper:

“My dear Florence, you have gone and taken with you my soul. So I will place my life’s endeavors where forever, your beauty I’ll hold.

I lay within a body of flight, and pray for my safe keeping. For in our sons, the taste of greed, in their veins is seeping.

The sun does set on your golden head and I watch, ever waiting. For the earth to move and us to meet, our love once again unabated.”

“Now what can that possibly mean?” Sam asks Ally. “He says, ‘my life’s endeavors’. That has to be the money, obviously.”

Ally takes the poem and looks it over. “I agree. But I can’t figure it out, either. ‘I lay within a body of flight.’ What’s that, a bird? I don’t know where that could be.”

“Tomorrow we’ll look around the house,” Sam says. “Maybe we’ll see something that fits the description.”

Ally looks skeptically at Sam, thinking. “Okay, but I don’t know, Sam. Your aunt said that the property is nearly two hundred acres. There’s no guarantee that the money is hidden here, in the house. His sons spent years looking for it before they died. It’s been decades since he wrote that. Maybe whatever he’s describing doesn’t even exist anymore.”

Sam has always appreciated the way her smart friend thinks about things. Ally is absolutely right, but Sam isn’t about to give up.

“Maybe, Ally, but what if we find it? It would mean everything to my aunt and uncle. Not only would it prevent them from losing the inn, but they would be able to expand like they want to. Imagine how much fun it would be to come here next year and stay in a cabin on the lake!”

Smiling, Ally reads through the poem again. “It would be kinda cool if we figured it out. If we don’t, though, we have to be sure and give this to your aunt.”

“Oh, of course!” Sam replies, happy that Ally seems more interested now. “Even though they don’t believe in it, it’s still their property, so we have to give it to them. We’ll just…use it for a little while first.”

“You know, even though I’m going through phone withdrawals, I’m really glad I came,” Ally confesses, handing the poem back. “To be honest with you, it’s almost a relief to not have to be messaging people constantly.”

Sam is surprised to hear this. She’s always thought Ally loved texting and the social media stuff. Sam, on the other hand, often feels stressed out by it. It’s good to know that she isn’t the only one. “I know what you mean,” she finally says. “At first it was fun, but now it’s almost a burden at times. I feel like if I don’t answer someone right away, or constantly share things about what I’m doing, people will think I’m weird.”

“Seriously?” Ally asks hesitantly. “I didn’t know you feel that way, Sam. We hardly talk anymore after school. I mean, we text and stuff, but it’s not the same. Remember how we would always be on the phone or at each other’s houses? It drove our parents crazy!”

Laughing, Sam takes Ally’s hand and gives it a squeeze. “I know,” she says. “Let’s make a pact. Let’s promise that from now on, we won’t just text each other. If we want to talk, we’ll actually call. I miss the way the things used to be, too.”

Ally gives Sam a hug, then quickly grabs one of the dropped pillows. “I think we need to finish something,” she says mischievously.

“Wait!” Sam hollers, as the pillow slams into her head. “No fair! I don’t have one!” Careful to avoid the open journal and poem on the floor, Sam runs from her room and into Ally’s. She arms herself with several more pillows from the big bed. For the next fifteen minutes, they act very much like the little girls they were just remembering.

That is, until Uncle Bill knocks on the door.

“Sam? Ally? Is everything okay?” Embarrassed, they drop their pillows. Sam looks at the clock on the nightstand next to Ally’s bed and is shocked to see that it is nearly midnight.

“Sorry, Uncle Bill!” she calls softly. “We’re okay. Just messing around. We’re going to sleep now.” They are answered by the sound of his heavy footsteps going back down the hallway. Looking at each other, they break out again in laughter, muffled by the pillows held to their faces.

They say goodnight and then go straight to bed.  Back in her own room, Sam decides to leave the journal where it is, afraid to move it while it’s still wet. The poem, however, she carefully refolds and hides in her bag.

“I knew you’d tell us,” she whispers, zipping up the bag. “Now all I have to do is understand what you’re saying.”

9 CABIN IN THE WOODS

Morning arrives quickly. Both girls are still yawning while they walk behind Ted, following a trail of sunflower seed shells. The forest calls out to them as they go along the winding path, gradually climbing higher up the mountain. More than an hour has already elapsed since leaving the inn, but Ted has kept up a steady pace.

As they come to a level area, Sam has a chance to catch her breath and decides to ask Ted what he knows about the mine.

“I heard there used to be a mine here somewhere. Do you know anything about it?”

“Of course I do,” Ted answers without pause. “It’s well-known around here as the biggest producing mine in the county.”

“What?” Ally exclaims.

“I should say that it used to be,” he continues. “Shawn and his brother were the first ones to mine the area, and the most successful. They had just hit a big vein of gold when there was a cave-in. Shawn survived, but his brother and two other men were buried alive.”

“How horrible!” Sam cries, imagining what it must have been like.

“Shawn never recovered from the loss,” Ted continues. “He used some of the gold to build the house for his wife…as far away from the mine as possible. No one ever saw the rest of the gold, though. Some people speculated that it never really existed, but I think his sons were right. They believed he just didn’t want to spend the blood money, so he hid it away, instead.”

“There!” Ted says suddenly, pointing across an open ravine to a large outcropping of rock on the opposite side. “That’s called…”

“Why, that has to be Michael’s Peak!” Ally announces.

“That’s right,” Ted confirms. “How did you know that? I thought your aunt wanted it to be a surprise.”

“We read about it in the--”

Ally stops as Sam jabs her with an elbow and gives her a disapproving look.

“The journal?” Ted asks, turning around to face them. “I didn’t know that Shawn Hollow’s journal was still around after all this time. No one besides his kids ever saw it, as far as I know.”

“Um…yeah. Well, it was up in the attic,” Sam says, reluctant to share the information. “It’s just an old, dusty thing with a bunch of stories. My aunt and uncle haven’t even read it.” She tries to make it sound as boring as possible. The last thing she wants is for anyone else to get in on the hunt.

Sam almost walks into Ted’s back as he comes to a sudden stop in front of her.

“Oh man, it’s ten already!” he says, frowning as he looks at his watch. “I’ve got to start back. I know we originally planned a longer hike, but I’ve got some work that needs to get done this afternoon. If you want to keep going, just stay on this path and it’ll take you around to the rock. It’s roped off, and I would definitely stay inside the marked area. You kids have fun.”

“Okay, I guess we’ll see you later then,” Sam says, her face burning at his comment. She hates to be called a kid; she’s practically a teenager.

“Thank you, Ted!” Ally calls after him as he waves and disappears around a bend. As soon as he’s out of sight, she turns to face Sam. “Why did you do that?” she demands, rubbing her sore ribs.

“I’m not so sure we can trust him,” Sam explains, still staring at the empty trail. “I don’t want anyone to know about this poem until we find out what it means.” She pats the back pocket of her jeans. “We need to be the ones to solve this.”

“He probably knows this property better than anyone,” Ally counters. “Maybe he could help us.”

“Oh my gosh!” Sam says, grabbing Ally’s arm. “I just realized something! Now I know I don’t trust him.”

“What are you talking about?”

“We never said it was Shawn Hollow’s journal. How did he know that?”

Ally crosses her arms, thinking about it. “He probably just put one and one together. It’s not like the journal’s existence is a secret. It wouldn’t be that hard to figure out. That doesn’t prove anything.”

“Maybe not,” Sam confesses, “but from now on, let’s be careful what we say when we’re around him. Now, let’s get over to that rock. I’m wondering if we can see the lake from there! We should look for carvings in it, too.”

After another twenty minutes of walking, they reach the lookout and find that the view is breathtaking. They can’t see the lake, but it’s still spectacular. Getting down on their hands and knees, they examine the surface as far as they can but don’t see anything that even comes close to resembling a bird…or any other kind of carving. Feeling let down, they break out the snacks they brought with them.

“Let’s just go back,” Sam says, stuffing their trash back in the bag. “Maybe we’ll have time to check out the mine. I think that’s going to be our best bet.”

Gingerly picking their way back off the large rock, they reach the bottom and start back along the trail.

“Don’t you think the mine would be a pretty obvious hiding place?” Ally cautions. “I’m sure that’s one of the first places the sons would have looked.”

“I guess,” Sam says slowly, “but they wouldn’t have had the clues that we do.” She pauses, bending over and picking a blue bandana up off the ground. She holds it out for Ally to see. “Hmm, what’s this?”

“Maybe Ted dropped it?” Ally suggests, taking it from Sam.

“No, he didn’t have a bandana. I’m sure of it. It doesn’t look like it’s been out here for very long, either.”

“One of the guests must have dropped it while hiking, then,” Ally concludes, shrugging her shoulders. She starts walking again.

“Wait!” Sam calls out. “I think there’s another trail here!”

Turning back, Ally goes to stand next to her friend, and they both examine the foliage where the scarf was lying. Sure enough, there appears to be a deer trail of some sort. Before Ally can object, Sam takes off down the path. “Let’s find out where it goes!”

“Sam!” Ally cries, hesitating for a moment. When Sam disappears, she takes a deep breath and then quickly catches up to her.

Within minutes of following the narrow, winding path, they emerge into a small clearing. An old, dilapidated cabin sits on the edge of the open area. River rock from a crumbled chimney lies scattered on the ground. An old wooden door leans outward on rusted hinges, and bare holes gape where glass once formed windows.

“I’m not going in there!” Ally protests, anticipating Sam’s intentions.

“Fine,” Sam says, starting across the clearing. She disappears through the cabin door. It takes a moment for her eyes to adjust to the murky darkness, and what she sees quickens her pulse.

“Ally, come here!” she calls out.

Forgetting her uneasiness, Ally runs for the door, imagining all sorts of horrible things. When she gets there, she looks inside and lets out a sigh of relief. In a pile on the floor are fins, a face mask, and an air tank.

“So, this is our fish from the lake,” Sam says. Looking around the small room, she confirms her suspicions. Stacked on precarious looking shelves are cans of food and supplies. A broken cot lies in the corner with moth-eaten blankets covering it, and a portable camp stove sits beside it. “Someone’s living here,” she says, stating the obvious.

The girls move back out into the daylight and inspect the woods around them cautiously.

“I suppose you’re not going to tell your aunt about this, either,” Ally complains.

“No.” Sam confirms. Taking the poem out of her back pocket, she faces her friend. “Now that we have this, I know we can find the money. I’m sure this place is connected to the mysterious things going on. If my aunt finds out what happened at the lake, and about the person living here, our vacation will be cut short for sure, like tonight. Then who’ll solve this riddle? No one! They don’t believe there’s anything hidden here. They wouldn’t even look for it!”

Neither girl speaks for a while, until finally Ally nods her head. “I guess you’re right. But Sam, this is trespassing. I know if this all isn’t resolved soon, your aunt and uncle are going to be forced to sell. But this isn’t something we can hide for very long. Let’s agree to tell them everything if we don’t find the money in a couple of days. Okay?”

“Agreed,” Sam answers. “Two days. Now, let’s get out of here before the person that stuff belongs to gets back.”

As the girls make their way out of the clearing, they fail to see the eyes watching them from the woods.

10 CLUES

Sam and Ally arrive at the inn just in time for lunch. Keeping to their compromise, they mention nothing about the cabin or the diving gear. They find out that the maid has been given a couple of days off, since there aren’t any guests registered for the rest of the week. They’re happy to help out with whatever chores they can and eagerly go about cleaning up the lunch dishes.

“Aunt Beth,” Sam begins, stacking plates into the dishwasher. “We read about a gold mine last night in the journal. It’s somewhere here on the property, right?”

“Yes! I was going to suggest you go see that tomorrow. It’s at the very opposite end of the land. It’s a good three miles each way, but there is an old gravel road that we’ve kept clear enough to use as a bike trail. We have several bikes here for guests, and I thought it would make for a fun ride.”

“Would we be able to go today?” Ally asks.

Glancing up at the clock on the wall, Beth thinks about it for a minute, finally shaking her head. “I would prefer you wait and go in the morning. It’s already after one and I don’t want to take any chance of you not getting back before dark. There are all sorts of marked trails that branch off of it along the way. Knowing Sam, she’s going to want to explore them all. I think you would have more fun if you weren’t rushed for time.”

“I think you’re right, Aunt Beth,” Sam agrees. “We were going to walk around the inn and the property near the house, if that’s okay. There are all sorts of neat, old things.”

Laughing, Beth dries her hands. “Of course it’s okay. If you like antiques, there are enough in this old house to keep you entertained for a long time. I’ll just need a little help around dinner time, but you’re free until then!”

“Thanks!” Hugging her aunt, Sam then starts for the stairs. Pausing, she turns back. “Umm… Aunt Beth? About the journal. Last night, I accidently spilled some water on it. I think it’s okay, but some of the pages are damaged. I’m really sorry.”

“Well, thank you for being honest with me, Sam. I’m really not concerned about it, though. You can even keep the shabby thing, if you’d like. I have no use for it.”

Her face burning with shame over her aunt’s compliment for honesty, Sam mutters a thank you and hurries after Ally. They both reach Sam’s room at the same time and plop down on the bed. Taking the poem from her back pocket, Sam flattens it out on the comforter.

“‘I will place my life’s endeavors where forever your beauty I’ll hold,’” she reads out loud. “This doesn’t make any more sense now than it did last night,” Sam complains.

“Let me see it,” Ally says, taking the poem. “‘The sun does set on your golden head as I watch, ever waiting.’ Hey! Maybe there’s an old picture of Florence somewhere, facing west.”

“That’s a better idea than I can come up with,” Sam remarks. “I think I remember seeing some portraits in the family room. Let’s start looking around there and work our way outside. We’ve got several hours still before it gets dark!”

On their way to the door, Sam glances at the nightstand where she left the journal that morning. “Ally!” she cries, “the journal is gone!”

Ally turns to the empty table that Sam is pointing at and stares in disbelief. “Are you sure you put it there?” she asks, opening the small drawer to double check.

“Of course I’m sure. The pages were dry this morning, so I closed it and put it back there. Oh, who would want to take it?”

“Someone who’s looking for the same thing we are,” Ally surmises.

“My aunt would’ve just asked for it,” Sam ponders. “And Uncle Bill certainly wouldn’t take it. That leaves just the maid and Ted. I’m pretty sure the maid left last night, though.”

“Ted knew it was here,” Ally says quietly. “I told him it was this morning. He sure seemed to be in a rush to get back here all of a sudden when we were hiking. I guess you were right, Sam.”

“Wait a minute,” Sam gasps. “It makes sense now.”

“What does?” Ally asks.

“The first night we got here, remember how Ted helped my uncle carry his groceries in? Well, he must have seen us with the journal then and that’s why he broke into my room that night to try and take it! When he confirmed this morning that we still had it, he saw his chance to try and get it again. I’ll bet it was his plan all along to get us way out there on the trail, so he’d be sure to have time.”

“But how did he get in?” Ally questions, looking skeptical. “The other night, I mean. Your uncle would have seen him in the hallway, and there isn’t any other way he could have gone. I suppose today he could have just walked in, although your aunt would have wondered what he was doing.”

“I’m not sure,” Sam confesses, looking slowly around the room.

“How about the cabin, though?” Ally presses. “It would make sense to store some things there, but someone is obviously living in it.”

Tapping her chin, Sam begins to walk along the bedroom wall. “He must be working with someone,” she says, distracted. “It couldn’t have been him in the lake, anyway. He was here working on stuff around the inn all day.”

Suddenly Sam drops to her knees near an old high-backed chair. “I knew it!” she shouts.

“What?” Ally asks, alarmed.

“That first night I heard a scraping sound. I assumed it was the door connecting our rooms, but we know he didn’t come or go that way. Look at this chair,” she instructs.

Ally comes to stand by her side, confused.

“See how far out from the wall it is? Look at the wooden floor. There are scrape marks under the chair, like it’s been pushed back and forth several times.”

Getting down on her knees now, too, Ally leans in close. “You’re right! But why would someone be moving furniture in the dark?”

Grinning, Sam leans back on her heels.  “Think about it. This is a really old house, designed and built by Shawn Hollow. Someone got in and out of this room without being seen. There’s got to be a secret door here somewhere! Check the wood paneling behind it.”

Caught up in the excitement now, Ally joins Sam in pushing on each panel of wood. She didn’t even think it was odd that three of the walls were traditional, while this inner wall, the one opposite the connecting room, was done in panels.

“Oh!” Ally squeals.

Sam jumps back as the wall beneath her hands springs outward.

“There was a spring latch under it,” Ally explains, as Sam moves the chair out of the way.

“I can’t believe there’s actually a secret passageway!” Sam says, her voice ragged with excitement. She peers into a long, dark hallway beyond the door and claps her hands together. “Maybe the money is back there!”

“I don’t think so,” the more rational-minded Ally replies. “Obviously, someone looking for the money has used this passageway several times,   including when they tried to steal the journal. If the money were in there, I’m sure they would have found it.”

“Oh, I guess you’re right.” Sam tries not to let hopes fall too far. “Well, that’s okay. It’s still really cool! Come on, let’s get a flashlight and find out where this leads!”

Within minutes, they’re back with a flashlight from the utility room and find themselves in the old, musty passageway. It’s so narrow in between the walls, that they have to sit sideways.

“I’ll bet I know where that goes!” Sam says after going a short distance. She’s pointing at a door up ahead.

“Where?” Ally asks, as they stop in front of the old, ornate doorknob.

Sam pushes it open, revealing a massive bedroom with a huge four-poster bed.

“I’m willing to bet that this was Joseph Hollow’s room. The same room where a ‘figure’ was seen looming over the bed,” Sam explains.

They quietly close the door and continue their investigation of the passageway. A creaky flight of narrow steps takes them down to a back entrance by the root cellar. Not finding anything else of interest, they make their way back up the stairs and stop again at the secret door to the large bedroom.

“So this explains how someone took the journal without being seen, as well as the bumps in the night,” Ally says. “But it doesn’t tell us who did it, man or ghost.”

“Maybe it does,” Sam suggests.

Ally looks down at her friend crouched on the floor of the passageway. Sam picks something up and then stands, pointing the flashlight at the objects in the palm of her hand.

“Have you ever heard of a ghost that chews sunflower seeds?” she asks, displaying the empty shells in her hand. They are still damp.

11 A CONFESSION

Dinner that evening is served early. Like the night before, there is good food and friendly conversation. If anyone notices the knowing glances between Sam and Ally, nothing is said about their behavior. They have a plan brewing, and the time to pull it off is drawing close.

They spend the rest of the afternoon exploring the house, looking for old pictures or carvings. While they find some portraits and other interesting antiques, there isn’t anything promising. They are both holding out hope for the mine the next day, because they’re running out of ideas. Sam is very aware that she only has a day left before she’s promised to tell her aunt and uncle everything.

After the dishes are cleared and the girls are done helping clean up, they use the phone in the front hall to call home and check in. Their parents are happy to hear from them, and Sam’s older brother grills her with questions for nearly half an hour. After what seems like forever, they’re able to say goodbye and then go outside to take a short walk before it gets too dark.

They paid careful attention earlier to find out what Ted was doing after dinner. They watched him leave the house a short time before to work on the sprinkling system back behind the house. Now they make their way in that general direction, keeping a row of trees in between them.

As they draw close, they begin their pre-arranged conversation, loud enough that he can hear it.

“Are you sure that poem you found tells us where the money is hidden?” Ally asks.

“It has to,” Sam answers. “Why else would Shawn have written it? It’s obvious that there’s a message hidden in there somewhere. We just have to figure it out.”

They pause with their backs to the trees, knowing Ted is crouched over a small trench in the ground on the other side. Sam hopes they aren’t being too obvious, but it would be easy to miss him if you didn’t know he was there.

“I just don’t want it to disappear like the journal did,” Sam continues, lowering her voice a little to make it sound more like a secret. “This time, I’ll be sure to keep it hidden in my backpack. I wonder who could have taken it. Do you really think it could have been the ghost? Because that kind of freaks me out…” Sam can’t help but smile at the last part, as they walk away and go back inside to wait.

****

“Do you think it worked?” Ally asks, sitting at the bedroom window. Peeking between the curtains, she tries to see if there is any movement in the gathering shadows between the staff lodge and inn.

“I don’t know,” Sam shrugs, pacing the floor. “I guess we’ll find out in a little while. What time is it? It feels like we’ve been waiting forever!”

Pulling her almost-useless phone from her back pocket, Ally checks the time. “Nearly eleven,” she announces. “We’ve been sitting up here for two hours now. Maybe he didn’t fall for it. He seems pretty sma--”

Sam looks up to see what made Ally catch her breath. She is waving her over to the window. Making her way by the thin moonlight, Sam sits next to her and looks outside eagerly.

“There!” Ally says, bouncing up and down. “Over by the shed.  See?”

Squinting, Sam watches the shed for a moment, and then tries to contain her excitement when she spots an unmistakable figure lurking slowly towards them. “Come on!” she whispers, pulling at Ally’s arm.

Each holding on tight to a flashlight, they quietly enter the passageway. Moving to the door to Joseph’s room, they sit facing each other, knees touching in the small space.

Moments after they get into position, the unmistakable creak of an old door is followed by heavy footsteps on the stairs below them. Although the person is moving slowly, it’s impossible to be silent. When the approaching figure is only a few feet from them, they click on their lights simultaneously and flash them into Ted’s stunned face.

First fear, then anger clouds Ted’s handsome features as he tries to decide how to react. “What are you two doing here?” he demands hoarsely.

Sam rises slowly and looks him in the eye. “I think we should be asking you that question, Ted. Or should we just call you ‘Mr. Ghost’?” she mocks.

“Okay,” he admits, “so I’m guilty of making some noise. But I haven’t done anything wrong.”

“I’d call vandalism and causing some very nice people to lose all they’ve worked for very wrong,” Ally chastises.

“I haven’t done any damage around here!” Ted argues. “I sure didn’t mean to hurt anyone,” he adds quietly, looking down at his hands.

“Maybe you should be trying to convince my uncle,” Sam says, turning to leave.

“No! Wait,” Ted pleads. “Let me explain.”

Sam turns back. After a moment of thought, she sits back down.

“Okay,” she says, giving in. “But it better be good.”

“I guess it all depends on what you consider good,” Ted replies. He sits next to them, their flashlights still playing on his face.

“When I was ten, I can remember sitting on my great-grandmother’s lap, listening to her stories. One of them always stuck with me, and it’s the reason I’m here.

“She told me about a kind-hearted man who took her in and gave her a home when no one else cared. She was only sixteen, and the man hired her as a midwife and nursemaid. She helped raise six younger foster brothers and sisters, so knew a bit about it. The man’s wife died while giving birth, but my great-grandma ended up staying and helped to raise his four sons.”

Ted pauses long enough for Sam and Ally to digest his story.

“You’ve read the journal,” he continues, “so you know that I’m talking about Nancy. Shawn treated her like a daughter, and she loved him in the same way. It was very hard for her to leave. And when she heard he had died, she knew he died a lonely man.

“No matter how hard she tried, she could never control Shawn’s four boys. They seemed determined to make life hard for Shawn. He had spoiled them and they were very isolated up here. As they grew older, they didn’t care about anything other than what they wanted, especially his gold. Great-grandmother Nancy said Shawn seemed more convinced as time went on that the boys shouldn’t have it. He became paranoid and stopped what little banking he did and hid everything.

“He was always weird about the gold because of his brother’s death. He would go into town a few times a year and cash some of it in to live off of. But, towards the end, he even stopped doing that. With the new will never getting to the lawyer, no one ever figured out where the gold was. My great-grandmother was sure, however, that it was somewhere here at Hollow Inn.”

“So you did come here to take the money!” Sam interrupts angrily.

“It’s not that way,” Ted tries to explain, looking defiantly at Sam. “Last year, my parents were killed in a car accident. It wasn’t until a few months later, with no family left, that I began thinking about Hollow Inn.”

“I’m sorry about your family,” Sam says gently, “but it still doesn’t excuse what you’ve done.”

“I haven’t done anything!” Ted insists. “I don’t need the blasted money. My parents’ life insurance is all I’ll ever need. I just couldn’t get this place out of my head, or the idea of a treasure hunt. I needed something to do, a reason to go on, and I ended up here. When I arrived though, I found your aunt and uncle, Sam. I realized it wouldn’t be easy to look for the money with people around. I was going to just rent a room for a while, but I’m not quite eighteen yet and don’t have a credit card, or any adult to sign for me. When I found out they were looking to hire, all I had to do was forge a signature on my application. It’s summer break, so your aunt and uncle weren’t at all suspicious.

“I didn’t have anything to go back to, nothing but an empty house full of memories. They really needed the help anyways and it gave me the perfect opportunity to snoop around. It almost felt like coming home, after all the years I heard and thought about the place.”

“But what about the ghost?” Ally asks tentatively.

“And let’s not forget the vandalism, either. Or the fact that you tried to scare us with the legend on the first day we were here,” Sam accuses.

“I may be responsible for the ghost noises,” Ted admits. “It’s kind of hard not to step on any creaking boards back here.

“The time when the guest found me in her room was a mistake. I was looking for the money, and I didn’t realize there was anyone in there until she screamed. I almost left Hollow Inn after that, I felt so guilty. But I realized it would have made things even worse for your aunt and uncle, since they would have such a hard time replacing me.

“As for the damage,” Ted continues, glancing at Sam, “I don’t know anything about it. I’ve never broken a single thing, and I never would. I want to know who’s doing it just as badly as you do. I told you about the legend and the ghosts because I felt guilty. I thought if I told you about it, you wouldn’t suspect it was me.”

“Do you know anything about the lake?” Ally asks.

“No,” Ted answers. “What about the lake?”

“Nothing,” Sam says a bit too quickly, looking sternly at Ally. Ted glances from Sam to Ally and back to Sam again.

“Sam,” he says, “if something else has happened, you should tell me. We might be able to figure out what’s going on.”

Sam plays her flashlight along the passage wall, and then brings it to rest on Ted’s face again. “There’s really nothing else to talk about,” she says firmly. “Except maybe why you stole the journal if your great-grandmother already told you everything?”

Ted’s face flushes with anger, and he stands to go.” First,” he says stiffly, “I didn’t steal it. I only borrowed it. You’ll get it back tomorrow. Secondly, I’m not lying about anything. Nancy really was my great-grandmother. I wanted to read the journal for the same reason you did. I thought it might have some clue as to where the money is. Which reminds me, is there really some sort of riddle?”

When neither girl answers, he grins slightly and folds his arms in front of him. “Okay,” he says, “I get the hint. No more questions. Just remember that I’m here, and I want to help you. But be careful. Somebody is causing that vandalism, and it’s not me. Good night.”

Before he can turn to go, Sam jumps up and grabs his arm. “Ted,” she says, “I won’t tell my uncle anything. For now.”

“Thanks,” he replies and disappears back down the passageway into the darkness.

12 GOLD MINE

“Don’t you think you were a little mean to Ted?” Ally asks.

Sam and Ally are pedaling down a broad, gravel trail. Aunt Beth explained earlier that this used to be a road leading to the mine. They’ve kept it clear of weeds and put down gravel once a year to make a bike path. The mountain bikes the girls are now on are like new and handle the terrain easily.

Sam is trying not to get irritated. They had this same discussion last night after returning to the bedroom. “Ally,” she says as pleasantly as possible, “like I explained last night, I’m not sure that we can trust him. I guess I might have been a little rude, but I don’t think you can blame me. How do we know that he won’t just take the money and run?”

“I don’t think he would,” Ally says with a surety that Sam doesn’t understand. “I think we should have told him about the poem and what happened at the lake.”

“Well, we’re telling my aunt and uncle everything tomorrow, anyways, if we don’t figure this out. I think it’s better for them to decide what to do with Ted.”

The two of them ride in silence for a while, taking in the scenery. They are traveling in the opposite direction of the lake and Michael’s Rock. This side of the property climbs gently upwards with some nice level areas. The trail is lined with ponderosa pines and huge red cedars. Sam almost falls off her bike twice while tipping her head up to try to see the top of the trees.

It’s another sunny, warm summer day, and the floor of the woods is slowly heating up, releasing its sweet scent of pine needles. It’s a good smell, and it makes Sam smile in spite of the stress of the conversation. She hopes they’ll find something at the mine. She doesn’t really know what to expect, but her aunt made it sound like there wasn’t too much to see. This was one site on the property not given a name. Shawn Hollow obviously didn’t have fond memories of it.

“Sam, I’m sorry,” Ally suddenly says.

Looking back at her friend, Sam sees that she is trying to catch up with her. She slows down, and they are soon side-by-side.

“I understand why you don’t trust him. I guess I’m just kinda scared about everything and thought it would be nice to have some help. But we can do this on our own; I know we can figure it out!”

Encouraged by Ally’s enthusiasm, Sam returns her smile, and they pick up the pace. They’ve already passed several smaller trails branching off the road, but they ignore them. They decided last night that they would wait to explore them on their way back. Getting to the mine and having plenty of time there is what’s most important.

According to Aunt Beth, the road comes to a dead end at the mine, so it’s impossible to get lost. It’s about three miles each way, and they have already been riding for over half an hour. They should be there any minute. Just as Sam is finishing this thought, they come around a bend, and find themselves right in front of a rock wall.

“Wow,” Ally breathes, coming to a skidding halt in the loose gravel. The face of the cliff climbs at least two hundred feet straight up, spreading to either side of them and disappearing from view into the forest. The entrance to the mine is about the size of a one-car garage door, with several boards secured across it. Off to one side is an old, weathered sign with the painted words ‘Danger!  Keep Out!’ on it.

“Are you sure we should go in there?” Ally questions. She tries to peer into the darkness beyond the boards. “Your aunt was pretty clear about us staying out of it.”

Sam struggles once again with her conscience. Ally is right. Aunt Beth told them they were absolutely not, under any circumstances, to go into the old mine. It wasn’t stable and could have a cave-in at any time. Laying the bike down, she removes her backpack and fishes around for the flashlight she brought.

“We aren’t really going to go into the mine,” Sam counters. “We’ll just check out the entrance. I’m sure that if this part weren’t safe, it would have already collapsed. If Shawn hid the money in there, he wouldn’t have put it deep inside where it might get buried. Don’t you agree?”

Tapping her lip with a finger for a moment, Ally weighs the question. “I guess,” she finally says. “But seriously, Sam, if we don’t see something right away, I’m getting out of there!”

“Deal,” Sam agrees, handing Ally a flashlight. Approaching the entrance with more confidence than she feels, Sam reads the other sign attached to the rock under the warning. “Established by Shawn Hollow in 1898. Closed in 1901 after the tragic deaths of three men that still lie within.”

“Well, that’s creepy,” Ally says, looking around at the woods. They are basically in the middle of nowhere, and she reaches out of habit for the now dead cell phone in her back pocket.

“Could you imagine what it must have been like?” Sam asks, not noticing how uneasy Ally is. “The miners must have used horses and carriages back then, and had lanterns for light. Oh, look at this stuff!” She points out some antique pick axes and shovels arranged near the entrance. “They must have used some of these tools to find the gold. How cool is that?”

Ally tries to seem interested, but can’t help being drawn back to the danger sign. The thought of the dead miners still in there somewhere overrides any excitement. “Let’s just get this over with,” she says through gritted teeth.

Sam locates a space between the boards that is big enough to wiggle through easily. Once on the other side though, her bravery falters.

Ally finds her hovering near the entrance, standing in the thin rays of sunlight filtering through the boards.

They both hesitate as they step into the heavy gloom. The air feels damp and smells musty, like an old basement. The flashlights do little to push the shadows back, as if the darkness is denser than normal.

“I don’t like it in here at all, Sam. Can we please just go?”

Taking a deep breath, Sam turns to examine the rock walls on either side of them. “Let’s just look for a few minutes, Ally. Then we’ll leave, I promise.”

They soon discover all sorts of sketchings and games scrawled on the walls, likely made by miners trying to pass the time. Distracted with their search, the girls end up a good twenty feet from the entrance, nearing the first bend. The tunnel has gotten wider and is littered with boulders and dust.

“Sam,” Ally cautions, “we’re going too far. We should go back now. I don’t think there’s anything here.”

“I just want to see what’s around this curve, and then we’ll leave,” Sam replies. “Come on! There are some pretty interesting drawings on here. One of these guys was quite an artist. I want to make sure there isn’t one of Florence.”

Ally follows reluctantly, shining her light over the rough stone. They’ve only gone a few feet more when the unmistakable sound of a rattle erupts from behind them. Spinning back towards the entrance, Sam searches the floor and spots a large rattlesnake coiled up in the middle of the tunnel!

Screaming, Ally jumps behind Sam, both of them retreating farther into the mine. “Is that a rattlesnake?” she cries, holding on tight to Sam’s arms.

“Yeah,” Sam confirms. “I saw one once before that was ran over in the road. They’re pretty common out here. This one must have been under one of those rocks. Maybe if we just stay still long enough, it’ll go back.” In spite of them not moving, the snake slowly starts to uncoil and move towards them.

“What are we going to do?” Ally pleads. “We can’t go any farther into the mine. It’s too dangerous!”

Just then, another noise fills the tight space, coming from the entrance. It begins as a banging sound, then becomes footsteps pounding the dirt. As the snake is almost within striking distance, Ted appears behind it, one of the old pick axes in his hands.

“Get back!” he orders, raising the axe over his head. The girls do what they’re told and move back several more feet.

In one swift motion, Ted brings the axe down and chops off the rattler’s head. Even though the snake is obviously dead, he cautiously moves the head off to the side with the pick. “They can still bite you,” he explains.

“Eww!” Ally moans, gingerly stepping around the rest of the snake and hurrying for the exit, Sam right behind her. They are soon standing back out in the bright daylight, the quick exit made easier by another missing board that Ted ripped off on his way in.

Following close behind, Ted emerges from the mine and stands glowering at them. “What in the world were you doing in there? Are you crazy? You could have been killed!”

Ally starts to cry softly, but Sam sticks her chin out. “We were just exploring. We didn’t go that far. Who could have known that a snake might be in there?”

“Anyone with common sense!” he says, pointing a finger angrily at Sam. “Snakes love to hang out in caves, and no one has been in there for years. For some very good reasons. If the snake didn’t kill you, a cave-in might have! Do you know how mad your aunt would be if she found out what you did?”

“Oh, please don’t tell her!” Ally begs. “She’ll be sure to send us home. Then we’d never find the money!”

“Thank you for helping us, Ted,” Sam adds, hanging her head. “We really didn’t think it would be that dangerous.”

“Exactly. You didn’t think. If you’re determined to go on this treasure hunt without me, do me a favor--try not to do anything else so stupid. Okay? I might not be there next time.” With that, he stomps away.

Sam’s face burns with embarrassment and for the first time, she begins to doubt that they’ll ever find the gold.

13 DISCOVERY

“I feel just awful,” Ally says quietly. They’ve been walking their bikes in silence for over a mile now. Neither of them are in a hurry to get back to the inn. After replacing the boards over the entrance as best they could, they’d gathered up their things and eaten their lunch before heading out.

“I know. I do too,” Sam agrees. “I’m sorry for dragging you in there. You didn’t even want to do it. I should have listened to you.”

“It’s okay,” Ally sighs. “You couldn’t have known about the snake. I meant about Ted.”

“Oh,” Sam says, surprised. “I’m obviously glad that he was there and helped us, but haven’t you wondered why he was there?”

Stopping, Ally turns to look at her friend. “What do you mean?”

“Why did he follow us? He must have been spying on us, hoping to catch us finding the money. I think it’s creepy, and I still don’t trust him.”

“But he helped us,” Ally insists.

“Only because our lives were in danger,” Sam points out. “It’s not that I think he’s evil, Ally, but I don’t trust his intentions when it comes to my aunt and uncle and this property. I still think he’s got to be working with the person hiding in that cabin.”

“I think that the gold is making you paranoid now,” Ally suggests.

Sam considers this and then shakes her head. “Maybe,” she answers, “but one thing is for sure: things have gone too far. You were right. I should have told my aunt and uncle all of it from the beginning. It was wrong of me to drag you into this. We’ll tell them everything tonight after dinner, okay? I’m really sorry, Ally.”

Letting her bike fall, Ally turns and hugs her friend. “It’s okay, Sam. Really, it is. Except for that snake, this has been really fun. I hope they aren’t too mad at us and let us come back next summer.”

Hugging her back, Sam is glad that Ally is so forgiving. “Oh, I don’t think they’ll be too upset. Except at the snake and whoever tipped the boat. I’m sure we can come back, so long as they still own it.”

With that sobering thought, they pick the bikes back up and ride until they reach the open grounds of the estate. They head for the shed where the bikes are stored. After securing them, they go find Aunt Beth and insist that she give them some chores to do. Reluctant at first, she finally admits she could use some help with the laundry, since she changes all the bedding in the inn once a week, even if it hasn’t been used.

Carefully avoiding any questions about the mine, the girls spend the next several hours washing and folding sheets and blankets. With the last bed made, Sam and Ally head back outside for a walk before dinner. They’re both feeling anxious about the conversation they plan on having later.

Walking up the long, sloping back lawn, they find an old iron bench at the edge of the woods. It faces the lake that sits in the valley spread out below them. Sitting next to Ally, Sam pulls the poem out of her pocket and sighs. “I guess we’ll never know what Shawn was trying to tell us.”

Putting an arm around her friend’s shoulders, Ally tries to cheer her up. “Sam, look at the sunset. It’s beautiful! It’s reflecting off Florence Lake as if it were glass.”

Sam starts to lift her head and then freezes, her eyes widening. “Ally!” she exclaims, “You’re a genius!” Jumping up, she opens the sheet of paper and looks over the poem.

“What are you talking about?” Ally asks, confused.

“Listen to this,” Sam says. “‘My dear Florence, you have gone and taken with you my soul. So I will place my life’s endeavors where forever, your beauty I’ll hold.  I lay within a body of flight and pray for my safe keeping.’”

Waving a hand out in front of them, Sam nearly jumps up and down. “Look down in the yard, Ally! What do you see?”

Ally follows Sam’s gaze and studies the sweeping yard in front of them. “A bird bath,” she answers.

Sam rolls her eyes.              “What’s in the bird bath?” she presses.

“An angel,” Ally replies. Now her eyes widen, too. “A body of flight!” she whispers.

“Right!” Sam cheers. “Okay, listen, I’m not done. Here’s the rest: ‘For in our sons, the taste of greed, in their veins is seeping. The sun does set on your golden head and I watch, ever waiting…’”

“Florence Lake!” Ally interrupts. “The angel is facing Florence Lake!”

“Right again,” Sam answers.

“So the money must be in the angel?” Ally whispers, looking around them.

“Yeah, I think it has to be! It’s perfect,” Sam replies.

“Well, let’s go!” Ally says, and starts to run down the long lawn.

“Wait!” Sam cries, catching up to her and grabbing her arm.

Almost falling, Ally spins around and faces Sam, surprised.

“We can’t just march up there and pull the angel apart in front of everyone,” Sam insists, pointing towards the line of trees where Ted was again working on the sprinkler system. “Who knows who else is watching?” she presses.

“We could just go tell your uncle,” Ally recommends. “Let him decide.”

“You know he doesn’t believe in any of this!” Sam looks desperate now. “He would probably take the journal and poem, and send us home tomorrow. Then we’d never figure it out!”

“What do you want to do? We’ve already agreed to tell them tonight, anyways.”

“That was before we knew where the gold was!” Sam insists.

Ally frowns and starts to walk away, but Sam takes her by the arm again.

“Wait, Ally, we’re still going to tell them! Just not right after dinner, but later tonight. After it gets dark, we’ll have a chance to get the gold without anyone else seeing us. Once we have it, they’ll have no choice but to believe us! Then they’ll understand why we did everything. I think that it’s the only way to save the inn.”

Ally hesitates. Sam makes a pretty convincing argument. “I guess a few hours aren’t going to really make a difference,” she finally agrees.

Sam sighs with relief.

“But,” Ally continues, “no more delays. If the gold isn’t there, we tell them, no matter what. We have to confess everything.”

“Okay, Ally. No matter what, we tell them. But I’m sure that the gold is there. It has to be!”

14 NARROW ESCAPE

The hidden door next to the cellar slowly opens, and Sam and Ally emerge into the shadows at the back of the house. They switch off their lights just as a cloud drifts over the moon.

“Can’t we leave them on part way there?” Ally pleads.

“No way!” Sam says with determination. “Someone might see us.”

They creep closer to each other and turn in the direction of the bird bath.

“Here comes the moon again,” Sam points out. “We can see well enough to get there.” Their heartbeats accelerating with each step, it takes several painfully long minutes before they reach the sculpture.

The bird bath is made of cast bronze and stands a good three feet high. The angel, also made of bronze, sits in the middle. It rises another two feet, so that Sam is almost eye-level with it. She begins looking it over as carefully as she can in the moonlight, pulling on each wing and tugging at the halo. Nothing seems to be loose.

“The head,” Ally says from behind her.

Sam jumps, turning to look at her friend, a shadow among shadows. “What do you mean?” she whispers. “It seems solid.”

“Try twisting it,” Ally suggests.

“Twist the head,” Sam murmurs to herself as she places her hands on either side. At first, nothing happens, but then she feels a slight scraping of metal on metal. “Ally!” she cries, “you’ve done it again!  Here…help me. I don’t think I can get it off by myself.”

Both girls position themselves precariously on either side of the bowl of water, stretching out as far as they can to grip the angel’s head between them. Working together, they are soon rewarded with an audible click and they are able to lift the loose head away from its body. It’s so heavy that they almost drop it, but they manage to move it to the side and set it in the grass.

Hurrying back to the headless statue, Sam turns on her flashlight to reveal what was underneath. Nothing. Other than the threaded sides where the head screwed on, there is nothing but solid bronze. “Oh no,” she moans, slumping to the base of the statue. “There isn’t anything there!”

Ally’s light comes to life and then bobs quickly up and down. “Sam!  Come here! I think there’s a lid!”

Sam crawls over to her friend and inspects the underside of the head. Sure enough, there’s a cap, which she quickly unscrews. Letting out whoops of victory, the two girls look at each other, eyes wide.

“We’ve done it, Ally!” Sam cries.

Inside is a medium sized cloth bag, tied at the top. It takes up the whole space, almost as if it were molded to fit there. Pulling it out, Sam is surprised at its weight. Growing more excited by the second, she eagerly unties the cord, working the knots with trembling fingers. “It’s coming loose,” she breathes, and then the cloth falls away to reveal a huge clump of gold with a rolled up piece of paper on top.

“Oh!” Sam gasps, falling back on her heels. “This has to be at least twenty pounds of pure gold! How much do you think it’s worth?”

“I’d say over half a million dollars,” a deep voice says out of the darkness behind them.

Sam swings her light around, revealing a large, middle-aged man she’s never seen before. He wears an old stained undershirt and his face is covered with stubble the same shade as his stringy brown hair.

“Very nice job, girls,” he snarls. “I would have never guessed to look in there. But then, I didn’t have the riddle did I?”

Sam lets out a cry of alarm as she realizes the man is holding a gun in his right hand. He motions to them with his left.

“Just give me that bag there, young lady, and we’ll forget that this ever happened.”

“No!” Sam says, her voice more courageous than she feels. “This belongs to my aunt and uncle now, and you have no right to it!”

“Don’t you get smart with me!” The man waves the gun menacingly. “I’ve been looking for that for nearly three years and nobody, especially a little snot-nosed Girl Scout, is going to keep it from me. Now hand it over!”

Just as Sam is trying to decide whether to persist or not, a board suddenly whizzes though the air, coming down hard on the man’s back.

“Oomph!” he curses, stumbling forward. Sam and Ally duck out of the way, falling to the ground by the base of the bird bath.

Ted jumps beside the thief before the man can regain his balance, grabbing the wrist of his right hand. A shot rings out through the darkness as Ted knocks the gun away. Spinning back towards him, Ted faces his opponent. Although older, he is an even match for him and they circle each other slowly, looking for an advantage. Ted quickly lunges, lashing out, but the stranger blocks the solid blows and manages to throw him to the ground.

Sam jumps to her feet and leaps towards the gun lying in the grass. She’s never handled one before, but she simply aims it at the sky and pulls the trigger. The shot echoes off the mountains and reverberates across Florence Lake. Both men, now rolling on the ground, freeze. Several lights come on up at the inn.

“Stop it!” Sam yells, still holding the gun, now pointed at the ground. “It’s all over, whoever you are! You’re not getting the gold, and nobody’s going to get hurt.” She looks worriedly at Ted, who is slowly rising from the ground. “Are you okay?”

“Yeah,” he says, breathing hard. “Thanks.”

Just then, the back door to the inn flies open and the porch light snaps on. Uncle Bill stomps out into the grass, a shotgun in his hands.

“What in tarnation is going on out here?” he demands, straining to see who is there.

“It’s okay, Uncle Bill,” Sam assures him, “but I think you better call the sheriff.”

15 THE INHERITANCE

They all sit around the big kitchen table, sipping coffee or tea. All, that is, except for the stranger. He sits with his hands tied together, behind his back. Ted keeps eyeing him angrily, and Bill still has his shotgun leaning against the chair he sits in. The pistol rests on the table in front of Ted.

“The sheriff has been called,” Beth states as she sits down with her tea. “It should take him less than half an hour to get here.”

“In the meantime,” Bill says, “I think you all have some explaining to do. Especially you, mister,” he adds, pointing at the man next to him. “Let’s start with who you are.”

“I think I remember him,” Beth says suddenly. “Don’t you, Bill? He’s the man we chased off the grounds when we first came here. He was a little cleaner and heavier back then, but I’m pretty sure it’s him.”

“I think you’re right,” Bill agrees. “Weren’t you looking for Shawn Hollow’s money?” he asks the disheveled man.

“Humph,” the trespasser grumbles, not looking at anyone.

“Well, what are you doing back here?” Bill demands. “It’s been over a year since we last chased you off.”

“I don’t think he ever left,” Sam volunteers.

The man frowns at her as Sam shares her theory.

“Day before yesterday, after Ted left us on our hike, Ally and I found an old cabin. Inside was the gear he’s been using to go diving in Florence Lake, and--”

“Whoa,” Bill interrupts. “How do you know he’s been diving in Florence Lake?”

Sam and Ally look at each other guiltily. Sam blushes.

“You see, Uncle Bill,” Sam starts, “I’m afraid we’ve been keeping a couple of things from you. When we were out on the lake, someone… well, now we know who, turned the boat over on us. At the time, all we saw were some flippers. I’m sorry we didn’t tell you about it, but we decided that we were going to try and find Shawn Hollow’s money and the ‘ghost’. I was afraid that if we told you about the boat, you would send us home.”

“You’re probably right,” Beth agrees, her lips pressed in a tight line.

Uncle Bill has crossed his arms and is studying his niece closely, waiting for her to finish.

“I understand now what you were doing in the lake,” Sam says, looking at the disgruntled trespasser seated across from her. “You thought that Joseph drowned while looking for the money, so Florence Lake was the most likely place to find it.”

The man shifts his weight uneasily in the chair and lowers his gaze, but remains silent.

“When we found the cabin the next day,” Sam continues, “we put two and two together. We figured there was someone else here looking for the money and that they were also most likely the ghost.” She looks over at Ted.

“So that’s why you were so wary of sharing your secrets with me,” Ted says. He turns to Beth and Bill. “You see, I haven’t been straight with you either.” He goes on to tell them his story, including being caught in the passageway while trying to take the riddle. “I’m really sorry if I scared your guests,” he finishes sheepishly. “I didn’t mean to, and I swear that I didn’t cause any of the vandalism.”

“And he saved our lives!” Ally adds.

This leads to more questions and the girls tell the story about the snake in the mine. Sam’s guilt intensifies, and she tries to avoid looking at her uncle. Bill’s scowl has been steadily deepening.

“What’s this about a riddle?” Beth interjects, looking nervously at her husband.

“Oh!” Sam cries, relieved to have a diversion. “This was the most exciting part.” She slowly unfolds the brittle paper and reads the riddle aloud. “So,” she adds, “we eventually figured out that the angel in the bird bath was the ‘body of flight’ that faces Florence Lake. We just discovered that tonight when we saw the sun setting on the water. I promise we were going to tell you everything after we checked the statue.”

Ally turns to Ted. “How did you know we would be there?”

“I didn’t,” he replies, “but I did know you were up to something. I just waited around outside to see if you would sneak off somewhere and then followed you. I was positive there was someone else here causing problems, and I didn’t want you running into him.”

“It’s a good thing he did, Sam,” Bill says sternly, “or we might not have such a happy ending. I have to say that I am disappointed in your lack of trust. Keeping something important from the adults responsible for your well-being is not the right thing to do, Samantha.”

“I know,” Sam says quietly, cringing at the use of her full name. She knows her uncle is mad. “I’m so sorry, Uncle Bill. I know it was wrong. I just wanted to help you keep the inn.”

She then turns her attention to Ted, thanking him for his help.

Ted smiles at her, wanting to relieve some of her discomfort. “So, are you going to share your find with us?” he asks, pointing at the sack Sam is holding in her lap. “Or is that a secret, too?”

Grinning, Sam lifts it up with some effort and places it on the table with a loud thump. She swiftly pulls at the loose cords and exposes the gold within. Everyone gasps in response, including Sam, even though she’s already seen it.

“Isn’t it amazing?” she asks, her eyes sparkling. It wasn’t a nice, smooth bar of gold like you see in the movies, but rather a large mass of cooled molten gold still containing swirls and bubbles. Shawn Hollow must have melted it down himself to fit into the head of the angel.

They all jump at a loud knock from the front door. Bill answers it and soon returns, followed by two deputy sheriffs.

“That’s him,” Bill states, pointing at the man with his hands tied. “I want him arrested for trespassing, and for threatening my niece with that gun!” He points at the revolver.

“Well, that’s Billy Fisher!” the taller of the two officers declares. “I thought that he left these parts over a year ago.”

“We did, too,” Beth says. “I guess he’s been living on our property this whole time.”

“What in the world is that?” the second deputy asks, staring at the gold on the table.

“That’s what should belong to me!” Billy shouts, trying to rise from the chair. The deputies quickly restrain him and put him in handcuffs.

“The gold belonged to Shawn Hollow,” Sam says, pulling the sack off the rest of the way. “I think that the paper Ally has will tell us who it rightfully belongs to now.”

Ally looks down at the scroll in her hands as if just realizing it was there. Sam handed it to her after the fight broke out, before going for the gun. “Oh!” Ally says. “You mean, you think this is old Shawn’s will?”

“Let’s read it and find out!” Beth suggests, smiling now.

Ally unties the old ribbon wrapped around the scroll and cautiously unrolls the yellowing paper. Squinting, she strains to read the faded ink.

“‘I, Shawn Hollow, being of sound mind, bequeath my land to my three eldest sons: Christopher, Michael and Thomas, in equal parts.  To my youngest son, Joseph, I bequeath a sum of five thousand dollars which is held at the State Bank. I regret that he is then on his own. He knows the reasons for this.

“Lastly, I bequeath this precious metal, attained at such a high cost, to the only currently living person who didn’t love me for my money. I am saddened to admit that it is not one of my own sons. The person I speak of doesn’t live at Hollow Inn any longer, but I know that she is still alive. Her name is Nancy Baker. My lawyer will be provided with the information to contact her.

“I am placing this new will, along with my life’s endeavors, in a place where my sons will never look. Its location will be provided to my attorney so that at the time of my death it can be located and carried out. In the case of something unforeseen happening, I will also leave a poem in my journal.

“If the words on this page are being read, I cherish the voice that declares it, for it means that I am at long last with my Florence, and we are reunited once again. This is my last will and testament.’

“It’s signed Shawn Hollow,” Ally finishes, her eyes misty. There is a moment of silence as everyone in the room tries to figure out what it all means.

Sam is the first to get it. “Oh, my gosh!” she exclaims. Everyone turns to look at her expectantly.

“Ted!” Sam continues, “if this gold was left to Nancy, your great-grandmother, then it must belong to you now.”

“Your great-grandmother must have willed her estate to your grandmother,” Bill adds. “Who did your grandmother will her estate to?”

“My parents,” Ted replies, and then slowly grins, although his eyes fill with tears. “And my parents left their estate to me.”

“Then it is yours!” Aunt Beth says happily.

“But I don’t want it,” Ted says. To everyone’s surprise except Sam, he calmly pushes the bag away. “Like I explained to Sam earlier, I don’t need the money.” With that, he takes the gold and turns, placing it in Bill’s hands.

“What are you doing?” the older man asks, flabbergasted.

“I’m doing what my great-grandmother would have done,” Ted says with confidence. “I don’t need the money, but Hollow Inn does. She would want to see this place completely restored and being enjoyed, the way Shawn meant it to be. The gold is yours.”

Aunt Beth and Uncle Bill are speechless.

16 GOING HOME

The greyhound bus pulls up to the old depot with a groan, letting out a plume of exhaust.

“Here it is,” Ted announces. He lifts the suitcases and turns towards the two young girls standing next to him. The sun is beating down through a cloudless sky, once again heating the day into the nineties.

Sam looks regretfully at the bus and thinks about the warm goodbyes she and Ally exchanged earlier with her aunt and uncle. They were too busy with their multiple guests to drive them in themselves.

After the initial shock wore off, Uncle Bill agreed to let them stay for the rest of their planned visit. Sam’s parents weren’t as easy to convince. She would be facing some stiff penalties when she got home, but it was all worth it.

As soon as word got out about what happened at Hollow Inn, the media was all over it. Within a couple of days, rooms were being booked. Everyone wanted in on the nostalgia of a long-lost will, hidden treasure, and ghosts. For the past week, the girls have helped prepare the inn for the new guests.

Uncle Bill and Ted devised a way to make the hidden cabin part of a “Hollow Inn Tour,” a loop of the property that will include all of the landmarks and key points to the Hollow story.

The maid returned to work the day after Billy Fisher was caught. And, with all the upcoming guests, they already need to hire another one, as well as someone else to help organize tours and other outings.

Uncle Bill made arrangements to meet with a local architect and contractor to start on the renovation plans. Sam and Ally can hardly wait to return the following summer to see what they come up with.

Even with the flurry of activity, the girls managed to spend many hours down at Florence Lake. With the threat gone, they were able to enjoy the amazing beach and water. Aunt Beth even went swimming with them, and Uncle Bill showed them all the best places to fish. Ted turned out to be a really good rower and took them all the way to the other side of Florence Lake, where they spent a whole afternoon exploring.

Now, ready to board the bus, Sam sighs and wipes her hot forehead. “It’s hard to believe we’ve already been here for two weeks.”

“I know,” Ally agrees. “It seems like we just got here. I’m glad that everything turned out so well.”

“If it wasn’t for you two,” Ted says, “I don’t think that gold would have ever been found.”

“You would have figured it out if you had gotten the journal and the riddle before us,” Sam says modestly.

“You don’t give yourself enough credit,” Ted counters. “You accomplished in four days what everyone else has been trying to do for years.”

Sam and Ally both blush as they mount the steps to the bus. The driver takes the bags from Ted and packs them in the compartments above the seats at the very back of the bus.

“Looks like we’re the only passengers,” Sam observes, changing the subject.

“Good,” Ally answers. “Maybe I can get some sleep on the way home.” Stretching out across the back seat, she struggles to find a comfortable position.

“I can’t believe how fast the inn booked up,” Sam says to Ted as she takes her backpack from him.

“Yeah, I don’t think they’re going to have to worry for a while. Especially not after what the appraiser said about the gold. They should be able to do everything they want to and have some left over.”

“Thank you for everything you did, Ted. Not many people would have been so generous.”

“But I had to,” he answers, grinning, “or I think my great-grandmother’s ghost would have started haunting me!” All three of them laugh and Ted turns to go. “Now you better come back next summer,” he says, pausing at the door.

“Oh, we will,” Sam replies. As Ted disappears, she forces a cheerful wave and settles down on the seat next to Ally, who looks on the verge of crying.

“Ally,” she says, tilting her head and looking at her friend with mock surprise. “I can’t believe you!”

“What?” Ally asks, confused.

“We’ve been in cell service range for at least ten or fifteen minutes, and you haven’t even turned your phone on, yet! What’s wrong with you?”

Laughing, Ally hugs her best friend and then lies back down, with her head on her backpack. “I think…I might wait a little longer. I guess I’ve gotten used to not always talking with everyone.  I kind of like it.”

Smiling, Sam turns to look out the window as the bus begins to pull away. The station wagon is already headed down the road, into the valley and back to Hollow Inn. The mountains tower above it.

I know I’ll come back here again, she thinks as the bus turns in the opposite direction. In fact, nothing could keep me from it. “Unless,” she whispers aloud, sitting up straight with a smile, “I find another mystery to solve!”

The End

I hope that you enjoyed, The Mystery of Hollow Inn! Please take a moment to leave a review at:

http://www.amazon.com/dp/B00HMYJRZQ

Want to be notified when Tara releases a new novel? Sign up now for her newsletter!  eepurl.com/bzdHA5

Be sure to look for Sam and Ally in other exciting adventures in The Samantha Wolf Mysteries!

ABOUT THE AUTHOR

Author Tara Ellis lives in a small town in beautiful Washington State in the Pacific Northwest. She enjoys the quiet lifestyle with her husband, two teenage kids and several dogs. Having been a firefighter/EMT and working in the medical field for many years, she now teaches CPR and concentrates on family, photography and writing young adult novels.

The Secret of Camp Whispering Pines

The Secret of

Camp Whispering Pines

Samantha Wolf Mysteries

#2

TARA ELLIS

ISBN-13: 978-1507800515

ISBN-10: 1507800517

The Secret of Camp Whispering Pines

Copyright © 2015 Tara Ellis

Cover art design Copyright © Melchelle Designs
http://melchelle.designs.com/

Models: Breanna Dahl, Janae Dahl, Brandon Pless

Photographer: Tara Ellis Photography

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted by any means without the written permission of the author.

This is a work of fiction.  Names, Characters, places and incidents either are the product of the author’s imagination or are used fictitiously, and any resemblance to actual persons, living or dead, business establishments, events or locals is entirely coincidental.

This particular story holds special meaning for me. For this reason, I have to dedicate it to my lifelong friend, Lisa Hansen. So many of the escapades we got ourselves into while at summer camp inspired a good deal of the storyline in The Secret of Camp Whispering Pines. But even more important was the unique friendship that can only be formed by the events shared while traipsing around in the woods, swimming in the mountains and riding horses through the wilds. We were never short on imagination, and while this sometimes got us into trouble…we always had fun!

I would like to give a special thank you to my beta readers: Linda Morris, Cindy Pierce and Lisa Hansen!

Samantha Wolf Mysteries

1. The Mystery of Hollow Inn
2. The Secret of Camp Whispering Pines
3. The Beach House Mystery
4. The Heiress of Covington Ranch

Find these and other titles on Tara’s author page at Amazon!

http://www.amazon.com/author/taraellis

Contents

Samantha Wolf Mysteries

1 SUMMER CAMP!

2 WHISPERING PINES

3 CABIN NAVAHO

4 FIRST IMPRESSIONS

5 RUMORS

6 SINK OR SWIM

7 TRADITIONS

8 FAMILY SECRETS

9 LEGEND OF THE WOODS

10 DESTROYED!

11 ISOLATION

12 CREEK WALKING

13 SANDY

14 TRAIL OF DANGER

15 THE MASK OF ZORRO

16 SABOTAGED!

17 PIECES OF A PUZZLE

18 ANSWERS IN THE DARK

19 THE TRUTH WON’T SET YOU FREE

20 WHAT FRIENDS ARE FOR

21 UNEXPECTED RESCUE

22 REVELATIONS

23 BARGES

ABOUT THE AUTHOR

1 SUMMER CAMP!

The phone rings for the third time before Sam runs down the hall and snatches it off the cradle. “Hello!” she says loudly, flopping down in an overstuffed chair that sits next to a small desk. Grimacing at the archaic set-up, Sam feels a brief pang of frustration with her mom for refusing to give up on having a home phone. Even though the main reason is that their cell phones hardly work inside the house, it’s still irritating.

“Sam!” the person on the other end shouts. “It’s me, Ally. I’ve got a great idea for our next trip!” Sam smiles at her friend’s unnecessary explanation. Of course, she knew immediately who it was! The two twelve-year-old girls have grown up as neighbors in their small, seaside town in Washington State. They are now best friends and inseparable. The first part of their summer has already proved exciting, visiting Sam’s aunt and uncle at their inn in Montana. It involved a legend, ghosts, and treasure hunting! What could possibly have Ally all excited after going through that?

“Well, I really hope you do have a good plan,” Sam responds, pulling her long, brown hair back from her face, and scooting to the edge of the seat in anticipation. “Because we’ve only been back home for a week, and I’m already going crazy. It’s nearly impossible to go anywhere without fighting our way through the crowds!”

While nice and peaceful for most of the year, Oceanside erupts with tourists during the summer. The girls’ normal hangouts are overrun with small kids dripping ice cream. Parks and beaches are crowded with hikers and sunbathers. The business owners love it, but for the local kids without anywhere to go that can’t be reached by walking or biking…it’s a pain.

“Not to mention,” Sam continues, “that Hunter is on a roll this week. I think he’s pranked me five times already.”

Hunter is Sam’s older, fourteen-year-old brother. He has seemingly dedicated his life to tormenting her.

“Come over now, and I’ll explain everything,” Ally says, a bit mysterious. “I can’t wait to tell you!”

They live just three houses apart, so it’s easy enough to go back and forth, but Sam isn’t known for her patience. “Then don’t wait. Tell me now! I have to watch the twins in less than an hour.”

While Hunter might be Sam’s torturer, the ‘Tigger twins,’ aptly named for their constant need to be bouncing, are the loves of her life. The two little girls adore Sam. Even though they are a constant challenge, she doesn’t mind. Her mom quit her job as a teacher when they were born two years ago, so she could stay home and raise them. Although her dad makes good money as a commercial fisherman, it’s seasonal work, so money is always tight.

Saturday night is bowling night, and Sam’s parents are on a league with her aunt and uncle. They made an arrangement last year that, in exchange for Sam watching the twins and her two small cousins every Saturday, they would pay the monthly fee for Sam’s cell phone. Her aunt and uncle would be showing up soon to drop off their kids and pick up her parents. She doesn’t have much time.

Huffing good-naturedly at her best friend, Ally seems to relish the opportunity to draw out the drama. “It’ll be easier for me to explain in person,” she insists. “Besides, I’ve got a flyer I need to show you. It’ll just take a few minutes, but I’m already babysitting Cora…so you have to come here!” Cora is a little girl that lives across the street. Ally often watches her on the weekends while her parents work.

A flyer? Now Sam is really curious, but rather than press for more information, she slams the phone back into its station and leaps from the chair.

“I’m going over to Ally’s!” she hollers, as she runs through the kitchen, where her mom is preparing an early supper. “I promise to be right back!” she hastily adds, before her mom has a chance to protest.

Her mom’s response is muffled as Sam slams the door behind her, but she knows that it was just an acknowledgement. Going to Ally’s is such a common occurrence, it would be rare for her parents to say no. Her mom knows she can count on her to be back on time.

Skipping down a rough, cobblestone path, Sam veers off across the manicured front lawn and weaves through evergreens scattered along its edge, marking the property boundary. They have just under three acres, and the backyard is much less tidy. Her favorite spot is an old barn nestled up against thick woods in the far corner. She’s spent many hours reading up in the loft, where the old hay still smells sweet. She’s been begging her parents for years to get a horse, but although they have the space, they claim not to have the time or money to take care of one properly. She hasn’t given up on the dream.

It takes less than a minute to cut through the neighbors’ yards and race up to Ally’s grand estate. Although Sam’s house is modest by comparison, Ally’s has a smaller yard, just under an acre. The inside is a starker contrast. Where Sam’s is filled with children’s laughter, bickering, and warm smells of homemade cooking, Ally’s is quiet and expensively designed, with everything in its proper place.

Both of Ally’s parents work full-time jobs. Her dad is an administrator at a nearby Boeing plant (where they make airplanes,) and her mom is an intensive care nurse at a large hospital a half-hour away. She has a sixteen-year-old brother, but ever since John got his driver’s license, the girls haven’t seen much of him. He’s either gone somewhere with friends, at football practice, or holed up in his room.

Ally is often at home alone. While they usually hang out there because it’s quiet and they have more privacy, Sam feels a certain sense of relief when she returns to her family and all of the chaos. Ally claims not to mind being alone, but Sam doesn’t always believe her.

It’s close to five o’clock when Sam raps twice on the door before letting herself in. Ally’s mom insists that she doesn’t need to knock, but it’s a habit she hasn’t been able to break.

“We’re in here!” Ally calls from the media room, located at the back of the massive house.

Kicking her shoes off in the foyer, Sam then scurries through the granite-heavy kitchen, and into a space that any teenager would think was heaven. It’s also the only room where food and playing is allowed. A pool table sits at one end, where there is a mini kitchen/bar and dartboard. At the other end is an 80-inch flat screen TV, facing an overstuffed, U-shaped leather couch. The walls are lined with custom-made shelves, full of various games and other supplies.

Ally and Cora are in the middle of the room, surrounded by toys. The three-year-old is currently playing with a large pink pony, making it gallop across the floor with a doll flopping around on its back.

Jumping up, her not quite shoulder-length, wavy red hair bounces as Ally shakes a piece of paper at Sam. “You’ve got to see this!” she gasps, her blue eyes flashing.

Intrigued, Sam rushes forward to snatch the flyer from her. The first thing to catch her attention is the image of a horse. Camp Whispering Pines is scrawled across the top. Pictures below it show groups of girls engaged in various outdoor activities, including hiking, swimming, archery, and horseback riding. Her excitement growing, Sam’s smile suddenly turns into a frown when she sees the dates and cost of the camp at the bottom.

“Ally, you know I can’t afford this!” she cries, slumping down, dejected, on the large couch. “There’s no way my parents could come up with five-hundred dollars on such short notice. The camp starts next Saturday! Anyway, I doubt Mom and Dad would let me go, even if we did have the money. I’m still suffering from nightly lectures about our last outing in Montana.”

Although she and Ally had basically saved her relatives at the inn this summer from bankruptcy, they were lucky to have achieved it without getting seriously hurt. Sam’s parents called it lying to an adult, but she likes to think of it as more of…withholding certain information until it was necessary to share it. Sam knows she made some poor choices, and endures the criticism with the right amount of shame…but she doesn’t regret it. Now she wishes her parents had let her accept the reward money her aunt had offered, so she could afford the camp. Her parents flat out refused, but instead agreed to an open invitation to visit the resort for free whenever they wanted. She has to admit that it really wouldn’t matter.

Taking the pamphlet back from her, Ally joins her on the couch. Sam doesn’t understand why Ally is still smiling.

“Of course I know all of that!” Ally says, tucking her legs up underneath her. “You know that my aunt is a troop leader for the Scouts, right?”

Sam nods silently. Ally’s aunt has been trying to recruit them for the past two years. Both of her younger daughters are in the organization. After seeing the camp, Sam’s wishing now that they had gone ahead and joined.

“Well, every year, each troop gets a certain number of scholarships donated, so that kids who can’t afford it still get to go. She just came by a bit ago, dropped this off, and told me that she still has one available. The scholarship is yours if you want it, Sam!”

Digesting this information, Sam’s hopes swell slightly, but then dim again. “That’s great, Ally, but I’m not sure that will convince my parents to allow me to go.”

“I know. I’ve got that covered, too.”

Looking closely at her best friend now, Sam is almost convinced. Ally seems so positive!

“I already talked to my mom about it,” Ally explains. “She said that she’ll call your mom and explain what a good influence this camp will have on us. They teach leadership skills there, and reinforce responsibility and stuff.”

Transfixed by the picture of the girl riding the horse through the woods, Sam allows her smile to widen. “Ally, I think you’d better ask your mom to make that call!”

2 WHISPERING PINES

Sam finds it hard to believe that just a week after their conversation, she and Ally are now on their way to Camp Whispering Pines. Their mothers had spoken at length about it, but it was the promise of good character building and supervision that finally won Sam’s mom over. Well…that, and several unfair promises to Hunter. In exchange, he’s babysitting the twins for her.

There was a mad rush to get their applications filled out and turned in on time, but Ally’s aunt helped them get it done. The scholarship was approved for Sam, and everything fell into place.

Now they’re in the back of an extremely noisy suburban, along with Ally’s two younger cousins and three other girls from their troop. It’s a three-hour ride deep into the Cascade Mountains. Sam is sitting on top of her pillow, with a sleeping bag on her lap. She’s quite certain that their bags will explode out the doors when they’re opened.

In spite of the cramped space and hectic atmosphere, she can’t help but be caught up in all of the excitement. A week filled with hiking in the woods, swimming, boating, and of course horseback riding. It’s pretty much a dream come true. Sam would have been happy riding in the back of a cow trailer.

They leave the ocean behind them and quickly climb up into the rugged mountains, scattered with volcanos. They get a glimpse of Mount Rainier, looking like a surreal mirage against the skyline, before its view is blocked by the lower hills.

The Cascades run north and south, dividing Washington State in half. There are several active volcanos within them, but the most well-known is Mount Saint Helens, which erupted over thirty years ago, in 1980. Obviously, Sam and Ally weren’t born yet, but their parents experienced it as kids and shared their stories with them. Because of this, the girls know that the beautiful, snow covered peaks might look peaceful, but giants lurk within.

It always amazes Sam how fast the woods thicken and close around the car as they drive up the mountain pass. Her dad likes to take them up to the ski resort sometimes and go sledding, so she’s familiar with this part of the trek. Craning her neck, she tries to look out the window at the towering rock face rising before them. Although it’s a hot summer day in the 80s, there is still snow and ice at the higher elevations, far above.

Just before they reach the ski resort, a popular summer location for hiking, they turn off the main highway. A large, brown sign designates the paved road as a national park access route. After what seems like several miles, they turn onto a smaller, unpaved road.

“Almost there!” Ally’s Aunt Cathy calls out happily.

Her excitement building, Sam strains against her seatbelt as she leans forward and tries to see out the front window. However, between her own sleeping bag and the other girls’ heads and pillows, she can see very little.

“I think I’m going to burst!” she finally gasps to Ally, who is sitting quietly beside her. Looking at her best friend curiously when she doesn’t respond, Sam notices that Ally doesn’t look so hot. She forgot how much Ally hates long drives. The cramped quarters probably isn’t helping.

“I need air,” Ally finally groans, “and a bathroom.”

Not to be deterred by her friend’s mood, Sam starts to bounce eagerly in the seat. Well, as much as she can with the limited space that’s available. “We’ll be there soon!” she says happily. “We’ll find you a bathroom first thing!”

The vehicle pulls into a large, graveled parking lot. They circle around other cars, vans, and busses, before finally coming to a stop. When both backseat doors open at once, several backpacks and pillows immediately fall out onto the ground. Sam smiles. This is exactly what she expected.

“Come on!” she urges Ally, when her friend moves too slowly.

Once they’re out in the fresh, pine-scented air, Ally’s color and mood improve rapidly. It would be hard not to be happy in the middle of such a beautiful place.

Sam turns in a complete circle, trying to take it all in. Even with the parking lot full of vehicles and noisy kids running around, the vastness of the woods and mountains dwarfs them. I’m going to like it here! Sam thinks, smiling broadly.

“Come on!” she says aloud to Ally. “Let’s go find you a bathroom.”

After donning their backpacks and gathering up the pillows and sleeping bags, their small group follows the other campers along a well-worn trail. The trailhead is marked with a small, discreet wooden sign that simply says, ‘Whispering Pines.’

“It’s a half-mile to the main lodge,” Aunt Cathy explains. “I’ll make sure you get to the right spot and are signed in before I leave.”

Distracted by a small, gurgling stream that parallels the trail, Sam absently nods in acknowledgement to Cathy, before leaping over it and then back again. Giggling, Ally’s younger cousin follows suit, but her shorter legs don’t take her quite far enough, and she ends up with a wet tennis shoe.

Slightly embarrassed by Cathy’s disapproving scowl, Sam can almost hear her mom’s voice lecturing her about being responsible and setting a good example. “Sorry,” she mumbles before scrambling to catch up with Ally, who is trying to set some sort of speed-walking record.

“Wait up!” Sam chirps, coming alongside her friend.

“I can’t!” Ally breaks off the conversation upon spotting a small building around the next bend. Running now, she dashes for the bathroom, throwing her pillow and sleeping bag at Sam as she goes. Squealing, Sam juggles the items, ultimately losing the battle and dropping both of their beddings on the ground.

When Ally reappears, Sam has brushed most of the pine needles off their stuff and devised a way to hold everything.

“Much better!” Ally breathes, wiping her damp hands on her jeans. “I never should have had all that juice before we left!” Tucking her unruly red hair behind her ears, Ally seems to notice their surroundings for the first time. “Oh my goodness! This place is amazing!”

The sun is directly overhead, highlighting the beauty of the woods. Butterflies float through the beams of light, landing briefly on wildflowers before coasting to the next small splashes of color. Ferns nearly as tall as the girls nestle at the bases of huge evergreens, blending into the bright, green moss that hugs the bark.

Breathing deeply while trying to distinguish the different smells, Sam closes her eyes and listens to the assortment of birds calling to each other. She’s brought out of her trance abruptly when someone grabs her arm. Opening her eyes, she finds Ally staring at her with a crooked smile.

“Come on, Pocahontas, we need to catch up with everyone. If we want to be in a cabin together, we need to sign in as fast as possible.”

Laughing, Sam starts singing their favorite song from an animated Pocahontas movie as they run towards the large lodge just visible in the distance.

3 CABIN NAVAHO

It turns out that Ally’s cousins hadn’t been exaggerating during the car ride when describing Camp Whispering Pines. If anything, they had understated its size and impressive buildings.

Sam has never seen anything like it. The main lodge is a massive, A-frame log building with a huge front porch and sweeping steps. As they approach from the trail, the towering trees all around it make it appear smaller, but as they get closer, Sam’s mouth hangs open.

A large open space in front of the lodge is filled with campers and their parents. Scattered around the clearing are other, more discreet buildings. Turning to study them, Sam walks towards the nearest one.

“Commissary.” She reads the wooden sign hanging over a closed window.

“That’s where you can buy extra supplies, like a toothbrush or bathing suit,” Cathy explains. “You know, stuff you might have forgotten.”

“They also have lots of candy!” her daughter adds happily. “That’s why we bring spending money. The rope licorice is the best!”

Sam sticks her hand absently in her back pocket, confirming that the five-dollar bill she brought along is still there. How much licorice will that get her?

“Come on!” Ally urges, pulling her away from the little store.

On their trek across the courtyard, they also pass an office, a first-aid stand, and more bathrooms.

“Where’s the swimming pool?”

Sam directs her question to Ally’s cousin, who is walking beside her. Melissa is a year younger than they are, but this will be her second year at camp. Sam notices that she’s still leaving behind one wet footprint in the dirt.

“Oh, that’s over there!” Melissa points somewhere behind and to the left of the lodge. “You have to take another trail. But it isn’t too far. We’ll get to go swimming this afternoon! They have a required swimming test on the first day, to make sure everyone can swim. If you can’t, you aren’t allowed in the pool during free time, but only designated pool time, when there are extra lifeguards on duty.”

Sam’s not worried about a swim test; she and Ally are both excellent swimmers. Nodding to acknowledge that she understands, Sam then follows the crowd towards an area right below the steps of the lodge. Several tables have been set up so this must be where the sign-in is happening.

Linking arms with her, Ally pulls Sam a little closer in the swarm of girls, so that they won’t be separated.

Sam isn’t sure what she had expected, but this isn’t how she had envisioned camp. That is, certainly not anything this big or organized. Her sole camp experience, aside from family outings, was a youth group retreat with her church a year ago. That had involved twenty kids and five big tents, and took place over the course of three days at a local state campground. This current scene resembles a kind of boot camp. As if to solidify that impression, a loud whistle pierces the air, making both girls jump.

“If you haven’t signed in yet, please do so now!”

Searching for the source of the young, friendly voice, Sam finally spots a girl standing on the steps above them. She looks to be eighteen or nineteen years old. However, her long brown hair is in braids and she’s wearing a Camp Whispering Pines T-shirt, making her appear younger. The freckles dotting her face, combined with her huge smile, cause Sam to relax a little bit.

Organized doesn’t mean that it won’t be fun!  She tells herself.

“Don’t worry,” Aunt Cathy reassures them. “The first day is always a little hectic, but the girls love this camp. It’s been in operation for over twenty years and is the best in the state!” Cathy’s arms spread out as if she’s herding chickens. She moves their group forward as one until they reach the tables.

The sign-in process is surprisingly quick and simple. After their names are checked off a list, they are each given a black camp T-shirt with the initials ‘CWP’ on the back, and then directed to gather on the steps.

After Cathy says her good-byes, Ally’s cousins and friends go to sit with their own age group, leaving Sam and Ally alone at the top of the stairs. They’re more like bleachers really…that’s how big they are, although made of wood instead of aluminum.

Ally stares down at the heads of several dozen girls sitting below them, varying in age from around ten to fourteen. Clasping the camp shirt tightly in her lap, she leans back against her sleeping bag, trying to blend in. Ally’s never been shy, but this is a pretty big group of strangers. She might not feel quite so isolated if they weren’t required to leave their cell phones at home. It is a camp rule. They hadn’t worked while they were at Sam’s aunt and uncle’s earlier this summer, so she’s already used to not having a phone all the time, but…well, she has to admit to maybe having a little twinge of homesickness. It would be nice to at least have the option of calling home if she wanted to.

Seeing the tense expression on her friend’s normally happy face, Sam puts an arm around her shoulders and gives her a squeeze. “It’ll calm down and be better once we get assigned to our cabin!”

“I hope so,” Ally counters. “But what if we don’t end up in the same cabin?” Her eyes widen. “I don’t know what I’ll do if that happens!”

Before Sam has a chance to respond, several whistles blow. Although alarming, it has the desired effect of silencing all the girls, and for that, Sam is thankful. Their attention now drawn to the counselors standing at the base of the stairs, she squirms on the edge of the step, impatient to officially start their next quest.

“Hello, everybody!” the same braid-wielding girl calls out, holding her hands out in a sweeping gesture. “Welcome to Camp Whispering Pines, where the fun never ends!” This must be some sort of prompt, because a large portion of the group suddenly starts singing!

Surprised, Sam and Ally first look at each other in confusion, but are then quickly caught up in the cheerful atmosphere and smile at the singing campers around them. It’s a light-hearted song about campfires, hiking, and friendship. Sam finds herself tapping along with the tempo, and by the third time they sing the chorus, she joins in:

“…at night, ‘round the campfire, we laugh and we sing.

We’re here at Camp Whispering Pines, where everything is green. So come on and join us, for the time of your life. We’ll hike, and ride and swim and sing all night…that’s right!”

It’s a silly little tune, but Sam and Ally find themselves standing with the crowd and linking arms. By the time they reach the end, they’re all swaying to the words.

So this is what summer camp is all about!

Smiling broadly now, their initial fears at ease, they settle back down at the leader’s prompting. It only takes one short burst of the whistle to regain control.

“My name is Butterfingers,” she says, introducing herself. When this is followed by giggles, the teen takes it in stride and explains. “I’m one of the camp counselors and cabin leaders. We’ve all been given nicknames to make it fun.” The teen gestures to the other counselors gathered behind her as she continues. “And so that it’s easier for you to remember who we are. I’m a bit of a klutz and drop things all the time.” Smirking at her own expense, Butterfingers turns to an older woman standing beside her. “This is our camp director, Ms. Cooper.”

Sam can’t help but notice that Ms. Cooper doesn’t have a nickname. She doesn’t look like someone who would allow one. Although wearing walking shorts, her camp shirt has been replaced with a more formal, buttoned polo with the delicate lettering ‘CWP’ stitched over the breast pocket. Her dark hair is pulled back into a proper, tight bun at the nape of her neck. It’s hard to tell just how old she is. Sam figures she’s around her mom’s age. She suspects the lack of lines in the camp director’s face may be due to a shortage of laughter, rather than years.

“Camp Whispering Pines has been in operation for twenty-four years,” Ms. Cooper announces sharply, her words loud and crisp. “We expect you all to uphold our long-standing tradition of proper and responsible behavior. I hope you all enjoy your stay,” she adds, somewhat unenthusiastically. Taking a step back, Ms. Cooper makes it clear that she is done speaking. Well…at least she’s a women of few words, Sam thinks.

“Okay, then!” Butterfingers shouts, rubbing her hands together. “Here we go. When I call out your name, please remain seated until I’m finished and then go to your assigned counselor.”

Sam and Ally sit anxiously, listening to the third and fourth grade cabin assignments, then the fifth and sixth. By the time Butterfingers reaches the seventh grade cabins, the two girls are tense with the fear of being split up for the upcoming week.

“At this grade level, we group you together based on age,” she explains. “This year, we have a larger group of twelve-year-olds, so we’re putting them in the three upper-level cabins, and giving the thirteen and fourteen year-olds the teepees.”

There’s a chorus of cheers from the older girls and it’s obvious to Sam that the teepees must be the most cherished accommodations. It doesn’t make any difference to her where they sleep, as long as she and Ally are in the same cabin!

Finally, Butterfinger calls out her name as the first occupant of the third cabin. “In cabin Navaho, we have Samantha Wolf, Sandy Hollingsworth, Becky Johnson, Lexie Mills and…Allison Parker. And I will be your leader!”

At the sound of Ally’s name, Sam hugs her friend tight. Both girls are so relieved to be together that they don’t even cringe at the use of their formal names.

It’s not long before rest of the list is finished. A mad rush of feet trampling down stairs begins as the campers all run to their new groups. The leaders hold up small flags with their crew names, but a few stragglers get confused, mostly younger kids.

After a brief moment of chaos, things settle down again. Sam eventually ends up standing next to Ally and three other girls, their bags and pillows piled around them.

“Cabin Navaho!” Butterfingers shouts cheerfully. “Follow me!” Without another word, she spins on her heel and heads for a dirt trail, leading up into the thick woods.

Excitement welling inside her, Sam and Ally gather their things and scurry to catch up, convinced that a new, thrilling adventure awaits them.

4 FIRST IMPRESSIONS

After trekking uphill through the woods for several minutes in silence, concentrating on their footing, the campers break through into an open area trampled clean by years of use.

Butterfingers stops in front of the first cabin they encounter off to the right, the nameplate ‘Navaho’ clearly visible over the screened door. “This is home for the next week!” she says, holding the entrance open for them.

Sam looks fondly at a pair of chipmunks scampering into the woods, chattering as they go. She can just make out the outline of two neighboring cabins through the trees to either side. Her attention’s drawn back to their own housing by the banter of the other girls picking out beds inside. Sam practically bounces up the two wooden steps and into the small structure.

“Sam!” Ally calls from a bunk bed in the far right corner. The walls are lined with them, one to a side, except for the front wall that accommodates the doorway and one full-sized bed and small dresser for the counselor.

Ally has chosen the bed farthest from Butterfingers, next to a window without any glass in it. In fact...none of the three windows have glass and there is a large gap where the top of the walls meet the exposed roof. No wonder they were advised to bring warm sleeping bags!

“I’ll take the top!” Sam calls out joyfully, tossing her pillow up. Knowing that Ally always prefers a bottom bunk, she doesn’t wait for confirmation. Pausing to look around the room, Sam sees that the other girls are having a bit of an issue, debating who will get the one bed that’s left over.

“I have to sleep on the bottom, but I can’t stand to have anyone sleeping above me!” Crossing her arms stubbornly, a feisty young girl flips her long blonde hair out of her eyes and squares off with her apparent adversary. Sam struggles to remember her name…something like Sandra.

“Why should you get to choose who gets their own bunk?” the other girl counters, but with much less attitude. Sam remembers her name is Lexie, because it’s so unusual. She has close-cropped, black hair that goes well with her light complexion and spattering of freckles. She looks like someone who can handle herself, and Sam immediately likes her.

The last camper involved in the conflict is quietly sitting on the thin bottom mattress across from them. Hands folded in her lap, she is looking at the floor, her chestnut colored hair hanging down so that her face is obscured.

“Now Lexie,” Butterfingers chides, having decided to intervene. “Do you really even care? If I remember correctly, you had your own bed just earlier this summer at the last camp session.”

As Lexie turns to answer the counselor, Sam reflects on the comment. Lexie was at one of the earlier camps? How many times can someone go to camp in a summer? It would be fun to go more than once!

Blowing air out loudly between her lips, Lexie shrugs dramatically. “Naw…I don’t mind where I sleep. I just don’t think anyone should be so pushy, is all. How about you, Becky?” she continues, turning to the silent girl. “Do you care if you have your own bed?”

Shaking her head, Becky finally looks up at them all, eyes widening at the realization that she’s now the center of attention. “I don’t mind,” she says, her voice stronger than Sam would have imagined. “But I’d like to sleep on the bottom…if that’s okay,” she rushes to add, her bravery seeming to waver.

Laughing, Lexie tosses her heavy backpack on top of the bunk that’s kitty-corner to Sam. “That’s settled then! You get your own pad, Princess.”

“My name is Sandy!” she corrects, somewhat smugly. Obviously pleased with the arrangements, Sandy goes about carefully arranging her belongings, spreading them out on both the upper and lower beds of the last remaining spot, nearest Butterfingers.

“There you go, Becky,” Lexie encourages. “Get comfy! I don’t usually bite, but I might talk in my sleep.” Smiling now, Becky unrolls her sleeping bag and seems to relax.

“Sandy isn’t very nice,” Ally whispers to Sam. The two of them are seated on the top of their rustic framed bed, made from real logs. Legs swinging over the side, they have a great view of the situation.

“Maybe she just doesn’t do well with being away from home,” Sam murmurs back.

Not wanting to label anyone in the first hour that they’re there, Sam decides to try to talk to her. Leaping down with a much louder thud than she intended, Sam blushes slightly but quickly covers it with a grin. “Hi!” she says to everyone, now that she has their attention. “My name is Sam, and this is my best friend, Ally. It’s our first time at camp.” She barely turns back from waving towards Ally, when Lexie grabs her outstretched hand and shakes it enthusiastically.

“Good to meet you! I’ve been to every camp session here for the past two summers, so if you have any questions about anything, I can help you.”

Her first impression further solidified, Sam nods at her new friend. “Wow!” she tells the slightly shorter, sturdy girl. “That must be so much fun. I wish my parents would let me do that.” Pulling her hand back and shaking it slightly to get the circulation back into it, Sam notices the smile falter on Lexie’s face.

“Yeah, well…that’s not an issue for me.” Without any further explanation, Lexie goes back to her bag and starts digging around in it.

“How about you, Sandy?” Sam asks, doing her best to sound friendly. “Have you been to camp before?”

Staring back at her through slightly narrowed eyes, Sandy folds her arms across her chest in a defensive gesture. “No, and I wouldn’t be here if my mother wasn’t forcing me.”

Although rather short with a slight, frail build, Sandy is clearly someone who normally gets what she wants and isn’t intimidated easily. She kind of reminds Sam of a Chihuahua - small, but fierce.

Turning away from Sandy’s critical gaze, Sam widens her eyes at Ally in an “Oh my gosh” expression, before focusing on Becky, who is now spread out on top of her sleeping bag, a book to her nose.

“What are you reading?” Sam asks, sitting on the edge of the bed.

Slowly lowering the paperback, Becky looks back at her cautiously. “It’s a mystery,” she finally answers.

“Oh! I love mysteries,” Sam tells her, turning her head so that she can read the title.  It isn’t one she’s read before, but it looks interesting. “Can I read it when you’re done?”

Deciding that Sam’s interest is genuine, Becky pushes up to sit beside her and hands the book to her. “Sure, I should finish it in a day or two. Want to read the back?”

Happy to have found a mutual interest, Sam takes it and quickly reads the description. “It sounds a little spooky. I hope it doesn’t keep us up at night!”

Grinning now, Becky places the book under her pillow. She’s roughly the same size as Sam, but a little thinner. Her skin has a paleness to it that suggests she doesn’t get out in the sun often enough. Sam instinctively feels protective towards the gentle, shy girl.

“We’re all going to need these!” Lexie interrupts, having found what she was looking for in her backpack. “The swim test is after lunch.” She waves her swimsuit around in the air.

“I can’t swim right after I eat,” Sandy complains. “I’ll get a cramp.”

“You’ll be fine,” Butterfingers assures her, having just finished putting all of her stuff away in the only dresser. “We’ll have time to come back to the cabin and get changed first. It will be a good hour before you’re in the water.”

Her fists clenching at the bedding, Becky gazes at Sam, panic-stricken. “I can’t swim!” she whimpers, looking to Butterfingers for guidance.

“Oh…” Pausing, their leader chews on her bottom lip. “That’s okay, Becky. It just means you can’t swim during free time, but you can still go during open swim, which is twice during the week that you’re here.”

Hanging her head in embarrassment, Becky nods her understanding.

“I can teach you!”

Looking up at Sam’s announcement, Becky’s brows furrow. “How?” she asks.

“When is the first open swim?” Sam asks Butterfingers.

“Tomorrow. But it’s only for three hours.”

“Heck, I can teach anyone how to swim well enough to cross the deep end once, in just two hours!” Lexie says encouragingly. “It really isn’t that hard, Becky. We’ll help you,” she adds, sitting down next to the two of them.

Her spirits lifted, Becky looks back and forth between Sam and Lexie. “Okay!” she finally agrees, and they all smile warmly at each other.

“Humph!” Sandy snorts. “Swimming in public pools is gross, anyways. Do you know how dirty they are?”

“Aren’t you signed up for the creek walk in two days?” Butterfingers counters. Sandy stares at her boldly, bottom lip set. “If you want to participate in that,” she explains, “then you’re going to have to get wet. Passing the swim test is a requirement for it.”

Her skepticism silenced, Sandy flips her hair defiantly before taking her swimsuit out.

“We need to get going,” Butterfingers mutters, looking at her watch. “Lunch is in ten minutes. Put your camp T-shirts on first, though.”

A few minutes later, the five new cabin-mates emerge from Navaho and head back down the dirt trail. Sam and Ally linger at the back of the group, discussing their upcoming week’s activities.

Turning towards Ally, who is walking beside her, Sam’s distracted by a flash of light alongside the trail. Intrigued, she steps sideways and then onto the soft pine needles, to take a closer look. After a brief investigation, she locates a metallic plaque, attached to the trunk of an ancient-looking cedar tree, several feet into the woods. The flash she saw was the sun reflecting off it.

“What did you find?” Ally comes to stand alongside Sam, where she is crouched next to the tree.

“I’m not sure,” Sam replies. “It says: In remembrance of our beloved benefactor, Mr. Harold Pine. May his legacy live on in Camp Whispering Pines. 2010”

“He’s the millionaire who originally created this camp for his kids over twenty years ago.”

Sam jumps at the unexpected voice near her ear, and finds Lexie leaning against another tree trunk behind them.

“This tree was supposed to have some special meaning to him, I guess,” Lexie explains. “Something about how he proposed to his wife under it, before they bought the property.”

“So now I get the Pine part of the camp name,” Sam observes. “That’s pretty clever. But why the ‘Whispering’?”

“Because if you stand here when it’s windy out,” Lexie says hauntingly, “it sounds like someone is whispering in the woods.”

“That’s freaky!” Becky cries out.

Sam looks around Lexie to see the rest of the girls standing on the trail nearby.

“Come on!” Butterfingers interrupts, with more menace than Sam thinks is warranted. “Don’t wander off anymore.”

Feeling heavy under the ridicule, Sam and Ally step away from the memorial. However, nothing could keep Sam from digging into something mysterious, and she vows to find out the rest of the story behind the creation of Camp Whispering Pines.

5 RUMORS

As the Navaho campers near the lodge, others join them. By the time they get in line for food, the large room is filled with happy chatter.

Feeling somewhat overwhelmed again, Sam concentrates on selecting her meal from the huge array of choices. Finding the picnic-style table with the Navaho name on it, she and Ally finally sit down and look around. There must be a hundred other girls, as well as a couple dozen counselors and workers.

“How many people are at this camp?” Sam asks Lexie, who is sitting beside her. Butterfingers left them to go sit with some other leaders at their own table.

“Oh geez…good question.” Tapping her teeth with a fork, Lexie looks up at the ceiling as she does the math. “I think there are three cabins for each grade, plus the teepees. So at six to a cabin, and the three big teepees, I would say just over a hundred kids. But I heard some talk last session about enrollment being down. Last summer there were never any empty beds. They filled up long before camp even started. My first year I almost didn’t get in, and I registered three months before camp.”

“We just signed up last Monday,” Ally tells her, before biting into a big roll.

“I don’t think they put us twelve-year-olds in the upper cabins because there are a lot of us,” Lexie continues. “I think it’s because they didn’t have enough in the lower cabins. One of my younger friends said they closed down the whole third grade row and combined everyone else. Even advancing the thirteen-year-olds to the teepees, one’s still empty. And I heard that four counselors were sent home because they didn’t need them.”

“Ally’s aunt said this is the most popular camp in the state,” Sam counters. “How come enrollment is so low?”

“Well, it’s just not what it used to be. Even in the past couple of years that I’ve been coming, it isn’t as well organized, and there’s been some…bad stuff happening.”

“What kind of bad stuff?” Becky questions, her food apparently forgotten.

“I dunno if I should talk about it,” Lexie hesitates. For once she seems at a loss for words. “I don’t want to spread rumors and make things worse. I love this place and I want to keep coming here.”

“Oh, who cares,” Sandy interrupts. The four girls turn to look at her, shocked at the intensity in her voice. “My dad offered to buy this rundown excuse for a camp, and the board had the nerve to say no! So they can’t be that bad off, can they?”

After a moment of confused silence, Sam is the first one to absorb the odd revelation and what it might mean. “Why would your dad want to buy the camp? And if you hate it so much, Sandy, then why are you here?”

Stirring absently at the corn on her plate, Sandy looks like she regrets the outburst. Shrugging, she finally meets Sam’s inquisitive stare and Sam is surprised to see tears shimmering in the other girl’s eyes.

“Because I guess my dad’s business needs a retreat, or a place to ‘get away,’ and when my mom came with him to tour this dump she fell in love with it. When the stupid Board of Directors for the camp voted it down, my mom insisted that I come here, because it’s so incredible. She’s hardly spoken to me for the past year, and suddenly she was so concerned about my….how did she put it? Character building. She was convinced Whispering Pines would be a good experience for me.”

Stunned by the emotional confession, Sam looks to Ally for guidance, who’s always a little better at being more sensitive with people.

“Maybe it won’t be all that bad,” Ally says encouragingly, reaching out to pat Sandy’s hand.

Yanking her hand away as if a snake were about to bite her, Sandy stands suddenly and takes a step back from the table. Her face is a mixture of disgust and alarm at having opened up to the other girls. She spins around and flees the room, drawing some questioning stares from the other tables.

“Man…talk about a drama queen.” Lexie watches Sandy leave and then shakes her head, returning to her food.

“I think it’s sad,” Becky whispers.

Falling somewhere in between the two views, Sam is experiencing a mixture of both irritation and sorrow. While she feels bad for the situation that Sandy is in, she thinks the girl’s reaction really is overblown and a bit selfish. What she is sure of is that it raises more questions than it answers.

“What did you say to her?”

The harsh voice behind Sam and Ally makes them jump. Sam nearly falls out of her seat as she spins around to face Ms. Cooper, who is even more intimidating up close. Straightening up on the bench seat, Sam looks up at the tall, rugged form. Arms crossed, dark brows furrowed, the camp director is looking down her nose sternly at them.

“N…nothing,” Sam stammers. “She was just telling us how her dad wanted to buy Whispering Pines, and she got upset about it, but-”

“Enough!” Ms. Cooper interrupts, cutting Sam off. “We don’t tolerate gossip here, and you will do well to remember that!” Without another word, the director leaves in a huff, stomping loudly across the wooden planked floor.

“What was that about?” Butterfingers has joined them now, a concerned expression on her face.

The three new campers all look to Lexie for an explanation.

“I’m guessing Ms. Cooper’s a bit sensitive with any talk about the camp being sold,” Lexie suggests.

“Because she’s afraid of losing her job?” Ally speculates.

“No, because she’s one of the board members,” Lexie says. “Her dad was Howard Pine.”

“What?” Sam shouts. All sorts of new questions tumble in her head, but Butterfingers prevents them being asked.

“You need to respect Ms. Cooper’s wishes, and not talk about this anymore. Okay, you guys?” Butterfingers turns to see where the older woman is, obviously worried. “Come on. We need to go get changed and head down to the pool soon.”

The girls silently obey. As they begin gathering up their dirty dishes, they don’t see Ms. Cooper step out onto the front porch. If they had, they might not have missed seeing her scowl turn into a satisfied smirk.

6 SINK OR SWIM

By the time they get back to the cabin and change, and then walk the mile or so of trails, they just barely make it to the isolated swimming pool on time.

Sandy was already in her swimsuit when they got there, and skillfully ignored them. None of the young girls had tried to talk to her, but Butterfingers had taken her outside for a few minutes before they left for the pool. Whatever was discussed seems to have helped calm Sandy down.

Now they’re all seated on the wet cement next to the pool, lined up around its edges. They were sure to select a spot near the shallow end, so that Becky wouldn’t risk falling into the deeper water.

The swim test is broken up into sessions, with the older girls going first. Butterfingers tells Becky that she needs to stay with the group, but can just pass when it’s her turn to take the lap.

Sitting with her legs in the water, Sam is glad it’s a hot day, because the pool doesn’t seem to be heated. Although the pool is big, she can’t imagine how they can possibly test all the campers in the time allotted. While considering this, she notices lifeguards in red swimsuits and shorts, standing opposite each other in the deep end of the L-shaped pool. There are six of them in total, four of them boys. Sam had been wondering if there were any boys there besides the kitchen crew and groundskeepers she had seen.

The oldest-looking lifeguard blows his whistle, and the girls fall silent. “I want you to form six equal lines behind each of us,” he calls out in a deep voice. “There will be three of you swimming at a time, with the next girl entering the pool at the opposite end when a swimmer exits the water. You must be able to make it from one end to other, without assistance, to pass. Any questions?”

When nobody raises a hand, he blows the whistle again and waves them all into motion.

Contrary to what Sam had thought, the testing goes quickly. Before long, the shallow end of the pool is filled with campers who’ve passed. Ally is in line ahead of her, and she watches as her friend expertly dives in and does a perfect breaststroke to the other side.

As soon as she pulls herself up and out, Ally turns to watch Sam. The cool water is refreshing and she’s eager to go join the other girls once Sam has passed.

Sam’s dive is not quite as good as Ally’s, and her stroke is not as sure, but she makes it across just as quickly. Smiling at her success, she stands next to Ally, slapping her on the back good-naturedly.

“Come on!” Ally urges, tugging at Sam’s arm. They move off to the side, out of the lines of girls still waiting to go, but Sam pulls up just short of the shallow end.

“Wait,” she calls to Ally, having to yell over the squeals and laughter of the other swimmers. “Lexie is about to go. Let’s wait for her.”

Shrugging, Ally leans up against the wire fencing that surrounds the pool, letting the hot afternoon sun warm her cooled skin. I might as well work on my tan! she thinks, closing her eyes.

As Lexie dives in, Sam becomes aware of excessive splashing in the water close to her. Looking down, she expects to see a water fight, but is alarmed to instead find a young girl floundering. This far side of the shallow end bottoms out at six feet, according to the numbers painted onto the cement. There is a rope with floats blocking it off from the other area of the pool, but it’s obviously over the distressed swimmers head.

Sam looks around frantically, realizing that none of the other girls can see what is happening. Spotting the only lifeguard still free to watch this presumably safe zone, Sam can tell that she has just noticed. Racing forward, the lifeguard leaps in without blowing her whistle first.

Grabbing Ally’s wrist, Sam drags her over to the edge, pointing at the drama unfolding. The lifeguard has easily reached the panicked swimmer, but is having a hard time getting a hold of her.

Amazingly, no one besides a couple of other girls on the side of the pool has seen them. But they are both frozen in fear, mouths hanging open.

“Help!” Sam yells while pointing, struggling to be heard over all of the noise. “Somebody help them!”

One of the guards at the far end finally looks up, but Sam realizes there isn’t time for the guard to reach them.

Sam has had basic rescue training as part of the swimmer safety course her parents make her take. She can tell that the young lifeguard isn’t performing the rescue correctly. The struggling camper and guard are both going under for the second time, and they need help now.

Without a second thought, Sam performs a shallow dive and reaches them in just two strokes. Going to the young camper first, she approaches her from behind and hooks her arm around the thrashing girl’s chest. Nearly drowned, most of the girl’s strength is gone, so she gives little resistance to Sam as she drags her backwards towards the side of the pool.

Once there, Ally and two other girls pull the exhausted and terrified swimmer out. Sam looks back to see that the head lifeguard has his co-worker, and the two of them are already standing in the shallow water, where he towed her.

The whistles erupt all at once, signaling everyone out of the water. The rest of the lifeguards are all rushing over, and everything is in chaos.

Although more than able to get out on her own, Sam is helped by a growing crowd, and then becomes surrounded. Lexie and Ally each put an arm over Sam’s shoulders, making sure that she’s okay.

Everyone is congratulating her on the rescue, and her face burns with embarrassment at the recognition. “I just happened to be close by,” she professes. “I’m sure you all would have done the same thing!”

“What is the meaning of this?” The booming voice somehow drowns out all of the other commotion, demanding attention.

The main lifeguard hurries to where Ms. Cooper is standing and they carry on a very animated conversation. It involves him first pointing towards the dejected guard sitting with a towel wrapped tightly around her, then the traumatized swimmer, and finally Sam.

“Butterfingers, bring that young lady to the camp nurse immediately!” Ms. Cooper orders, pointing to the lifeguard who’d had trouble.

“Alpine,” the director continues, her voice harsh. “You will come with me!”

The young lifeguard, nicknamed for her height, hangs her head and leaves the pool area.

“The rest of you will carry on with your normal schedule. There is still another group waiting to be tested.”

With that, Ms. Cooper makes a dramatic exit, leaving everyone exchanging glances.

Even with the sun hot upon her back, Sam feels a slight chill.

7 TRADITIONS

The rest of the swim time passes without further incident, and Sam is almost relieved when it’s over. Normally, she loves every second she can get in a pool, but the atmosphere after Ms. Cooper’s outburst was very somber.

After changing and re-grouping, Butterfingers tells them they have free time until dinner at six, over two hours away. “I’ll meet you back at the cabin at 5:30,” she says. “I have to run some errands now.”

As soon as she walks away, the debating begins on what they should do with their afternoon.

“Let’s go explore the camp!” Sam suggests. “I’d like to check out some of the trails.”

“We aren’t dressed for hiking,” Sandy counters. “And I’m tired after all that swimming. Can’t we just hang out at the cabin?”

Making a face at the boring suggestion, Lexie throws her hands up. “What we need to do, is get a head start on our barge.”

“Our what?” Ally questions.

“Barge…a little boat. It’s a camp tradition. We have to make it out of natural items found in the woods, except for the candle placed in the center of it. We all write a wish down on a small piece of paper to put on it. Then, at the end of the camp closing ceremony, each cabin launches the barge that they made into the lake. The last one still floating wins, and your wishes are granted!”

“That sounds stupid,” Sandy whines, continuing her poor attitude.

“I think it might be kinda fun,” Becky says softly. “How are we supposed to make it stay together?”

“Oh, there’s an arts and crafts cabin that we get to use whenever we want, during free time. It’s okay to use glue on it, but that’s all.” Lexie looks at Sam and Ally to see what their vote is.

While Sam would rather go hiking, she’s curious about the barges, and the arts and crafts cabin sounds interesting. “Sure, why not?” she agrees, after Ally indicates that she doesn’t care either way.

“Well, I’m going to our cabin,” Sandy insists stubbornly. “I want to lie down.”

“Suit yourself,” Lexie tells her. She turns to walk in the opposite direction, the three other girls following her.

After brief hesitation, Sandy reluctantly chases after them. “I’m not about to go back to the cabin by myself. I’d probably get eaten by a bear or something.”

Lexie tries hard not to laugh at the ridiculousness of her comment, but doesn’t quite succeed.

“Go ahead and laugh!” Sandy scoffs. “I don’t care, but I’m not helping with the silly barge.”

Before anyone else has a chance to respond, Alpine dashes across the trail in front of them, clearly upset. She’s changed from her red swimsuit and shorts into regular clothes, and has a big duffle bag thrown over her shoulder.

Coming up short, Alpine realizes she’s almost walked right into the girls. They’re on a narrow trail that leads into the woods behind the main lodge. According to Lexie, the staff cabins, maintenance sheds, and craft house are all back in here.

“Oh!” Alpine gasps, nearly dropping her heavy bag. She turns to Sam. “Aren’t you the girl who helped me?”

“Yes,” Sam confirms. “Are you okay?”

Alpine bursts out in tears at the question, letting her bag fall to the ground as she covers her face with her hands. Looking at the rest of her group, Sam is at a loss.

“Why don’t the rest of you go get started with the barge,” Ally finally says. “Sam and I will stay with Alpine.”

Not needing any further convincing, the other three girls quickly head down the trail, leaving Sam and Ally to deal with the distraught lifeguard.

Sniffing, Alpine wipes at her nose and then sits down on the bag, trying to compose herself. “I’m sorry,” she whispers, hiccupping. “I’ve never been fired from a job before, and I was going to use the money for college. I graduate from high school next year. It wasn’t even my fault!”

“You got fired?” Ally asks, shocked.

Sam isn’t all that surprised, though. She knows that Alpine made some critical mistakes in the failed rescue attempt.

Nodding, it’s obvious that the teen is trying hard not to break out in fresh tears. “Ms. Cooper told me to pack my bags and leave immediately. I mean, I could understand if I was actually a lifeguard, but I was hired to be a counselor for the fourth graders. I’m not even certified!”

“Did she know that?” Sam questions, alarmed that a director would put anyone uncertified in a position like that.

“Yes. I told her that I was a good swimmer, but had never taken any certification courses. Since they didn’t have enough kids at this camp session, they had to close down some cabins. She said I had to either take the open lifeguard spot or go home. I should have just gone home, but she insisted that I would never have to really do anything, that I could just sit in the shallow end and stop kids from splashing. But that girl almost drowned!”

“She didn’t drown, though,” Ally consoles her, “and everyone is okay.”

Sam is trying to think of something equally encouraging to say to her. She is saved from the task by Butterfingers, who jogs up the trail towards them.

“Sam! Thank goodness, I finally found you. Ms. Cooper wants to speak with you.”

Expecting that the conversation would be a positive one, congratulating her on helping to save the drowning girl, Sam doesn’t understand the concerned expression on Butterfingers face.

“Okay…” Sam hesitates, looking to Ally, who also appears confused.

“Just go to the administration office,” Butterfingers directs, shooing Sam back the other way. “I’ll take care of Alpine. Ally,” she continues, turning to her. “Where are you headed?”

“Um…to the craft place to work on our barge,” she explains, obviously wanting to go with Sam.

“Then get going. Sam will meet up with you later.”

Dismissed, Ally offers a brief, reassuring smile to Sam before walking away.

Unhappy with the turn of events, Sam grudgingly treks back past the lodge and over to the office. A bell rings as Sam steps inside. She finds much nicer decor than expected. The small space is divided into two rooms. The front half has an unmanned desk facing the entrance. The only item on it is an old-style rotary phone. Behind that is a wall with one door, and a sign on it that reads, ‘Director.’

Ms. Cooper opens the door in response to the bell, looking all business. “Sam, please come into my office.”

Encouraged by her tone, but still feeling uneasy, Sam does as asked and takes a seat in the only chair offered. It’s a tiny office, but very neat. Surprisingly, there is a computer on the oak desk.

“I think it important that we set some things straight, Miss…” she pauses, looking down at a folder that’s open in front her, “Miss Wolf. Here at Camp Whispering Pines we have a system that works. It’s based on long held traditions centered on responsible behaviors. This includes: honesty, integrity, safety and respect. When someone violates one of these, the consequences are unfortunate for everyone involved.”

Wiggling in the chair under the director’s obvious scrutiny, Sam has no idea where the lecture is headed. What did she do wrong?

“Take young Alpine, for example,” she continues. “I entrusted her with the lives of my campers and she repays me by lying about her qualifications. This type of conduct cannot be tolerated, so I was forced to let her go.”

“But wasn’t she supposed to be a counselor?” Sam inquires, sure that there must be some sort of misunderstanding. “She just told me that she wasn’t even hired as a lifeguard.”

A dark veil of emotion transforms Ms. Cooper’s face, her eyes narrowing. Sam leans back as far as she can from the intensity of it. Uh-oh.

“You will do well to remember your place, Miss Wolf,” she spits, her voice tightly controlled. “I don’t expect you to repeat those lies to anyone else. Do I make myself clear?”

Nodding slowly, Sam isn’t sure who she believes now. Not one to normally question authority, it sure seems like the director might be more interested in protecting her own reputation than Alpine’s.

“Furthermore, it would appear that you have a problem abiding by our safety rules. This is an area that has very little allowance in it for violators, and I am sure you can understand why.”

Thrown off by this change of topic, Sam looks at her, perplexed. How could she possibly blame me for anything?

“There were plenty of other lifeguards at the pool,” Ms. Cooper says evenly, standing and walking slowly around the desk toward Sam. “You put not only yourself at risk by jumping in, but the other camper and lifeguards, as well.”

“But she was drowning!” Sam practically yells, her fear momentarily forgotten. “I’m trained in water rescue, and I knew what I was doing. She had already gone under twice and the other guards were too far away!”

“My head lifeguard has assured me that he was there almost simultaneously, with others right behind him. It was under control and you acted recklessly.”

Sam is so stunned by the accusation that she is at a complete loss for words. Tears spring to her eyes. Did she act inappropriately? Thinking back over the order of events, she recalls Alpine’s face as she struggled with the smaller girl, and her yelling for help. No! There hadn’t been any time. She didn’t do anything wrong!

Ms. Cooper mistakes her show of emotion and silence as acceptance of the criticism. “Has your counselor explained our three steps of discipline to you?”

When Sam shakes her head no, she continues.

“Step one is the assignment of a chore to be carried out in lieu of free time. Step two is a day in our isolation cabin, and exclusion from the day’s activities. Step three is expulsion from camp.”

Sam’s stomach knots up. It’s obvious that she is going to be disciplined. It doesn’t make any sense, but she’s helpless to do anything about it. Arguing her point certainly isn’t going to get her anywhere.

“For your disregard of our safety regulations, and lack of respect for authority, I am scheduling you for clean-up duty after dinner this evening. You will perform this chore tonight instead of having free time. I hope that this reminder will enable you to enjoy the rest of your time here at Camp Whispering Pines without further…problems. You are dismissed.”

Sam watches as Ms. Cooper strolls back around her desk, picks up the folder, and then turns her back on Sam to open a file cabinet. Numbly, Sam stumbles from the chair and back out into the bright sunlight.

Blinking rapidly as her eyes adjust, Sam looks around at the courtyard with a new perspective. She’s been at camp for less than a day, and has somehow already managed to make an enemy out of the director. The quaint buildings suddenly look a bit spooky, and the surrounding woods menacing.

8 FAMILY SECRETS

Not wanting to explain what happened to everyone just yet, Sam decides to go back to the cabin, rather than find the craft hut. The quiet, solitary hike back there is relaxing and allows Sam to think clearly about things.

An hour later, a concerned Ally is the first one to find Sam lounging on her bunk, reading Becky’s book. The other girls follow Ally in.

Lowering the paperback, Sam smiles down at her friend’s upturned face and bright, blue eyes. Before even reaching Cabin Navaho, she’d made the decision not to let her encounter with Ms. Cooper ruin the rest of her trip.

“Are you okay? What happened?” Ally drills, not swayed by Sam’s calm demeanor.

Sitting up, Sam jumps down and hands the book to Becky. “I hope you don’t mind that I started reading it. I was careful not to lose your place.”

“Oh, I don’t mind at all!” Becky answers, obviously happy that Sam likes the book.

Sandy has the same sour expression as earlier, and sits down on her bed in a huff. Lexie rolls her eyes at her before joining Ally in front of Sam.

“Princess burned her finger on the hot-glue gun,” Lexie explains.

Sam cringes a little at the nickname Lexie uses for Sandy. While she agrees with the title, it still might be hurtful.

“Are you okay, Sandy?” Sam asks, peeking around the two girls who are still waiting for an explanation. In response, Sandy sticks her finger in her mouth and glares back at her.

“So?” Lexie pushes. “What did Ms. Cooper say?”

“She doesn’t think I should have jumped in to help,” Sam says. “Then, I sort of yelled at her, so she got mad at me for that, too, and assigned me to clean-up duty tonight.”

“You yelled at Ms. Cooper?” Lexie gasps. “She’s usually nice enough, but man…she doesn’t put up with talking back. It’s bogus though that you got in trouble for saving someone’s life!”

Ally takes ahold of Sam’s arm and pulls her aside. “Sam,” she whispers. “Was it bad? Are you sure you’re okay?”

“I’m fine, Ally. I’m not about to let washing some stupid dishes ruin our fun!”

Reassured, Ally gives Sam a hug. Before Lexie can ask any more questions, Butterfingers arrives, looking worried. She scans the room, stopping when she finds Sam.

“Sam, I feel like I owe you an apology,” she starts, sitting on her own bed. “I should have warned you before you spoke with Ms. Cooper. She’s really not that bad, but the one thing that ticks her off is when kids give her an attitude.”

“She didn’t even do anything wrong!” Lexie complains. “Ms. Cooper should be thanking her, not making her wash dishes!”

“No,” Sam interrupts. “It’s really okay, you guys. I think it’s mostly just a misunderstanding. Butterfingers is right. I think Ms. Cooper would have only given me a warning if I hadn’t yelled at her. I didn’t mean to, but I was so stunned. It’s not a big deal. I’ll help clean up tonight and it’ll be done and over with. Okay?”

Looking around at her four cabin mates, Sam feels better as they all agree with her. Even Sandy smiles briefly at her while blowing on the tip of her red finger.

“Good attitude, Sam,” Butterfingers praises. “Now. Let’s go eat some dinner and have a fun night! You have more free time activities this evening.” She pauses before continuing, looking apologetically at Sam. “And then a central campfire later, where you’ll be introduced to some other Whispering Pines traditions. But first, I better explain the camp expectations that Ms. Cooper told Sam about, and the disciplinary steps.”

There are a couple of good-natured groans, but the girls all sit at attention while Butterfingers outlines the three progressive steps.

“Other than following the main rules, there are a few other things you need to know. Make sure you never go outside of the camp boundaries during your free time. The trails are plainly marked. Another biggie is that there is absolutely no food left in the cabins. It attracts all kinds of wild animals and obviously, these cabins have gaps in the walls and no windowpanes, so it’s easy for them to get in. If you buy any snacks at the store, be sure not to bring it back here. Oh…and no littering. If you see garbage on the ground, please pick it up. We need to all take pride in our camp!”

While assuring Butterfingers they understand, it’s clear that they’ve all worked up a good appetite, and there isn’t any time wasted in getting ready and going to the lodge.

Dinner is served in the same buffet style as lunch. The girls pile their plates high with food and sit down at the big, wooden table.

“Hey, who wants to go boating with me after we eat?” Lexie asks around a mouthful of food.

“So there is a lake?” Ally asks, clearly interested.

Sam would have normally beat her to it, but she is looking dejectedly at her mashed potatoes. No lake for her tonight.

“It’s not huge,” Lexie answers. “But it’s big enough to take a rowboat or canoe out on. It’ll take us about fifteen minutes to walk there. We can have a full hour on the water before we need to head back. Sorry Sam,” she adds, when she realizes her new friend can’t join them.

“It’s alright,” Sam says. “I can go tomorrow, right?”

“Of course you can!” Ally agrees. “How about you Becky…and Sandy? Want to go?”

“I can’t swim, remember?” Becky replies.

“That’s what life vests are for!” Lexie hollers, slapping Becky on the arm. It’s clear though, that Becky isn’t encouraged.

“Isn’t there a game room in here somewhere?” Sandy says, craning her long, slim neck to see the far end of the big room. “We could stay here, Becky, and play foosball or something.”

Becky seems surprised by the offer, but happily agrees.

Sam is glad to see Becky and Sandy getting along better, and it makes her wonder about Sandy. She thinks there’s a lot more to her beneath the surface, and she hopes to get a chance to really know her…if Sandy will allow it.

Before long, Sam is saying goodbye to her friends as they go their separate ways. She then trudges back to the work area of the kitchen. Surprisingly, some very friendly staff members greet her. Two are adults, but there’s one other camper. Based on her expression, Sam is guessing that she’s also here against her will, and wonders what she did to deserve it.

“Hello there, young lady!” an older man with deep lines in his face and rough, calloused hands calls out. “You must be Sam. My name is Cowboy,” he adds, reaching out to shake her hand. He has a firm, sure grip and Sam likes him right away.

“Come into my castle and I’ll show you the ropes.”

With that, Sam spends the next two hours scraping plates, loading and unloading the dishwasher, and finally stacking clean dishes.

The other girl never really says much, but Cowboy keeps up an entertaining dialogue with everyone the whole shift. By the time Sam gets to the final step of washing off the counter, he’s leaning against the end of it, talking with a man who came in to retrieve the garbage. Sam has seen him around the grounds, working on various things.

“Did you tell Cooper that the refrigerant in the freezer needs to be filled?” Cowboy asks, folding his arms.

“Yup,” the younger man answers. “She pretty much brushed me off.”

“Brushed you off? Well, what do you mean by that? Is there someone coming out to fill it, or not?” Cowboy demands, unfolding his arms and rising to his full height.

“I mean she brushed me off! Said there’s other, more pressing and costly issues that have to be dealt with first.”

“Doesn’t she know how ‘costly’ it’ll be if the freezer stops working?” Cowboy complains, visibly agitated. “That’s not like her. Normally, she’d be all over me for not making the request sooner.”

“Yeah, well…she’s been acting a little differently ever since the board voted a couple of weeks ago,” the other man says, gathering up the garbage bags and loading them into his cart.

“Hmm,” Cowboy murmurs, scratching at his scraggly chin. “Is she even talking to her sisters?”

“I dunno, but what I do know, is that Old Man Pine would be rolling in his grave if he knew…” Spotting Sam listening, the man cuts off the conversation abruptly. “Umm, see ya later Cowboy.” He hurries out the door as Cowboy turns to face Sam, who is blushing at having been caught eavesdropping.

“I, uh-I think I’m done sir,” she stammers, setting the sponge down next to the sink. “Is it okay if I go?”

Looking sternly at her for a moment, Cowboy’s old face then breaks out in a smile. “It certainly is,” he answers kindly. “I think that if you hurry, you can make it to the bonfire before it gets started. It’s not quite eight yet.”

Thankful that she isn’t going to get a lecture about minding her own business, Sam returns his smile and hurries from the kitchen.

Following posted signs and a few hurrying campers, Sam finds her way to the central campfire without any problems. It’s in the opposite direction of the craft hut, and the trail leading to it starts out directly behind Ms. Coopers office. Sam is relieved when she doesn’t see the director on her way past it.

Ally runs to greet her as soon as Sam steps into the clearing, and then leads her back to where the rest of their group is gathered. They’re all wearing jeans and sweatshirts and Sam realizes too late that she should have changed first. It gets cold in the mountains at night, even during the summertime.

“How was it?” Ally asks. They sit down on a log that faces the large, already roaring fire.

“Not bad at all,” Sam replies. “Really. This great guy named Cowboy is in charge of the kitchen and he was super nice.”

“Cowboy’s my favorite employee here!” Lexie exclaims. “He works with the horses on the trail ride, too. Are you going on the overnight ride Tuesday?”

Both Sam and Ally bounce up and down excitedly at the question. “Yes!” they answer at the same time, and then laugh at themselves.

“How about the rest of you?” Sam asks, looking at Becky and Sandy. They both nod, although neither of them appears happy about it.

“Lexie,” Sam says, turning to face the other girl. “I overheard Cowboy and this guy talking about Ms. Cooper being upset after the board voted. He had to be talking about the vote not to sell the camp. Why would she not be talking with her sisters because of it?”

“Because the board is made up of Ms. Cooper, her brother, and three sisters,” Lexie says. “I’m guessing she’s upset with them for wanting to sell the camp. I think she’s worked here for most of her life.”

“Why in the world would they even want to sell it?” Ally asks. “It’s got to be worth a ton of money.”

“That’s not what we heard,” Sandy interjects, causing everyone to look at her curiously. “One of the other girls at the pool said that Mr. Pine’s estate is worth millions, but this camp is using it all up. That’s probably why my dad offered to buy it. He’s very good at working those kinds of deals. I don’t think the camp was even on the market, but they almost sold to him, anyway.”

Just then, Ms. Cooper steps into the firelight, the shadows playing across the features of her face. Pausing, she turns to look directly at them, her eyes dark.

“I don’t think we should be talking about any of this,” Becky states. “It’s gossip and we’ve already been warned about that.”

“I agree. This is a campfire! Time to tell campfire stories, and I’ve got a great one!” Lexie rubs her hands together for emphasis, and has everyone’s full attention.

“You’ve all heard of Bigfoot, right?” she begins. The four girls all nod, but Becky already looks wary. “So the sightings started earlier this summer. There have been three altogether, each one happening closer and closer to the camp…”

“Oh please!” Sandy interrupts. “Don’t you have something more original?”

“No, it’s true! One of them even…”

Lexie doesn’t get a chance to finish, because Butterfingers walks into the inner circle of campers and calls everyone to attention. As she starts to lead them all in a fun campfire song, Sam looks at the gathering darkness behind them with a little more unease.

9 LEGEND OF THE WOODS

The next morning arrives bright, early, and very cold. The night before was filled with dancing, singing and making s’mores. Sam was appalled to learn that Sandy had never had one and it was quite funny to watch her eat it for the first time.

Her encounter with Ms. Cooper seems like a distant memory, and she’s eager to start their second day at camp. However, the warmth of her sleeping bag is holding her back.

“I can’t believe how cold it is!” Sandy whines from under her covers. Last night, Sam had thought Sandy was silly for bringing an extra blanket with her, but now she’s envious.

“I think I can see my breath,” Becky adds in confirmation.

“Oh ya big babies,” Lexie laughs.  Swinging her bare legs over the side of the top bunk, they dangle in front of Becky’s face. “You’ll get used to it. Wait till you go polar-bearing. That’ll toughen you all up! Anyway, once the sun warms things up, you’ll be complaining that it’s too hot.”

Polar-bearing is another camp tradition, where you take a morning dunk in the frigid pool water before a half-hour work out, followed by breakfast. Lexie had somehow managed to make it sound fun, but now it seems more like torture.

“Count me out,” Sandy mumbles, her face still buried deep inside her sleeping bag. “I’ll see you guys at breakfast.”

Plopping down loudly onto the floor, Lexie turns to face Sam and Ally. “How about you guys?”

Reluctantly, Sam drags herself out of bed and then pulls Ally up. The three of them coax Becky into going, but Sandy won’t budge. Butterfingers is already gone, and they find her down at the pool helping to organize things.

It proves to be just as shocking as Lexie told them it would be, and they are all wide awake when they line up to exercise. It turns out to be a lot of fun though, and Sam is glad that they decided to do it.

Breakfast is as good as the other meals were the day before. When they file back outside and into the courtyard, where the sun is now in full force, they feel energized and eager to do something fun. Butterfingers excused herself early due to a bad headache, so they don’t want to go back to the cabin and disturb her.

“Now what?” Sandy is the first to ask. At least she isn’t whining.

“Can we go hike around now?” Sam is quick to suggest.

“I’d really like to see more of the camp, too,” Ally adds. She’s happy that Sam seems to have shaken off her rocky start, and she’s eager to get things back on track. A fun hike through the surrounding woods would be just the thing.

“Maybe we can do that for a while and then go to the lake?” Sandy offers.

Sam looks at Sandy in surprise. It’s a good idea and Sandy actually sounds pleasant. Maybe the extra sleep she got this morning was good for her.

“I don’t see why not,” Lexie agrees, looking to Becky.

“Oh!” Becky gasps. “I’ll do whatever you guys want. I’m so nervous about learning how to swim this afternoon that I can’t even think about anything else!”

Sam had almost forgotten. The first of only two open swim sessions begins after lunch. If Becky wants to be able to use the pool during their daily free time, she’ll have to pass it. The second session isn’t until Thursday, and they all go home Friday.

“You’ll be fine, Becky” Ally says with confidence. “You already know how to float and do the doggy paddle. You can even hold your breath and go under. It shouldn’t take us long to teach you how to do the breast stroke.” They had taken advantage of the extra time in the pool the day before to find out what she could do.

“Do you really think so?” Becky questions, as they start up a trail.

“Absolutely!” Sam reassures her. “We’ve got three hours, and you just have to make it across the deep end once.”

After climbing along nicely groomed trails for half an hour, they emerge on the shoreline of a decent sized lake. Sam was already impressed with the beauty of the place, but the scenic, tree-lined shoreline practically takes her breath away.

“Oh my goodness, this is gorgeous!” she exclaims, taking in the distant mountain peaks and even a small island situated near the middle of the lake.

“I knew you’d love it,” Ally says, smiling. Even Sandy seems mesmerized by it, and is the first to walk down to the water.

“It’s pretty warm,” she observes, shaking her wet hands. “Too bad we didn’t bring our suits.”

“We’re only allowed to swim in the designated area,” Lexie explains. “They always have a lifeguard on duty during free time. But you still have to have passed the swim test, since there’s only one guard. Sorry, Becky,” she adds, turning to the other girl.

Before they get a chance to discuss swimming any further, they’re interrupted by loud laughter and shouts from nearby. Following the noise back to its source, they find several girls playing an intense game of volleyball on a sandy court. It’s quickly determined that all five of them like the game, and they agree to play the winner.

An hour later, they’re worn out and wishing more than ever that they’d brought their swimsuits. Instead, they settle for going in up to their knees right there next to the court, splashing and chasing each other. Cooled off, they head back towards the main lodge, debating what to do next.

“We don’t have too much time left,” Lexie notes. “Why don’t we work on our barge until lunch? We’re basically going to be gone for the next three days doing other stuff, so we should try and get more done.”

Sam notices Sandy looking at the small blister fading on her finger and grins. She hasn’t even seen the craft hut yet, but it sounds neat.

“I think that’s a great idea!” Becky approves. After saying it, she glances nervously at Sandy. The two of them seem to have formed some sort of unexpected friendship and it’s obvious that Becky doesn’t want to upset her.

“So long as no one lets me use the hot glue gun again!” Sandy laughs, shaking her finger in the air.

Relieved that they all agree for once, Sam realizes that Lexie is right. They won’t have any more free time for a while. Tomorrow is one of the big activity days. They all had a list of things to choose from when registering for camp. She and Ally picked a daylong hike for tomorrow that includes a creek and ‘fanny sliding’ down some waterfalls. The overnight horseback ride is the day after. That will only leave them Thursday for their remaining free time.

“Who else is going on the creek walk?” she asks, hoping that all of them are.

“I wouldn’t miss it!” Lexie shouts, leading the way back onto the trail.

“Well I would,” Sandy counters. “I’m going on the kayak trip. How about you, Becky?”

Looking at each girl shyly, Becky shrugs. “The only thing that didn’t require the ability to swim: archery.”

“Nothing wrong with archery!” Lexie tells her. “I’ve actually done that one, too. It’s lots of fun!” Becky smiles in response, and everyone relaxes.

Their mood is light when they enter the small, airy art hut a short time later. Like the other cabins, it has a screen door and the windows are open. Where it differs are the rows of shelves that take up the wall space instead of beds. And three tables fill the middle of the room. The art cabin is such an unexpected thing, out there in the middle of the woods, that it has a magical quality to it. It’s been decorated with ivy and vines so that it looks like something out of a fairytale, and Sam loves it.

There’s only one other group using it now, so there’s plenty of space to spread out the items they’ve collected so far for the barge. Sam notes several impressive pinecones, some cool looking moss, a picturesque mushroom and some fern sprouts. The base of the barge is a solid piece of bark, but it looks small in comparison to the other items…and to the other barges lined up on one of the shelves.

“Umm….” Sam mutters. “It’s great, but don’t you think it needs to be a little bigger?” Lexie gives her a pained look while handing her a small slip of paper.

“Write your wish down on that,” Lexie directs. “We tried to find a bigger piece of bark, but we aren’t allowed to actually pull it off the tree. All the other cabins seem to have picked the area around here clean.

“Then let’s go look a little again, a little farther away this time,” Sam suggests. Thinking briefly, she smiles and then jots something down. Folding the paper over, she drops it into a cup marked ‘wishes’.

They all agree to look for a sturdier base, and they’re soon quite a ways past the craft area. Sam is leading the hunt, scanning the forest floor. There are several fallen trees, but their bark is either already gone, or all mushy and covered with damp mushrooms.

Climbing up a slope, the trail changes from well groomed to less traveled, and soon Sam spots a couple of small flags staked into the ground.

“This is as far as we can go,” Lexie points out. “Those are the markers.”

They are at the top of the rise, and Sam can see for some distance. Twenty feet ahead is a large tree that looks as if it hasn’t been on the ground for very long. Big chunks of bark are hanging from it.

“Stay here,” Sam instructs. “I’ll grab some of that bark real quick and come right back.

“I don’t know if you should,” Becky says, concerned.

“Nah, it’ll be fine,” Lexie decides, grabbing Sam’s arm and pulling her towards the tree. “It’ll just take us a second.”

As they near the huge evergreen, Sam notes that Ally is following, too. By the time they come up alongside it, Becky and Sandy have also joined in on the escapade. Grinning, she’s surprised at how close she feels to them all. Sam starts to pick up a good-sized section that’s already on the ground, but nearly drops it when Sandy suddenly cries out.

“What?” Becky yelps, jumping back and almost falling down.

“I saw something!” Sandy whispers, pointing beyond them into a darker patch of trees.

“Stop trying to scare us,” Lexie scolds, but she doesn’t sound that confident.

“No, I really…” Sandy stops as a loud cracking sound echoes around them. Something very big is moving nearby. Frozen in fear, they all turn towards the stealthy footsteps of someone…or something coming towards them.

“Who’s there?” Sam calls out bravely, her voice cracking slightly.

The answer is complete silence. It’s obvious that whatever it is…heard them.

Then, a large, shadowy figure leans out from behind a massive tree not more than fifty feet away. They all clearly hear deep, raspy breathing that doesn’t sound as if it could come from a human being.

“Big…Bigfoot!” Becky barely chokes out, and her declaration moves them all into action. Turning as one, they blindly run through the woods, not daring to look back.

10 DESTROYED!

The mad rush back to Cabin Navaho is a blur, and Sam can hardly remember how they even got there. The first to arrive, she crashes through the screen door that’s already ajar, and nearly falls over a backpack in the middle of the floor, its contents spilled everywhere.

Trying to catch her breath, she looks around in confusion at the destruction. Before having a chance to take it all in, she becomes aware of movement above her and looks up to find two huge, hissing raccoons perched on her bunk!

Already scared from the ordeal in the woods, Sam’s reaction is extreme. She screams in alarm, falling back. The rest of the girls run into the cabin, and Sam nearly collides with them, flailing her arms as she tries to regain her balance.

Ally reaches instinctively to catch her, but she’s too late, and both of them go down in a heap. Convinced that Sam’s screams and the cabin’s disarray are signs that Bigfoot somehow got there before they did, Sandy, Becky, and even Lexie cry out and try to flee, but the screen door has shut behind them and they pile into it. This intensifies their fear, and they yell even louder.

“It’s just raccoons!” Sam calls to them, pushing herself up from the floor. Her heart isn’t pounding quite so hard in her chest now, and she’s able to grasp what’s really going on. Someone left the door open and the scavengers got inside. But why are they getting into her backpack? They have raccoons back home and she knows that while they’re cute, they’re nasty up close. They can also carry rabies.

This thought propels her the rest of the way to her feet. Maybe that’s why they’re tearing up their stuff in the middle of the day for no reason. Getting out of the cabin as fast as possible isn’t such a bad idea.

Lexie spotted the culprits at the same time that Sam shouted to them, and is now holding the door for Sam and Ally, while keeping a close eye on the animals. “We’ll leave the screen open and just wait for them to come out on their own,” she explains, as they all gather out front.

“Wait for what to come out? What in the world is all of the screaming about?”

Sam groans inwardly at the sound of the director’s voice. Ms. Cooper and Butterfingers have come running up the trail, apparently having heard the commotion.

Great. Just what we need right now. Sam runs a hand through her long hair, trying to gain some control of it so she doesn’t look quite so desperate. As she does, Sam notices a long, bleeding gash on her right forearm. She remembers hitting it on something when she fell, but didn’t realize it was that bad.

“We’re okay,” she offers quickly. “We were just surprised by a couple of raccoons when we got back. I was startled when they hissed at me, so I shouted at them. I’m sorry!”

Rushing forward with a look of concern, Butterfingers reaches for Sam’s wounded arm. “Did one bite you?” she gasps, looking a little pale.

“Oh, no!” Sam counters, shaking her head. “I tripped over some stuff and fell. It’s just a scratch.”

They’re interrupted by a noise behind them and they turn to see the two creatures scurrying around the corner of the cabin and back into the woods. They don’t look as big or scary now, and Sam is embarrassed at her overreaction. But she isn’t about to tell the director that what had really scared them was the Bigfoot sighting in an area of woods that was off-limits.

Marching to the cabin, Ms. Cooper goes inside without even acknowledging Sam. Butterfingers motions for them all to follow, and they find the director standing next to Sam and Ally’s bunk, hands on hips.

Turning to face them, Sam is alarmed by the dark scowl on her rigid face. “Still having a hard time following the rules, I see.” She barks. It’s obvious that she’s talking to Sam.

“Wha-um, what do you mean?” Cringing at Ms. Cooper’s obvious scorn, Sam can’t imagine what she’s done now.

“Don’t play games with me, young lady. Both you and Ally know the rules, yet you decided to keep this in your possession, a direct violation!” Holding her hands out dramatically, Ms. Cooper reveals a bag of cookies and two candy bars. They are a unique brand only sold at the camp store.

Ally’s mouth falls open in shock and she looks at Sam in confusion. They’ve never even been to the store, let alone bought anything.

“That isn’t ours!” Sam exclaims.

Reacting as if Sam had just slapped her, Ms. Cooper takes a step back and looks at her in astonishment. “How dare you lie to me!” she practically yells.

While the rest of her friends are cowering from the enraged director, Sam isn’t having any of it. Placing her hands on her own hips in an imitation of Ms. Cooper, she squares off with her. “I’m not lying! I don’t lie, and I don’t make things up.” Pulling the five-dollar bill from her back pocket, Sam waves it in the air. “This is the only money I brought with me, and I haven’t even been to the store, so that couldn’t be mine! If that was in my bag, then someone else put it there!”

It’s clear at first that the older woman isn’t sure how to respond. But it only lasts for a moment. Then her scowl deepens, her face reddens and she points a finger angrily, first at Sam, and then Ally.

“Both of you will clean this mess up. Then, you will check in with the nurse and get that scratch tended to before you report to the isolation cabin!”

Lexie gasps at this declaration, and Sam realizes that she has earned them step two of the progressive discipline.

“I would suggest that you not open that mouth of yours again,” Ms. Cooper continues when Sam begins to protest. Her tone is menacing and Sam wisely obeys. “You will stay there for the remainder of the day, until bedtime at ten. This is your last chance, young lady. Unless you and Ally want to go home, then you had better learn to do as you’re told. You’re lucky that scratch isn’t a bite, because then you would be on the way to the hospital to receive rabies shots!”

Becky moans behind her, and Sam feels bad for the other girl. Wait…she stops herself. This isn’t even her fault. Sam can’t believe that this woman is actually making her feel guilty for something she didn’t do. What if her new friends believe that she’s lying?

“There are valid reasons for the rules,” Ms. Cooper presses, looking around at all of the upset girls, including them in her lecture now, too. “If you can’t abide by them, then you will leave Camp Whispering Pines!”

11 ISOLATION

The silence in the cabin is heavy after Ms. Cooper leaves, and Sam and Ally stand there, looking at each other in disbelief.

“Come on,” Butterfingers finally says. “Let’s get this cleaned up, and I’ll walk with you to the nurse.”

Solemnly, they go about gathering up all of their belongings. A few items are ruined, but nothing worse than a sock and a hairbrush. Running her finger over the bite-marks on the handle, Sam turns towards their counselor.

“I really didn’t…” she begins, but Butterfingers raises a hand, stopping her. Frustrated, Sam looks instead to Lexie.

“I don’t know how the food got there,” Lexie states, “and I don’t care. I just don’t want to be dragged into all of this trouble. I can’t go home,” she says desperately. “Do you understand, Sam? I can’t!”

Feeling horrible in spite of not being responsible, Sam simply nods.

Becky rushes forward and hugs her tightly. “I believe you,” she whispers close to her ear.

Hugging her back, Sam is thankful for the support.

“Oh!” Butterfingers exclaims, addressing Becky. “I almost forgot. The archery program has been cancelled for tomorrow. You’ll have to choose one of the other activities.”

“Cancelled?” Ally asks, grateful for the distraction. “Why?”

“They didn’t say,” Butterfingers answers, somewhat irritated. “Just that it was due to unexpected circumstances.”

“The only activities that don’t require me passing the swim test are the little kid stuff!” Becky says miserably.

“Oh no,” Sam groans, as it dawns on her that they won’t be able to go to the open swim session. “Ally and I can’t teach you how to swim now!”

“That’s okay,” Lexie says, turning to Becky. “I can do it in no time. You’ll pass that test today, and then you can go on the creek walk with us tomorrow!”

“Well, I have to know what you’re going to do by dinner time,” Butterfingers says, motioning to Sam and Ally. “We need to go. Let’s get this over with.”

Heads hung low, Ally links arms with Sam before following. But as Sam reaches the screen door, something else occurs to her. Moaning, she turns back. “I dropped the bark!” she admits. “After all of that, we don’t even have the base for the barge.”

“We’ll find another one,” Becky offers, when Sandy and Lexie remain silent. But she doesn’t sound very confident.

Even more discouraged now, Sam is pulled down the trail by Ally, who is trying to keep up with Butterfingers’ brisk pace. The counselor appears eager to get rid of them. Sam can’t really blame her.

Approaching the nurse’s cabin, located in between Ms. Cooper’s office and the commissary, they overhear a loud conversation coming from inside.

“What do you mean, possibly rabid?” someone asks, the voice gravely. Sam assumes the voice belongs to the dark-haired, middle-aged woman Lexie pointed out yesterday as the camp nurse.

“That’s not what I said,” Ms. Cooper corrects. “It’s just that these raccoons have been getting much more aggressive and bolder. I think it would be smart to check locally and make sure there haven’t been any cases.”

“If word got out that we might have rabid raccoons at camp, Whispering Pines attendance would decline even more!”

Looking thoroughly embarrassed, Butterfingers rushes to knock on the solid front door, causing the exchange inside to be abruptly cut off. Ms. Cooper yanks the door open and walks past them without a word.

“You’ll have to excuse my sister,” the nurse apologizes when they walk in. According to the nameplate on the desk just inside the door, Nurse Angela Pine is indeed another one of the camp founder’s daughters.

“You must be Sam,” she says politely, turning and reaching for her arm. After a quick exam, Nurse Pine determines that all she needs is some antibiotic ointment and a bandage.

Once Sam is patched up and cleared to leave, they make their way to the back entrance of the kitchen, where Cowboy hands them two sack lunches. Obviously, he’s expecting them and he eyes Sam questioningly. Humiliated, she avoids his stare, feeling like she’s somehow let the older man down.

Each holding their small paper bags, Sam and Ally continue to follow Butterfingers in silence, heading now in the direction of the pool. Halfway there, they veer off the well-worn trail and onto a less used one. No more than twenty feet back, they arrive at a small hut. Sam remembers spotting it that morning on their way to polar-bearing. She had figured it was a storage shed and she’s not far off from the truth. It’s only big enough to hold one bunk bed and a card table with two chairs. Even then, it’s extremely crowded.

Butterfingers simply holds the door open. “I’ll send for you at dinner time. You’ll get your food after everyone else, and bring it back here to eat. If you need a bathroom, use the one at the pool. But if you’re seen doing anything other than that, or speaking with anyone, it’s an automatic expulsion. Do you understand?”

When they both nod yes, Butterfingers turns to leave, but hesitates. Looking back, she has a mixed expression of anger and sorrow. It’s obvious that she wants to say something else, but then seems to make up her mind and closes the door firmly behind her.

“Well, this is a mess.” Ally is the first one to break the silence. Sitting down heavily in one of the chairs, she pulls her feet up under her.

“I just don’t get it, Ally,” Sam complains, sitting down at the little table across from her. “Who would have put that food in our bags, and why?”

Elbows propped on her knees, Ally interlaces her fingers and then rests her chin on them. “I’ve been thinking about that. Maybe it was meant as a harmless prank?”

“Maybe,” Sam agrees. “Do you think that might be the real reason that Sandy stayed behind this morning? She was the last one in the cabin, and she doesn’t seem to like us very much.”

“I’d hate to think so,” Ally says slowly, “but she was awfully quiet after it all happened.”

“I guess it doesn’t really matter now,” Sam decides, picking up a deck of cards from the table. “Ms. Cooper has it out for me and she isn’t going to believe anything I say.”

“I just hope she doesn’t share this with our parents on Friday,” Ally responds. At the end of camp on Friday night, the parents are invited to join them for the final goodbyes. Sam and Ally’s moms have planned to come together and pick the girls up.

Sam has started dealing the cards for a game of War, but now pauses, closing her eyes. Plopping her forehead down on the table, she groans loudly. “Did you have to remind me? We’d never hear the end of it!” Looking back up, a card falls from where it stuck to her face.

Ally starts laughing, unable to stop herself, and, since the only other option is to cry, Sam joins her. Before long, both girls are sitting on the wooden floor, holding their sides from laughing so hard, the cards spread around them.

An hour later, they’re into their fourth card game when the voices of dozens of campers walking down the nearby trail interrupt them. Going to the only window, they both peer out, watching for their friends on the way to the pool. They aren’t able to get a clear view, though. Frustrated, they go back to their only form of entertainment.

After what seems like an eternity and countless games of charades, cards, and a number of other made-up activities, there is finally a knock at the door. Jumping at the sound, Sam answers it eagerly and finds a girl close to her own age standing there.

“Butterfingers sent me. You can go get your dinner now,” she says quietly, looking past Sam and into the cabin with curiosity.

“Thank you!” Ally answers happily, already pulling her tennis shoes on. Before they have a chance to say anything further, the girl spins around and jogs back up the trail. She was probably instructed not to talk to them.

They’ve been in isolation for seven hours and they’re both impatient to go the short distance to the lodge, to be back around other people. As they step into the kitchen however, it’s apparent that Cowboy isn’t pleased.

“So, as if the freezer running out of refrigerant weren’t bad enough, you’re telling me that my staff doesn’t know how to do basic math and convert the recipes adequately?” Cowboy is lecturing a younger man, who is doing his best to look anywhere but at his boss.

Hearing the door close behind the girls, Cowboy looks up abruptly. “Sam,” he says with some annoyance. “If you’re here for dinner, you’re too late. You and twenty other campers don’t get a full meal tonight, thanks to our poor planning. Take what you want of what’s left,” he adds a bit more gently, gesturing to the back counter.

Sam sees some rice, rolls, and green beans that remain in the trays brought from the buffet table. Not wanting to get into the middle of the kitchen discussion, Sam and Ally grab a couple of plates and quickly fill them up. Mumbling thank you, they hurry outside.

Keeping to the shadows behind the lodge, they head back towards the trail, trying to avoid running into anyone. They haven’t quite turned the corner, when a commotion from over near the bathrooms draws their attention.

“Eewww!” someone is saying loudly. “Why would anyone plug all the toilets up on purpose?” There’s a large crowd gathered outside, and they’re all talking excitedly to each other.

“I don’t know,” another girl answers, “but there’s been a lot of stupid stuff happening. My friend came here earlier this summer and said the same thing. It’s not as fun as it used to be. I don’t think I’m going to come back next year.”

Ms. Cooper strides angrily into the middle of the group then, on her way to the bathrooms with a plunger, effectively breaking up the crowd.

Sam and Ally jog as fast as they can back to the isolation cabin, managing not to spill all of their food. Once inside, they sit down at the table, relieved to have made it without incident.

“I’m beginning to understand why the camp is losing money,” Ally says matter-of-factly, eating her cold rice.

“It’s too bad,” Sam replies. Poking at the congealed butter on the green beans, her appetite has faded. “Lexie and a lot of the other regulars would be really sad if it closed down.”

“Maybe we should just let the whole raccoon thing go,” Ally says softly. “You know…not make things any worse. If it was Sandy, I’m sure she already feels bad.”

“I was thinking the same thing,” Sam says without hesitation. “We’ll be gone all day tomorrow for the creek walk and then two days for the horseback ride. Who cares about crabby Ms. Cooper anyway, right? We know the truth, and we’ve made some great friends. I think that’s what Mr. Pine wanted Whispering Pines to be about: finding good friends.”

Smiling again, Sam and Ally finish their food, determined to make the best of things. “What about Bigfoot?” Ally adds as an afterthought, pushing her empty plate away.

“Well…that’s different,” Sam says mischievously.

12 CREEK WALKING

Hours later, Sam is tucked away in bed, back at Cabin Navaho. The rest of the night passed surprisingly fast, although they were still relieved when Lexie came to get them.

Becky was the first to break the awkward silence after they returned, excited to tell them that she had passed the swim test. Her happiness was contagious, and by the time they all climbed into bed, the only thing on their minds was the daylong hike they were leaving for in the morning.

Butterfingers’ light, rhythmic snoring is just loud enough to keep Sam awake. She’s considering whether to throw a pillow at her when someone whispers her name.

“Sam.” There it is again. Turning over onto her stomach, Sam looks out into the dark room. She knows it isn’t coming from beneath her.

“Who is it?” she whispers back, still searching the shadows for movement.

“It’s me, dummy,” Lexie says in a more normal voice, waving her hands out in front of her. Both of them are on the top bunks, so that their heads are only a few feet apart. Now that Sam’s eyes have adjusted and she knows where to look, she can easily see the outline of her friend.

“Oh!” Sam answers, waving back. “What’s up?”

Butterfingers’ snoring pauses at the louder voices, but then continues, reassuring them that she’s still asleep.

“I have something for you,” Lexie says mysteriously, holding out her hand. Sam reaches across the gap and is surprised when she feels something hairy.

Pulling the item back, she studies it as best she can in the dark. It’s two inches square, with course hair on one side and a smooth, solid backing on the other. “What in the world is this?” she asks, thoroughly confused.

“Before I went to get you at the cabin tonight, I took a little detour and went back to where you dropped the bark,” Lexie confesses, lowering her voice again.

“You did what?” Sam gasps. “In the dark? Are you crazy?”

“Maybe…a little,” Lexie laughs quietly. “It’s not that far from the isolation cabin. It only took me ten minutes. Anyway,” she continues, “when I was searching around the fallen log with my flashlight for the piece you dropped, I found that stuck on a broken branch.”

It takes a minute for the implication to dawn on Sam, but when it does, she drops the hairy thing in disgust. “Oh my gosh! Is that a piece of Bigfoot’s skin?” Noticing that she’s let it fall onto her pillow, Sam quickly picks it back up gingerly with the very tips of her fingers. “That’s gross!”

“Calm down,” Lexie urges. “If you were looking at that in the light, you’d understand why I don’t think it has anything to do with Bigfoot.”

“What do you mean?” Sam asks, more curious now than repulsed.

“The skin is cured, Sam. Like a pelt. I think it’s probably from something made out of deer skin.”

Sam is a little embarrassed now, realizing that the skin side is definitely too soft and pliable to be fresh. It reminds her of the little purses and shoes at gift shops made of rabbit or deer.

“Wait,” she says with a jolt. “This means that whatever was out there was wearing something made out of deer skin?”

“Yup!” Lexie confirms, and Sam can see her silhouette nodding enthusiastically. “Sam, I think that someone is pretending to be Bigfoot!”

“But why would anyone do that?” Thoroughly confused now, Sam taps thoughtfully at her chin. “Do you think we should tell someone?”

“Tell them what?” Lexie counters. “Normally, being just a few feet outside the boundary wouldn’t be a big deal, but with as much trouble as you’ve been in already…no. I don’t think we should say anything. Besides, I think that whoever is doing this would love it if we told everyone. So let’s not give him what he wants. Okay?”

Running her fingers over the deer hide, Sam considers their options. Lexie might be right. The most likely thing to happen is that they’d get in trouble for going where they shouldn’t have. She and Ally could even be sent home. Then the Bigfoot rumors would just spread even more, hurting the camp’s already suffering reputation. It’s probably best to keep this to themselves.

“Okay,” Sam finally agrees. “We won’t say anything about this.” Reaching out, she tries to give the clue back to Lexie.

“No, keep it,” she insists. “You’re more interested in it than I am.”

Sam tucks it away under her pillow. As her eyes finally close and she drifts off to sleep, she’s certain her dreams will be full of large, hairy creatures chasing her through the woods.

***

Sam doesn’t have a chance to show the clue to Ally until later the next morning. While she doesn’t remember dreaming about Bigfoot, she did dream about being lost in the woods, reinforcing a fear of the thick woods surrounding them now. Trying to shed the remnants of the nightmare, she walks alongside her best friend.

Pulling the small patch of skin and hair from her back pocket, she hands it to Ally. In hushed tones, she tells her what it is. They’ve been hiking for over an hour already, and they’re all spread out along the trail. No one else can overhear them.

Shocked, but also excited by the mystery, Ally gives it back after studying it closely. “I agree, we can’t tell anyone right now,” she says, nodding. “They probably wouldn’t even believe us. But what can we do about it?”

Shrugging, Sam stuffs it back in her pocket. “For now, just keep an eye out for other clues. Lexie and I talked more this morning. She’s going to let Sandy and Becky in on it, so all of us will be looking.”

“Do you think it’s smart to tell Sandy?” Ally questions, looking back down the trail to where Lexie and Becky are walking together.

“Well, she was out there too, and Sandy doesn’t seem like the type that would tell on herself.”

Grinning, Ally can’t argue with such a valid point. Squinting against the bright sunshine beating down on them, they fall silent again while concentrating on the uphill terrain.

As the day progresses, the long line of hikers tread deep into the Cascade Mountains. Sam has never been this far into these woods. The changing scenery is so grand that it’s hard to compare it to anything else.

Just before lunchtime, the path suddenly drops over a ridge and down into a sharp ravine. As they carefully make the descent, Sam gazes at the distant tree line above them, and notices a large area of dead or dying trees. She points it out to Lexie, who doesn’t seem too bothered by it.

“Probably beetles or something,” Lexie suggests. “They can cause all sorts of problems.”

When they finally reach the bottom of the ravine, a cool mountain creek greets them. Everyone is eager to get wet.

“Well come on!” their guide shouts, laughing. “This is why this activity is called ‘creek walking.’ Jump in!”

Laughing, the Cabin Navaho members are the first to splash into the clear, shallow water. After the remaining fifty or so girls follow, the group continues along the creek, the part of the hike that gave the activity its name.

After more than an hour of a challenging course of slippery rocks, fallen trees and even a couple of small waterfalls, they finally reach their destination. Coming around a particularly sharp bend, Sam stops abruptly, causing Ally and Becky to crash into her.

“Isn’t it amazing?” Lexie shouts, splashing ahead of them.

Looming before them is the opening to a massive cave. Huge boulders as large as cars are scattered around its entrance, making it appear even more surreal. Sam feels like an ant in comparison, and cranes her neck to look up at the caverns’ ceiling once inside.

It’s like being in another world. Long daggers of rock reach down towards them, almost met by identical formations rising up from the ground.

“These formations are called stalactites and stalagmites,” their guide explains, running his hand over their odd, lumpy surfaces. “The stalactites are the ones that look like icicles on the ceiling. They’re formed over thousands of years by water dripping. The mineral in that water then creates the stalagmites that build up underneath.”

Completely enthralled by the odd creations, Sam barely acknowledges the sack lunch that’s handed to her. She’s seen pictures of these in books before and on some travel show years ago, but this is the first time in person. Digging the flashlight out of her backpack, she explores a bit farther into the unique cave.

The creek they were walking in flows through a section of the cave, meandering around the large rocks and stalagmites. Sam carefully picks her way through it, following the somewhat sparkly and mesmerizing rocks.

“Sam!” Ally calls out, trying to keep up. “Don’t go too far. I don’t like being this far in.”

Pausing, Sam climbs up onto a nearby boulder with a flattened top, and Ally joins her. The light from the entrance just barely reaches them, but it’s enough that they can see without the flashlights on. Taking out their sandwiches, they hungrily start eating while listening to all of the girls making various echoes in other parts of the cave.

Sam gets halfway through her food, when suddenly a horrible stench reaches her. “Ugh!” she gags. “What’s that smell?” Grabbing the flashlight again, she slips down on the opposite side and starts looking around. It doesn’t take long to follow the disgusting odor back to its source.

Piled up in a large crevasse on the underside of the rock are more than a dozen dead trout, carried there by the water. A little relieved to discover it isn’t something worse, Sam starts to turn away when something else catches her attention.

Floating past the rotting fish is some sort of multi-colored piece of paper. Intrigued, Sam leans over and snatches it before it can disappear. Squinting, she studies the faded wording. Mountain Construction, LLC. Figuring it must be some sort of label, she folds it carefully, placing it in her pocket with the tuft of hair.

The hoots and groans bouncing off the walls echo the thoughts tumbling around in her head. Somehow, she knows these items are connected, and she’s determined to find out how.

13 SANDY

They make it back to camp just before dinnertime and go directly to the lodge to eat. Once gathered at their table, Sam realizes that Sandy isn’t there. Spotting Butterfingers, she flags her down.

“Do you know where Sandy is?” she asks. “Have they gotten back from the kayaking trip yet?”

“They got back an hour ago,” Butterfingers explains. “But Sandy had an…exciting afternoon and went to lie down.” Before Sam can get any more information, their counselor walks away, leaving them all guessing.

“Let’s hurry up and finish eating,” Becky urges. “I want to make sure she’s okay.”

“Do you think we should have told her about our, umm…discovery?” Ally worries. “Maybe she blabbed about it to someone and got in trouble.”

Lexie pauses with a spoonful of pork and beans halfway to her mouth, concerned. Looking around as if expecting Ms. Cooper to come marching up to them, she swallows hard. “She better not have, or else she’ll find worse than a raccoon in her bed!”

So Lexie thinks Sandy was responsible for the raccoon incident too, Sam considers. Rushing to finish her cheeseburger, she hopes they’ll still get to leave for the overnight horseback ride in the morning. It was the one thing she’d been looking forward to the most.

By the time the four of them burst into the cabin, they all have various ideas of what they’re going to find and how they’re going to handle it. However, the reality comes as a shock. Sandy is curled up on her bed, sound asleep. Her normally well-kept hair is in disarray, splayed out around her head, damp and knotted. Her tennis shoes are scattered on the floor, sopping wet. It’s clear her backpack took a dunking, too.

Sam is surprised, since Sandy had been bragging about how good she is at kayaking. She even claimed to own one and to use it regularly at a lake near her home. The group was being bussed to a large lake not too far away, so it wasn’t swift water. How could she have rolled it?

“Sandy?” she asks hesitantly. “Are you awake?”

Opening her eyes, Sandy rubs them and then sits up slowly. “You’re back,” is all she says.

“What happened?” Becky demands. She sits down on the bed next to her friend, and puts a supportive arm around her damp shoulders.

“I’m fine,” Sandy insists. “But I’m never coming back to this stupid camp! They have wild animals in our cabins, untrained staff, stopped-up toilets, not enough food, and worn-out equipment. My kayak had a hole in it! Can you believe that? I got nearly halfway out on the lake before I realized that the water in the bottom of it was more than normal. By the time I got turned around and headed back, it was quickly getting worse.” Turning now to face them all, she’s near tears.

“I was faster than everyone else there, so I was way out ahead. I was told not to go so far, but I ignored them. So when the kayak sunk, I was still a good distance away from the group. I had a life vest on, of course, but all of my stuff was stowed in the kayak. We were rowing over to the other side and then going on a hike before having lunch. So I had my backpack with all of my stuff in it. I had to float on my back and try to hold my bag up for ten minutes before someone heard me yelling for help and finally spotted me.

“All of the kayaks were one-person, so I had to hold onto a rope and get towed by the guide. It was cold and humiliating. I just want to go home!”

“Did you talk to anyone about going home?” Becky asks, sounding worried. “We all want you to stay and go on the horseback ride with us tomorrow! Right, you guys?” she asks, looking to Sam, Ally, and Lexie.

“Of course we do!”

Lexie is quick to answer, surprising Sam, who can’t help but wonder if Lexie’s enthusiasm is genuine, or if she is thinking more about protecting the camp. Sandy’s father was trying to buy it, and if he were to find out just how much the camp is struggling, it might give him some leverage with the board.

“Stop it you guys,” Sandy says harshly. “None of you actually like me, you’re just pretending. It’s okay. I’m used to it. No one ever really wants to be my friend…not even my parents. They’re more concerned with how our family appears to everyone else instead.”

Sam and Ally sit on the other side of Sandy, crowding onto the lower bunk. Gathered around their unexpected friend, Sam feels guilty for being so judgmental of her from the beginning. She can’t imagine how horrible it would be to feel that way.

“I like you, Sandy,” she says honestly. “We might not have a lot in common, but you’re fun to be around, once someone gets to know you.”

“Yeah, and you’re funny, too!” Ally adds.

“And brave,” Becky says softly. “I wish I were as brave as you are, Sandy. You aren’t afraid to do anything, or to tell people exactly what’s on your mind. I could never do that. I think I would have had a heart attack if I had been stuck out in the middle of a lake!”

“They’re right,” Lexie admits, somewhat reluctantly. “I know that I’ve given you a hard time, but I think it might be because I was jealous. I thought you had the perfect life, and parents that were actually there for you.”

Sam is stunned at the confession, and she can see the immediate effect that it has. Sandy’s features soften, and she seems to finally give in and accept the friendship that’s being offered.

“I don’t think I’ve ever had real girlfriends before,” she confesses, wiping absently at a lone tear.

“Well, now you have four!” Lexie tells her, kneeling down in front of the group on the bed. “And friends look out for each other, right?” she asks, looking at each of them.

“Right!” they all answer, bound together by something none of them could put into words.

14 TRAIL OF DANGER

The sun is hot on their backs as they settle into the saddles and prepare to start out on the much anticipated trail ride.

Somehow, Sam ended up on the first horse, a large mare with white and black patches, named Sundance. They were already off to a rocky start, with Sam struggling to keep her mount from trying to eat every leafy thing in reach.

Sam was delighted to discover that Cowboy is part of the trail team, which explains his nickname. There are twenty girls on the overnight trip and that means a whole lot of horses to manage, so there are two other handlers, as well as two counselors. Butterfingers had to stay back at camp to help Ms. Cooper with various tasks. The girls have strict instructions to be on their best behavior.

Despite Cowboy’s obvious knowledge, he isn’t in charge. As soon as the girls had arrived early this morning, a young man named Zorro had started barking out orders. In his twenties, he’s well over six feet tall and pushing two-hundred and fifty pounds. His attitude matches his tough physique.

Where Cowboy is laid back and in control, the third man is just the opposite. Ranger seems eager to please Zorro and practically trips over his own feet while running to do everything he demands. Also in his twenties, he’s skinny and not quite as tall as Zorro. Sam recognizes him as the same guy that Cowboy was criticizing for messing up dinner the other night.

Zorro is leading the ride on a massive black horse in front of Sam. He cautioned her to stay a good distance behind him, as his steed doesn’t like to be crowded.

Cowboy is the middle of the pack, with Ranger taking up the rear. The riders have been grouped first according to their cabin, then by riding ability. Sam had the most experience, so was given the biggest responsibility.

“Sundance is a pig,” Ally laughs. She has to pull up short again while Sam fights to gain control.

“Do you want to trade?” Sam turns around in her saddle once she has her horse back on the trail. She looks longingly at Ally’s calm, chestnut colored mount. “Or anyone?” she says more loudly to Lexie, Becky and Sandy.

The three other girls are directly behind them. Grinning, they all shake their heads vigorously. “I should have warned you,” Lexie chuckles. “I got her once last year. She’s nice and all, just….very hungry.”

Facing forward again, Sam lets out a big sigh and gathers up the reins a bit tighter. They have five hours of riding ahead of them. It took close to an hour to hike up to the starting point, so it’ll be a late lunch once they arrive at the temporary camp that’s already set up.

Honestly, even though the horse is a pain, she doesn’t mind. Just being in the saddle, riding through the woods, is a dream come true. Closing her eyes, Sam tilts her head up to the sun and lets it wash over her, much the same way it’s cleansing the mountains. There was a thick layer of mist on the trail when they first started out. But it’s already lifting and blowing away in the light, warm breeze scented with pine. Mixed in now with the smell of the woods is saddle soap, leather, and the distinct aroma of horse that still lingers in the old barn at Sam’s house.

The reins in Sam’s hands go taught, jerking her out of her trance. “Ugh!” she groans, fighting once again with her new, stubborn friend who’s found some large, green leafy plant that just has to be eaten.

“Get that horse under control!” Zorro yells from up ahead. “I don’t want to see her off the trail.”

“Geez, maybe they should put that horse at the back, instead of the front,” Becky mutters.

“I said the same thing when I had her,” Lexie agrees. “But Cowboy explained that she’s old and stubborn and the only way she’ll do the trail is if she’s leading. That’s another reason Zorro is staying so far out.”

“Humph. Leave the stupid horse in the barn, then,” Sandy complains. Her own ride is a beautiful white mare with a long, flowing mane. She had rushed to claim her as soon as spotting her this morning.

“Nah…Sundance is an icon here,” Lexie tells them. “She was one of the first horses ever used on the trail ride and was Mr. Pine’s own horse. According to Cowboy, it was even written into his will that she be taken care of after his passing.”

Knowing this, Sam sits a little taller in the saddle and pats at Sundance’s long, sturdy neck. “Well, we’re going to be friends. Right, old girl?” she says happily. Snickering, the horse tosses her head and then promptly goes for a patch of long grass.

The morning stretches on, but they travel the trail much faster than the day before and they soon find themselves at the top of the same, steep ravine as yesterday. Although they’re farther up from where they had climbed down, it’s still in the same general location.

Actually, Sam thinks to herself, we’re in the clump of dead trees that I saw! Looking around with more interest, Sam notes that it’s a small area of brown at the top of the cliff. However, it follows a group of sparse trees all the way down to the water at the bottom, making an odd line of death.

Zorro turns to the left, taking the well-trampled trail upstream, in the opposite direction of the creek walk. Following him at a distance, Sam looks nervously to her right. Although they’re a good two feet from the drop-off, being up on the horse makes her feel like she’s about to fall over the side.

Her friends just make the turn behind her, when suddenly Sundance decides to go her own way again. But this time, it isn’t for a snack. With growing horror, Sam pulls desperately at the reins as she realizes that she’s heading straight for the edge!

15 THE MASK OF ZORRO

Crying out in alarm as Sundance sidesteps from her yanking, Sam is sure they’re both about to plummet to their deaths. But as Ally starts to scream a warning behind her, Sam sees there’s a narrow deer trail that her horse is trying to follow.

“Whoa, there!” Cowboy yells. Sam can hear the sound of heavy hoof beats pounding towards her.

Still struggling to get control, Sam is less fearful now that she knows the ground doesn’t actually fall away. Leaning back in the saddle to give Sundance more leverage, she tries to guide her back onto the main trail. Neighing loudly in protest and tossing her head wildly, Sundance finally backs up a couple of steps, bucks slightly, and then lunges forward, straight for Zorro!

Relieved to be back on solid ground, Sam continues to scramble in the saddle, now trying to shift her weight forward. Digging in her knees, she leans down close to the spooked horse’s neck. “Whoa girl,” she says firmly, while pulling down on the reins and trying to turn her in a circle to the left. This was a technique she had learned a couple of years ago, a good way to stop a runaway horse.

Fortunately, it works. She manages to stop Sundance a few feet from the testy, black stallion. Apparently, it isn’t enough, because the stallion reacts violently and it takes Zorro several minutes to calm him down.

Meanwhile, Cowboy has come up alongside Sam. The rest of the riders are all lined up on the trail behind them, crowded together, trying to get a glimpse of the commotion. “What’s going on up there?” Ranger demands, trapped at the back of the pack.

“I’ll tell you what’s going on!” Zorro bellows, jumping down to the ground. Stomping towards Sam, he points a large finger at her. “The problem is that we’ve got someone who doesn’t know how to ride safely. Get off that horse!” he demands, his anger apparent.

Sam once again finds herself at the other end of an unfair accusation. But this time, she is too intimidated by the furious man to even think of arguing back. Doing her best not to burst into tears, she silently slides from the saddle.

“You can walk that horse from here on, since you obviously can’t ride it!” Zorro declares, still wagging a finger at her.

“Now wait just a minute!” Cowboy intervenes. “You can hardly blame the girl. Last time I checked, this was a camp for young ladies. We shouldn’t be putting them on a horse that can’t stay on the trail!”

“That’s why you don’t give the horse its own lead!” Zorro argues, his voice getting even louder. “She had to have let up on the reins. I told her specifically to keep ‘em tight. And last time I checked, old man, my name was the one on the side of the horse trailer, not yours! If I want your opinion, I’ll ask for it.”

His face turning a dark crimson, Cowboy dismounts smoothly from his own horse and hands the reins to Sam. Taking a somewhat menacing step towards Zorro, he veers off towards the woods and motions curtly for the younger man to follow him.

Sam looks at Ally and sees her own dismay mirrored on her friend’s face.

“Are you okay?” Ally asks, swallowing hard. “I thought for sure that you were going to fall!”

“I’m fine,” Sam manages to croak out. Standing somewhat awkwardly, holding the reins for both horses, she looks behind Ally to Lexie. “What is that all about?” she asks, angling her chin towards the two men arguing now in hushed tones.

“Cowboy’s been here forever,” Lexie explains, “but Zorro was put in charge of the horses this year. I don’t know the details, but it was obvious at the last camp session that they don’t get along.”

“Well, the guy’s a jerk,” Sandy whispers. “That wasn’t your fault, Sam. He’s probably just afraid your parents will sue him if he doesn’t act like you did something wrong.”

“Hey, what’s the hold up?” Ranger has gotten tired of waiting and brought his horse up.

“Nothing, get back to your post,” Cowboy barks, walking briskly back to the waiting girls. His face is still red, and now Zorro’s is, too. Without another word, the younger man gets on his horse and starts riding back up the trail.

“Here, you’ll be on Lucky from now on,” Cowboy tells Sam, taking Sundance’s reins from her. “I think it best if we just switch. He’s a bit uppity, but a smart horse. Can you ride behind Becky back there and keep an eye on the other girls?”

Sam is so relieved that she could hug him, but doesn’t want to make an even bigger scene. She’d pay anything to know what he said to Zorro. “Thank you,” she simply says instead.

“Nothing to thank me for.” Winking once, Cowboy expertly swings up into the saddle and starts them on their way again.

A little nervous to get back on a horse, Sam is happy to find that Lucky is very mellow and falls into his rightful place without her even having to guide him.

Fortunately, the rest of the afternoon goes without incident. By the time they reach their overnight camp, Sam has finally relaxed and is enjoying herself again. As the horses all gather in an open field next to the tents to graze, they begin to dismount and help get the saddles off.

Doing their best to avoid Zorro, Sam and Ally carry their tack over to some logs, where they were instructed to lay it all out. Draping the damp horse blanket, Sam studies some of the other gear that’s spread out, and pauses. Set on top of the log that’s next to theirs, are the tan saddlebags that Sam had spent a couple of hours staring at today. Zorro’s bags. Now that she sees them up close, it’s clear that they’re made out of deer hide.

“Ally,” she says, the excitement in her voice clear.

Curious, Ally finishes arranging her things and then steps up next to Sam. “What is it?” she asks, turning to look at what Sam is pointing at. It takes her a minute, but then she makes the connection. “The hair in the woods,” she concludes. “But Sam, there’s a lot of things made out of deer hide. That doesn’t mean it’s him.”

Sam startles Ally by taking her by the shoulders and pulling her down. They’re now both squatting next to the horse blanket at eye-level, with the bag a few feet away. “Even if it’s missing a piece the same size as the one we found?” she asks smugly.

Ally can now see that there is, in fact, a hole in one of the bags…and she’s guessing that their clue would fit in it perfectly!

***

“Why would Zorro be sneaking around in the woods, pretending to be Bigfoot?” Becky wants to know.

The sun set over an hour ago, and they’ve all gathered around a large fire to roast marshmallows before bed. It’s the first opportunity they’ve had to talk about their most recent discovery. Sitting as far off to one side as possible without drawing any criticism, the five of them huddle together and speak in hushed tones.

“I don’t know much about Zorro,” Lexie admits. “Except that his dad owns the horse outfit and he seems pretty close to Ms. Cooper. Cowboy sure doesn’t like him, but you don’t need me to tell you that.”

“Maybe we should tell Cowboy?” Ally suggests, always the prudent one.

Sam considers this carefully. If Cowboy believed them, then what? He would have to talk with Ms. Cooper when they got back, which would lead to more of her wrath. Or…he wouldn’t believe them, in which case, they would be in for an even bigger dose of Ms. Cooper’s discipline.

“No,” Sam replies, shaking her head. “We don’t really have anything to tell him, except that we might have proof that he was in the same area where we saw something big that made a weird sound. A place that was supposed to be off-limits. Zorro would probably come up with some sort of explanation and we’d be blamed for having wild imaginations.”

“Maybe that’s all it is.” The voice of reason belongs to Sandy, who grins in response to their shocked expressions. “I’m just saying that we really don’t know what we saw, and I agree with Sam; we’d sound pretty stupid accusing Zorro of it.”

Having it put that way, Sam feels kind of silly now. They all decide to keep it to themselves and then join the rest of the campers for the last song.

There are three large canvas tents in the clearing, with the girls and counselors in two of them and the three men in the third. As the campfire dies down, darkness spills in from the woods. Soon the silence is complete, interrupted occasionally by a horse’s snicker or whinny.

Lying in her sleeping bag, Sam is sure that she’s the only one still awake. The heavy, rhythmic breathing of sleeping campers surrounds her and she longs to join them. However, she can’t seem to shut her brain off and instead replays the scene from earlier over and over again. Although certain she didn’t do anything wrong, she can’t help but wonder if she should have kept a tighter grip on the reins, or if maybe she was distracted by the dead trees.

A cracking branch near the tent draws her attention, and she is instantly wide awake. Holding her breath, she strains to hear other noises. She is rewarded by the distinct sound of carefully placed footsteps leading away from the tents, towards the horses. The makeshift bathroom is in the other direction, so Sam is immediately suspicious.

Not wanting to wake anyone, she crawls quietly from her bedding and peeks her head through the opening. Unable to make out anything in the thick darkness, she slips out of the tent and creeps in the direction of the sound, her bare feet silent in the pine needles.

She doesn’t have far to go before she hears a whispered conversation on the light breeze. More curious now than scared, she tiptoes towards it, ducking behind a large tree when two men’s dark forms come into view.

“I told you before to take that horse out of the line-up!” The voice belongs to Zorro, and Ranger answers him.

“She’s the only one willing to walk that trail in the dark, man. You know that! I don’t care what the old man’s will says…you can’t have it both ways. She does one or the other, but not both.”

Sam peeks out cautiously when there’s a pause in the dialogue.

“We’ll figure it out later, but Cowboy’s starting to ask questions,” Zorro responds. He hands something to Ranger then, slapping it into his palm. “Here’s your share. You’ve got twelve barrels for me to take back tomorrow night, correct?”

“Umm…yeah. About that,” Ranger says uneasily, shoving the package into his jacket pocket. “I got eleven to go back. I, ah…I lost one.”

“You lost another one?” Zorro says menacingly. “I told you before, that’s not acceptable! You’re going to come back here tomorrow and find it. We can’t be leaving that kind of evidence behind. Especially not now!”

“Come on, man!” Ranger whines. “There ain’t nobody out here but us. You’re starting to get paranoid, and I hate climbing down to the bottom.”

“Then you shouldn’t have dropped it. And I don’t pay you to think. I’m the one taking the risks. You just do what I tell you, and it’ll work out fine. Now…I’ll be at the trailhead tomorrow night at midnight for the pickup. I want all twelve empties. Got it?”

“Sure, man. Sure.” Ranger concedes. Backing away from the much larger man, he holds his hands out in surrender. “Whatever you say.”

Shrinking into the shadows, Sam holds her breath and watches as the two conspirators walk back past her. There’s a lot more going on here than just scaring some girls at a camp, Sam realizes with a start. Her heart is hammering so loud that she’s sure they’ll hear her.

After several minutes pass without her being discovered, she silently makes her way back to the tent and climbs into her safe, warm sleeping bag. Afraid of making any noise, she decides to wait until morning to tell the other girls about it. With thoughts of Bigfoot, dead trees, and Ms. Cooper’s accusing eyes swirling through her head, she finally falls asleep.

16 SABOTAGED!

Ally and Becky are horrified to learn that Sam has snuck around in the dark woods by herself, but both Sandy and Lexie are impressed.

“Just wake me up next time!” Lexie begs as they gather their stuff together for the ride back to camp.

“Shhh,” Becky cautions, looking around to make sure no one is eavesdropping. “What do you think it means?”

“It means that these creeps are doing something illegal out here. This camp is getting even weirder,” Sandy says bluntly. Pulling her hair up into a ponytail, she focuses on Sam. “Too bad you’ve got everyone so mad at us. And it’s still your word against his.”

Biting at her lip, Sam can’t come up with a valid argument. Sandy’s right again. Sam isn’t even put off by her directness. She’s used to it now, and understands that it isn’t personal, but just the way Sandy is.

“So we just need to figure the rest of this out in the next two days,” Sam finally concludes.

“Right,” Ally agrees. “We all should be on the lookout for anything odd or out of place.”

Cowboy hollers for everybody to mount up, so the discussion ends. He had guided Sam towards Lucky without comment when they started gearing up the horses, so he is now at the front on Sundance.

Ranger is staying behind at the camp with the three horses used to pack in all of the food and water. Zorro replaces him at the end of the line, his testy stallion nipping at a couple of horses on the way.

The rhythm of the swaying horses is hypnotic. When they all come to a stop, it seems like minutes have passed instead of hours, Looking up in surprise, Sam discovers that they are already back at the trailhead. Of course, the lack of sleep she had the night before might have something to do with her lack of attention to time, as well.

A rough gravel road leads away into the woods and a large truck and horse trailer are parked on it. It was also there the day before, and Sam assumes that it’s how they move the horses in and out. A good sized pasture’s been fenced off, and there are a couple of small buildings for storage. This must enable them to keep the horses there for a day or two, in between the rides.

“I don’t think my rear end has ever been this sore,” Sandy moans, sliding down painfully to the ground. “But it was still fun,” she quickly adds, smiling at Becky.

After another sack lunch, it’s already mid-afternoon. The girls say goodbye to the horses and hike down to the main trail. Sam and Ally are relieved to leave Zorro behind to finish tending to the animals.

The young counselors lead them in marching songs, and the next hour is a great reminder of how much fun Camp Whispering Pines really is. Ally finds a perfectly shaped, weathered stick for the mast on their barge, which launches a treasure hunt by all twenty girls. Several unique items are spotted right along the trail. Each time the finders are convinced it will make theirs the winning boat.

By the time they get back to Cabin Navaho, their soreness is almost forgotten and the girls are ready for another fun night.

“I can’t believe that tomorrow is Thursday already. We’ve only got one full day left,” Becky remarks. “I’m sure going to miss all of you.”

Ally notes how much stronger Becky’s voice is. She certainly doesn’t seem like the same shy, timid girl they met just a few days ago.

“You know, it’s funny,” Sandy replies. “I thought my parents were trying to get rid of me again by sending me here. But I guess they might have been right about this being a good experience, because I’m going to miss you, too!”

Lexie is being unusually quiet, and Sam looks at her questioningly. “Lexie,” she says softly, getting the other girls attention. “What did you mean the other day, when you said you were jealous of Sandy?”

Shuffling her feet, Lexie looks back at Sam briefly before staring at the floor. “A couple of years ago, my older brother was killed in a car accident. My parents were so busy grieving, that they forgot they still had a daughter.” Although her voice is steady, she dabs at her eyes. “I got used to taking care of myself. That’s when I started spending my summers here. But now,” she continues, her voice hardening, “I might lose this place, too. My folks have been trying to get me to stay home and spend time with them again, so they’ll use all this stuff as an excuse to say I can’t come anymore. Or else it’ll be shut down altogether.” Throwing her backpack up on the bed, she turns away from the worried stares of her friends.

“Maybe that wouldn’t be such a bad thing.” Ally suggests. When Lexie turns and looks at her sharply, she’s quick to explain herself. “I mean, spending time with your mom and dad. Maybe you can talk to them, Lexie, and agree to just not come as often. Let them know how important the camp is to you, but don’t you think you should give them a chance, too? I’m sure they must love you.”

“I wish my parents wanted to spend more time with me,” Sandy says. “But no matter what, I think that all of us should write down our emails and phone numbers, so that we can stay in contact after camp. You do have phones or computers, right?”

Lexie smiles, nodding enthusiastically. Taking her backpack down again, she digs around and finally produces a notebook and pen. “Here!” she directs, handing it to Sandy. “You start. Everyone jot down your info and I’ll make copies of it for all of us!”

Sam’s just finished adding her phone number when Butterfingers barges into the cabin, startling them all. Without even acknowledging the other girls, she turns to Ally and Sam. “I need to talk with you,” she says bluntly.

“Okay…” Sam says, setting the paper aside. “What’s up?”

“Just come with me.” Spinning around, she leaves as abruptly as she entered.

“This can’t be good,” Ally moans, getting slowly to her feet.

By the time they step outside, Butterfingers has already started walking away from the cabin and the two girls hurry after her. “What now?” Sam asks, getting more anxious.

Approaching the bottom of the trail where it branches off to the lodge and other buildings, she turns on them. They’re both shocked by the obvious anger on their counselor’s normally friendly face.

“I don’t have anything to say to you, but Ms. Cooper does. She’s waiting for you in her office.”

Before they can even ask questions, Butterfingers marches away from them, her hands balled into fists at her sides.

“Oh geez,” Sam breathes, looking fearfully towards the director’s office. “Why does this keep happening to us?” Reaching out to take Ally’s hand for comfort, the two of them inch closer.

Before they’re clear of the tree line, the big red truck with the horse trailer comes roaring up and stops right in front of their destination. Sam remembers seeing a dirt road over on the far side of the clearing. Evidently, this must be one that leads to where the horses are kept.

Zorro climbs down from the pickup and leaps up the front steps. “Aunt Cooper, are you in there?” he hollers, pulling at the door without waiting for an answer.

Sam and Ally look at each other, dumbfounded. “Aunt?” they both whisper at the same time. Turning back to the truck, Sam notices the sign on the side of it for the first time.

Mountain Construction, LLC.

Family Owned and Operated Business.

Mark and Steven Pine.

Pulling out the weathered label she found in the cave from her pocket, Sam holds it out to Ally. The colorful logo in the background is an exact match. But what is Zorro doing here now? Sam worries. Something tells her that it has everything to do with her near trip down the ravine.

It takes all of their combined courage to enter the small building, but they do it together and find Zorro behind the desk with Ms. Cooper. They appear to be in the middle of a serious discussion, but stop abruptly when they spot the girls..

“Sam, Ally. I’m going to make this short, because I don’t like playing games.” If Sam had thought Ms. Cooper sounded harsh before, that was nothing compared to her tone now. “I’ve already spoken with your parents. You’re being expelled from Camp Whispering Pines. They will be here tomorrow to pick you up.”

Staring at her in stunned silence, both girls are at a loss for words. Sam’s heart feels like it fell into her stomach, and she’s afraid that she might throw up. Looking at Ally’s pale complexion, she’s guessing her best friend is feeling the same.

“But…I-I don’t understand,” Sam practically wails. “What did we do wrong?”

“I told you that I don’t play games!” the older woman shouts, slamming a hand down onto her desk. “I looked into you,” she continues, wagging a finger as Sam. “I had heard you might have an issue with authority. Was our camp not exciting enough for you girls, so that you had to drum up some of your own drama?”

“What in the world are you talking about?” Ally demands, impressing Sam with how steady she sounds. “You can at least tell us what we’re being accused of.”

“I don’t have to explain myself to you, but for the record…” Ms. Cooper begins, pushing at a folder to lift a paper out from underneath it. As she does this, something small is shoved off the edge of the desk, and lands on the floor near Sam’s feet. Happy for a distraction, she glances down at it and sees that it’s a business card. All she can make out is the larger print in the middle: Hollingsworth Industries. Wasn’t that Sandy’s last name?

Clearing her throat, the director starts reading from an actual list. “Violating our pool safety policy by interfering with the rescue of a struggling swimmer. Violating our camp rules by storing food inside a cabin. Disrespecting the administration by arguing about said violations. Violating camp rules by going outside the marked boundaries.” Zorro looks pointedly at Sam and she shifts uncomfortably in the chair.

“Then there’s the incident on the trail ride.” Miss Cooper continues, looking directly at Sam. “Another situation instigated by not following the directions that were clearly outlined for you. You jeopardized your safety, the life of the horse you were on and the other riders that could have followed you.”

“How can you possibly blame-” Ally starts to argue, but Sam silences her by calmly placing a hand on her arm.

“It doesn’t matter,” Sam says softly. When Ms. Cooper and Zorro exchange a surprised look at her comment, she takes advantage of the distraction by putting her foot on top of the business card and slowly drawing it back towards her.

“Well, as if that wasn’t enough already,” Ms. Cooper insists, deciding to ignore Sam. “We had a camper come forward this afternoon and admit to seeing the two of you fleeing the bathrooms right before the vandalism was discovered the other night. While I might tolerate some of the other poor behaviors, that is something we simply cannot allow to go unpunished. That kind of criminal act spreads harmful rumors and sheds a very poor light on our organization. Camp Whispering Pines can’t afford that sort of negative reputation.”

Ally has begun to openly weep, but while Sam feels horrible, she is more convinced than ever about a growing suspicion. Pretending to also be upset, she places her head in her hands, and peeks between her fingers to confirm that the business card is now directly under her.

“Come on,” Zorro says with contempt. “It’s your own fault. Don’t expect us to feel sorry for you.”

“Don’t worry,” Sam replies coolly, raising her head to meet his gaze. “I would never ask for anything so…decent from you.”

Reaching for a dazed Ally, Sam also makes a blind grab for the card under her shoe and palms it before standing. Pulling her friend after her, they stumble through the door as Ms. Cooper calls out behind them.

“Enjoy your final supper girls, and then get your stuff packed and tell your friends goodbye. You leave first thing in the morning!”

17 PIECES OF A PUZZLE

“This is crazy!” Ally says in disbelief. They make it as far as the bottom of the hill before she pulls at Sam until she stops. “Why didn’t you defend us? Do you have any idea how mad our parents are going to be? We’ll never hear the end of this!”

“Arguing with them wasn’t going to do us any good,” Sam answers. Her tone causes Ally to pause and study her friend more closely.

“Sam…” she begins, cautious. “I’ve seen that look on your face before. You’ve figured something out, haven’t you?” Her excitement growing, Ally glances around to make sure no one else is nearby. “Come on, spill it!”

In response, Sam turns her left hand over, revealing the business card cupped in her palm. “Ms. Cooper knocked this off her desk,” she explains. Able to examine it now, she confirms it’s the standard business info on the front, and reads it aloud.

“Wait,” Ally stops her. “Hollingsworth. Isn’t that Sandy’s last name?” Brows furrowed, she purses her lips. “Why would she have that?”

Sam flips the card over without answering, and discovers a handwritten message:

“It was a pleasure to meet with you and your brother. I hope to hear from you soon,” Sam reads, squinting at the scribbled text. “There’s a phone number, too. I’m guessing it’s her father’s personal cell.”

“But I still don’t get why you let her say all of those lies about us.” Ally states, her arms crossed over her chest.

“Because she already knows they’re lies, Ally,” Sam says. “I’ll explain what I mean, but I think we need to talk with Sandy first.”

They find the three other girls still at Cabin Navaho. Thankfully, Butterfingers isn’t there. Sam’s confidence might be growing, but she’s not sure she could convince their counselor yet.

Trying to collect her thoughts, Sam closes the screen door and then leans up against it. “You’re going to want to sit down for this,” she tells her friends, rubbing at her eyes. She can feel a headache coming on, but forces herself to talk. They’re all dismayed when they find out what happened, and start asking several questions all at once.

“Wait!” Sam stops them, putting her hands up to ward off the interrogation. “There’s more.” She tells them about the matching logo on the truck and about Zorro calling Ms. Cooper his aunt. Finally, she hands Sandy the business card. “This was on her desk.”

“This is my dad’s,” Sandy acknowledges. “And that’s his handwriting. But why do you think it’s so strange, Sam? I already told you that he was here. Ms. Cooper is the director, and remember, this place isn’t even for sale, so there wasn’t a real estate agent to show them around.”

“If it wasn’t for sale,” Becky asks, “then how did he find it?”

“Daddy is a pro at digging up large corporations that are failing, and then bailing them out. Most of the time, it’s mismanagement by the owners, so he’s able to turn a big profit, even though that’s not why he wants it. But I already told you that the board voted it down.”

“We’ve been assuming that Ms. Cooper was against selling the camp,” Sam mutters, pacing the floor. “But then why would your dad be looking forward to talking with her and Zorro’s father? That suggests that she was his contact. What if Ms. Cooper was actually the one who wanted to sell? What if she was mad and not talking to her three sisters because they voted her and her brother down?” Pausing, Sam looks up to find four stunned faces staring at her revelation.

“But why?” Becky wants to know. “Why would she want to sell it?”

“That, we don’t know,” Lexie answers, when Sam shrugs in response. “But it would explain a lot.”

“I’m still not really following you,” Ally admits. “It might explain why she’s in such a bad mood and not really caring that things aren’t being kept up. But what does it have to do with us?”

“Think about it,” Sam urges, turning to Ally. “Ms. Cooper said she had heard about us and ‘looked into’ me, so I’ll bet she read the article about us solving the Hollow Inn mystery that ran in our local paper. I could tell from the beginning that she had it in for me. She knew that we’d be quick to poke around where we shouldn’t.”

“What mystery?” Becky asks, wide-eyed. Sam and Ally quickly explain their excitement from a few weeks before that had ended with a run-in with a gun-wielding transient.

“That’s a cool story and all,” Sandy replies with her typical attitude. “But it still has nothing to do with this camp.”

“I think it does,” Sam counters. “We were put into a cabin with the most loyal and well-known camper here, and the daughter of the man trying to buy it. What better way to spread the rumors and stories of all of the mishaps? Ms. Cooper thought she had a couple of perfect scapegoats. And I don’t think it was a coincidence that Sandy’s kayak sank. That alone might be enough for her dad to manipulate the board into selling.”

“You could be right,” Sandy agrees, standing up slowly with a new sense of purpose. “I was even falling for it. Remember after I got back from kayaking? I already had a list of troubles to share with my father. If he were to find out that I could have drowned due to faulty equipment, he could threaten to shut this place down. He’d have them begging him to buy!” Sandy puts a hand over her mouth while turning to look sheepishly at Lexie. “I’m sorry.”

“It’s okay, Sandy,” Lexie mumbles, her normal energy drained. “This whole summer has been different, anyway. Things do need to change, but I just wish the camp could stay open, not get turned into a corporate retreat.”

“What can we do about it?” Becky pleads, looking at each of them.

“I can talk to my dad after he picks me up on Friday,” Sandy assures her. “I promise,” she continues, looking at Lexie. “I’ll explain everything to him. He’ll know what to do!”

Doing her best to smile, Lexie thanks Sandy and then goes back to writing in her notebook, where she’s copying all of their contact information down on separate sheets. “At least we’ll be able to talk to each other, no matter what happens with the camp,” she says, trying to stay positive.

“You guys still have all day tomorrow to have fun,” Ally adds. “Don’t worry about us. Sam and I have been in worse trouble.”

“Do you have to go to the isolation cabin?” Lexie wants to know. When they shake their heads no, her smile broadens. “It stinks that you have to leave in the morning, but tonight is one of the best nights of the week. Trust me!”

Encouraged by her friend’s enthusiasm, Sam begins to see the brighter side of things…but then she remembers that her mom will be coming for her tomorrow. In spite of what Ally said, Sam can’t think of another time that she was ever accused of doing such things. She only wishes they could prove their innocence.

18 ANSWERS IN THE DARK

Sam was hoping to see Cowboy at dinner. She didn’t know what she was going to say, but she wants him to know about her and Sam being sent home…and why. But he was nowhere to be seen. When she asked one of the food servers, they said he had to go into town to get some food. He’d be back either late that night or the next day.

Word of their expulsion traveled fast and they receive plenty of looks with whispered conversation. However, several girls come up to give Sam and Ally support. The young girl that Sam helped in the pool approaches to tell them how sorry she is and that she doesn’t think it’s fair they’re being sent home. As she walks away, Sam realizes why Ms. Cooper didn’t put them in the isolation cabin. She suspects the director wants to make a scene about it.

“Come on,” Lexie orders, as they clear their dirty dishes from the table. “Let’s go finish our barge!”

Happy to get away from all of the attention, their group escapes to the craft hut in the woods. Ally glues the stick on that she found that morning, and they all add some final touches.

“All done, except for the candle and the holder for it,” Lexie declares. “We won’t get that until tomorrow, though.”

“Can we go swimming now?” Becky asks, looking at everyone hopefully. “I want to show Sam and Ally what I learned.”

They all quickly agree that it’s a good idea, and spend the rest of their free time at the pool. With the sun shining down on all of the laughing, happy girls, Ally almost forgets that they have to leave.

Sam notices her best friend’s mood change, and sits down beside her at the edge of the pool. Dangling their feet in the water, they sit silently for a minute.

“Do you think our parents will ever let us do anything together again?” Sam finally asks, looking sideways at Ally.

“They’ll believe us,” Ally says with confidence. “If we have to, we can get ahold of Sandy and have her dad talk to them. They know we would never do those things,” she insists, kicking at the water.

Ally’s anger is contagious, and Sam finally allows herself to experience the emotions she’s been holding back.

“We might have one more chance to get some answers,” Sam says. Looking around to see who’s nearby, she lowers her voice. “Tonight. At the trailhead at midnight.”

“You mean the meeting between Zorro and Ranger?” Ally questions, her eyes sparkling.

Sam is surprised to find Ally so willing, knowing she is normally the levelheaded and cautious one

“Yeah. If we can find out for sure what they’re up to, it might give us some proof. If we can find Cowboy in the morning before we leave and talk with him about everything, I bet he could help.”

“Well…why not?” Ally shrugs. “What are they going to do if we get caught, send us home?” Laughing now, they hug each other just as the whistles blow, signaling the end of swim time.

***

Lexie was right. That night the bonfire is lit early so that the older campers can gather at dusk. Butterfingers announces that bedtime is extended to whenever the fire burns out. They start into several energetic campfire songs.

Breaking off later into smaller groups, they play various games before making s’mores and banana boats. Sam’s never had the latter, which involves stuffing a banana with chocolate and marshmallows, wrapping it in tinfoil, and tossing it next to the fire to cook. Someone even produces cans of whipped cream to top them off.

By eleven thirty, a few girls have gone to bed, but most are still scattered around the clearing. One counselor has a guitar and the crowd around her has been steadily growing.

When Lexie starts another ghost story, Sam sees their opportunity to leave. “I’m beat,” she says casually, yawning as she stands. “I think I’m going to head out.”

“Me too,” Ally adds, standing with her.

Lexie only pauses in her storytelling and gives them a little nod. Breathing a sigh of relief when no one asks to join them, she and Ally link arms and quickly walk away.

They had discussed the plan with their friends earlier, and it was decided that it would best for the two of them to go alone. Sam was adamant that no one else take a chance of getting into trouble. The other girls agree to cover for them, if it’s possible to do it without lying. Sam hopes to be back before they’re missed, so it shouldn’t be an issue.

As they reach the edge of the courtyard, the sound of a car door slamming makes them stop before they clear the trees. A loud engine roars to life and then Zorro’s truck passes within ten feet of them and they can clearly see Ms. Cooper in the passenger seat. As it disappears up the gravel road, Sam and Ally stare at each other.

“So she is part of whatever they’re doing up there!” Sam acknowledges. “Come on! If we hurry, we can still be there close to midnight. The foot trail has to be a more direct route.”

Grabbing Sam’s arm, Ally stares hard at her friend. “Are you sure about this?” she demands. “This might be more serious than we realize. Maybe we should wait and just tell our parents in the morning.” Now that Ally’s sharp edge of anger from earlier has worn off, the reasonable side of her is winning over.

“Tell them what?” Sam counters. “We have a lot of suspicions and some weird things have happened to us, but we don’t have any real explanations as to why. What if they think we’re trying to make excuses?”

Ally considers this for a minute. She knows that Sam would never push her too hard to do something she didn’t want to do. If she says she doesn’t want to go, then Sam won’t go either. But – “Okay,” she finally decides. “But let’s just see what it is they’ve got going on, and then come back. Right?”

“Right,” Sam confirms, anxious to get going.

“Come on then,” Ally urges. “We’d better hurry.”

Stopping briefly at the cabin for their flashlights, they take off up the trail at a jog.

Over half an hour later, Sam is just beginning to wonder if they somehow got lost, when she finally recognizes a small meadow. The woods seem otherworldly in the bright moonlight. The sounds and smells are so different from during the day.

On the far side of the meadow, Sam signals for Ally to turn her flashlight off, and then they creep as quietly as they can around the next bend. The open space that houses the horses comes into view, and as they expected, Zorro’s truck is already there. It’s only a few minutes past midnight though, so they’re hopeful that they made it in time.

“He’s late,” Ms. Cooper says loudly from the dark recesses of a nearby shed.

Ally slams into Sam’s back when she freezes at the sound, and both of them nearly fall to the forest floor. Kneeling down, they hold onto each other and wait to see if they were heard, but the conversation continues uninterrupted.

“What’s new?” Zorro answers. Pinecones crunch underfoot as he emerges from the shed and walks over to his truck, not even twenty feet away from where Sam and Ally are crouched behind a tree. “I don’t even know why you bothered to come,” he adds.

“I told you,” Ms. Cooper answers, obviously irritated. “I need to speak with both of you tonight. Are you sure we can trust Ranger not to talk to anyone?” she asks, her tone changing to one of concern.

“He’ll do what I tell him,” Zorro says darkly. At the sound of distant hoof beats, he turns on the truck’s headlights.

Ranger and the three horses left behind earlier soon come into view, each with metal barrels strapped to their backs.

“It’s about time,” Zorro barks, pushing away from the pickup. He starts yanking at the ropes and releasing the loads.

“I spent hours trying to find that stupid container,” Ranger whines.

“You didn’t find it?” Zorro yells. “How hard can it be?”

“They float when they’re empty, man,” Ranger complains. “We got to figure a new way to dump that stuff, ‘cause this ain’t working. And I think I need a mask or something, because it gave me a headache last time. I don’t like breathing it, man…it stinks.”

“None of that matters anymore,” Ms. Cooper announces. Ranger becomes noticeably agitated when he sees her for the first time.

“What are you talking about?” Zorro asks, pausing in his task.

“I’m talking about the risk outweighing the benefit,” the older woman scolds. “Now that I’ve got things set up with Mr. Hollingsworth, I can’t take any unnecessary chances. After he hears about the incident with his daughter and her cabin mates, I expect to receive another phone call. When I put Hollingsworth in front of the board to rant, combined with enrollment for the last summer session being at a record low, my sisters will have no choice but to listen to me and your father, Zorro.”

Sam and Ally look at each other, wide-eyed, their faces slightly illuminated by the moonlight filtering through the cedar boughs. You were right! Ally mouths silently, and Sam nods in understanding.

“Not having to pay to legally dump this stuff is saving us thousands of dollars a month!” Zorro counters, turning to face his aunt. “Besides, this is our property. It’s nobody else’s business what we do with it.”

“You know, you’re as smart as your father,” Ms. Cooper says sarcastically. “The toxins you’re dumping in the water are flowing downstream into a national forest! Mr. Hollingsworth is an intelligent businessman, and it wouldn’t take much for him to put it together, and then the deal would be off. Besides, those two snoopy girls are onto us…I just know it. They served their purpose, and I’m getting rid of them, but we need to have all evidence of this gone before the morning, just in case their parents believe them. Got it? All of it!”

Ranger starts whining again, and Sam motions to Ally to back away. They’ve heard enough, and she’s anxious to get back to camp before they’re missed. As they slowly begin their retreat, a familiar voice calls out from behind them!

Spinning around in alarm, Sam is relieved to find that it’s Butterfingers. “Thank goodness!” she cries, stumbling towards her. “We need to get back to camp and find Nurse Pine!” Sam figures that the other board member will be their most likely ally, since Cowboy hasn’t returned from town yet.

“Now why would I want to do that?” Butterfingers asks coyly. “Zorro!” she calls out, smirking at the two astonished girls. “I’ve got a present for you.”

19 THE TRUTH WON’T SET YOU FREE

“You two are either really brave, or just very stupid,” Zorro states, shaking his head. With two flashlights aimed at them, Sam and Ally have no choice but to step forward, with Butterfingers herding them from behind.

“I think it’s a combination of both,” Ms. Cooper observes, hands on her hips. “You should have let this go,” she cautions, her voice low and dangerous. “But you don’t know when it’s best to just mind your own business, do you? Well, you’re about to learn a big lesson.”

Not liking the sound of that, Sam latches on to the hand that Ally has clamped over her arm. They crowd against each other as the space between them and the three adults narrows.

“Good job, Babe,” Zorro says to Butterfingers.

Babe? Sam thinks, looking back and forth between the two. “Oh no,” she moans under her breath. The two of them are obviously a couple. “So it was you all along?” she asks, turning to Butterfingers. “You were the one sabotaging us?”

“You guys think you’re so smart,” the counselor sneers. “It was too easy.”

“But we thought you were our friend,” Ally pleads. “How can you be a part of this?”

A brief look of regret tugs at the counselor’s features, but she quickly pushes any feeling of remorse aside. “You have no idea what you’ve gotten into,” she counters, looking at each of them.

“And they aren’t going to,” Ms. Cooper warns. “Ranger!” she shouts, bending to pick up the ropes that Zorro just untied from the barrels. “Put each of them on a horse and tie them to it. Make sure the ropes are nice and tight.”

“Ah….” Ranger groans, clearly unhappy with the plan. “I didn’t sign on to be no kidnapper!”

“Don’t be ridiculous!” Ms. Cooper says to the cowering man. “You’re just going to take them out to the trail ride camp for the night. You’ll bring them back here in the morning and let them go. I’ll explain to their parents how they ran away because they were upset that they’d been expelled. By then, we’ll have everything cleaned up and anything related to this, out of my office. It will be strictly their word against all of ours.”

“You won’t get away with this!” Sam shouts, sounding much more courageous than she feels. Looking around in desperation, she weighs the possibility of being able to outrun their captors.

Stepping in close, Ms. Cooper crouches down to eye-level with Sam. Her green eyes look black in the dark, and her white teeth flash as she grins broadly. “Of course we will! You’re both known troublemakers, my dear, and everyone at camp will attest to the fact that you were upset today. No one would dare doubt us!”

Sam’s stomach is hurting again. She has a sinking feeling that Ms. Cooper could be right. Thinking about how the whole story would sound, they might end up in more trouble.

Sam is thankful when Cooper leans away from her, so she can start breathing again. But then the older woman turns and hands the rope out expectantly to Ranger. He hesitates, but eventually gives in and takes it. As he approaches them, Ally starts to cry.

“Please don’t,” she begs, as he starts pushing them towards the horses. “We won’t tell anyone, I promise!”

“Turn off the waterworks,” Zorro jeers cruelly. “It’s too late for that now. No one cares.”

Not seeing any other options, Sam watches silently as Ranger ties Ally’s hands to the saddle horn. Ally is still weeping, but Sam’s face has hardened. Having come to the conclusion that trying to outrun them all would be a stupid thing to do, there’s still no way that she’s letting them get away with this. Her odds will be much better once they’re alone with Ranger.

Doing her best to look fearful rather than angry, Sam climbs up into the saddle and doesn’t protest when he wraps the rope painfully around her wrists, placing a bandana under it to avoid leaving any marks. Zorro double-checks the bindings before giving his approval, but then adds one more rope, tying Sam’s right foot to the stirrup.

“For good measure,” he explains, winking at her.

Biting her tongue, Sam swallows down a smart remark and instead stares straight ahead. Laughing, Zorro goes back to where his aunt is standing, and starts loading the empty barrels into the back of his truck.

“Remember, Ranger,” Ms. Cooper says, as he gets onto his own horse. “Have them back here and released just after sunrise. I’ll be sending a search party out then, before their parents are due to arrive at 7:30. That way they’ll be ‘found’ and back at camp right around the same time. Then I want you to go back and get that barrel! Understand? I don’t want to see you again until you can tell me that it’s hidden somewhere that no one will find it.”

“What if someone sees me?” Ranger asks, understandably worried about his role in the scheme.

“I’m going to tell everyone that I’m sending you out to look tonight, as soon as the girls’ disappearance is discovered. It would make the most sense, since you know the trails so well and already have some horses stored up here. Cowboy would be the only one to question it, or demand to go with you. However, he isn’t here.”

Smiling now, Ranger nods in agreement, finally seeming at ease with the situation. “Okay…yeah. I see how this could all work out. Just after sunrise. We’ll see you later, then.”

With that, he kicks his horse forward and Sam and Ally’s mounts automatically follow. Once they’re around the first bend, Ally does her best to twist in the saddle and look at Sam. “What are we going to do?” she gasps, the fear in her eyes visible, even in the dark.

“I have a plan,” Sam whispers back. “But you aren’t going to like it.”

20 WHAT FRIENDS ARE FOR

Lexie knows something is up as soon as she sees Butterfingers and Ms. Cooper return to the bonfire together. Nudging first Sandy, and then Becky, she nods in their direction. It’s nearly one in the morning, and they’ve been anxiously waiting for the time to pass, afraid someone would notice that Sam and Ally were gone.

As the two camp employees make their way around the dwindling fire, the three girls instinctively huddle a bit closer. Only a handful of campers are still there, the rest having returned to their cabins to sleep. Lexie looks around at who’s left, hopeful that perhaps someone else is the director’s target.

“Girls, please come with us,” Ms. Cooper orders, slowing down just enough to make sure they all follow.

Groaning inwardly, Lexie scrambles to catch up, pulling Sandy and Becky along behind her. They look at each other fearfully, but know better than to say anything aloud.

Once they are gathered inside Cabin Navaho, Ms. Cooper tells them to take a seat and then eyes each of them sternly. “I have a very serious question for you,” she begins, “and I expect an honest answer.” When the girls indicate that they understand, she continues.

“It appears that Sam and Ally, being the rebellious children that they are, have decided to run away from Camp Whispering Pines.” She’s produced what’s supposed to be a note left behind by them.

The shocked reaction from the three is genuine, so there’s no chance of it being mistaken for anything else. “What I need to know from you,” she continues, “is what they said before they left this evening. Did you know they planned to do this?”

“No!” Lexie is quick to answer. Trying to read the message, all she can see are Sam and Ally’s names signed at the end. “Sam said they were tired and were coming back here. I figured that with everything that, umm….had happened, they didn’t feel much like hanging out with us.” Technically, it’s not a lie since Sam really did tell them that.

“Well, I say good riddance!” Sandy announces, drawing surprised looks from everyone. “Seriously,” she continues in response to their scrutiny. “They’ve been nothing but trouble. First, they almost got us attacked by raccoons, and then they plugged the toilets, forcing us to walk all the way to the bathroom at the pool. Sam couldn’t even follow one simple rule. She could have gotten us killed on the horseback ride. Just wait ‘till I tell my father about it!”

Lexie is almost buying the act, but then she sees the look of satisfaction on Ms. Cooper’s face and realizes that Sandy is a whole lot smarter than she seems.

“Well, they might be pains, but I hope that they’re okay. Are you looking for them?” Lexie directs the question to Butterfingers, who’s been very quiet.

Glancing first at the director, the counselor plops down on her bed, exhausted. “We’ve sent Ranger to go looking for them, but that’s it until morning. It’s too dangerous to do anything else in the dark.”

“You’re just going to leave them out there all night?” Becky asks in alarm, tears welling in her eyes. “What if they’re hurt?”

“Stop being so dramatic!” Ms. Cooper shouts much louder than the situation calls for. “They are the ones who chose to put themselves in this position. I’m sure they’re probably hiding somewhere, perfectly safe. I imagine we’ll see them in the morning when they get hungry.” Turning to go, she whispers something to Butterfingers and then slams the screen door behind her on her way out.

“Come on now, it’s time for you to go to bed.” The exhausted counselor doesn’t even get up, and kicks her shoes off before lying down. “I promise that we’ll look for them first thing if they aren’t back by morning.” Yawning, her eyes are already closed.

Looking at each other curiously, Lexie, Sandy, and Becky sit quietly for several long minutes, until the steady and rhythmic snoring proves that Butterfingers is asleep. Creeping carefully to the light switch, Lexie snaps it off and then crouches down in front of the two other girls.

“Something’s gone horribly wrong,” she whispers, eyes wide.

“We need to call for help,” Becky suggests. “There has to be a phone here somewhere.”

“There’s one in Ms. Cooper’s office,” Lexie confirms. “But you have to have a code to dial out. It’s an ancient system.”

“What about 911?” Becky presses. “You don’t need a code for that, do you?”

“I don’t know,” Lexie admits. “We could try, I guess. Wait!” she adds, remembering something. “There is a computer, and I know it has internet access, because I’ve seen it.”

“I could email my dad,” Sandy says with purpose. “He’d believe me.”

When Lexie and Becky look at her skeptically, Sandy lets out a big sigh of frustration. “I didn’t mean any of that stuff I said,” she insists. “And I already suspected Butterfingers.” When Sandy is met with questioning stares, she tries to explain. “Unlike you, I knew that I didn’t put the food in Sam and Ally’s bags. That only left one other person alone in the cabin that morning, after I left.”

The three of them look accusingly at the sleeping form of the teen who was supposed to be their leader.

“She was in on it all along!” Becky declares, wishing they had caught on sooner.

“Let’s go,” Lexie urges, sneaking through the door, careful not to make the floorboards creak. When they are all on the front porch, they wait to hear the telltale snoring before heading for the woods.

“What do you think they did to them?” Becky breaks the silence, voicing everyone’s fears. Stopping a safe distance off the trail, they gather together for support.

“I don’t think Ms. Cooper is stupid enough to actually hurt them,” Lexie reassures them. “That’s why she’s telling everyone they ran away. She must have caught them spying. I’ll bet Sam and Ally discovered something important, and Ms. Cooper is making them look bad so no one will believe them. But we can’t take any chances. They’re out there in the woods somewhere and we have to help!”

“I agree,” Sandy nods. “Think about it. If they really had run away, don’t you think they’d be calling the police and organizing a search party? No, they’re covering something up.”

As they try not to think about their friends alone out in the dark mountains, a slight breeze blows around them, stirring up dried pine needles. Tilting her head slightly, Lexie raises a hand and motions them all to listen. There! From high up in the pine trees, a sound similar to whispered voices drifts down and surrounds them, filling the night with ghostly conversation.

Turning her attention to the tree trunks near them, Lexie finds the plaque and points out that they’re standing under Mr. Pine’s tree. With a new sense of determination, they bravely find their way through the woods and to the back of the administration cabin.

“Here, take this file!” The familiar voice reaches them through an open window, and they automatically crouch down.

“What am I supposed to do with it?” Zorro asks his aunt. “I can’t take it to the office. My dad would kill me if he found out what we’ve been doing.” He doesn’t sound very happy.

“Well then, throw it away!” Ms. Cooper answers. “This has all gotten out of hand. I won’t risk it being found in our trash. I’d go throw it on the fire, but there are still several kids and counselors out there. I can’t afford to do anything suspicious right now.”

The conversation becomes muffled as the Ms. Cooper and Zorro move towards the front part of the office. The sound of a door opening and closing follows. After a couple of minutes, a truck starts up and pulls away.

The girls can barely make out the director as she walks towards her private cabin. Once she’s out of sight, Sandy sneaks around to the door, but finds it locked. Their only other option is an open window. After some debate, Lexie climbs onto Becky’s back and hauls herself through the opening. Sandy goes next with Lexie’s help, and finally the two of them lift Becky in.

Going straight for the phone, Becky is crestfallen when there’s no response to dialing 911, other than an odd beeping tone. “Looks like the computer is our only option,” she confirms.

Sandy is already behind the desk, pushing at keys to wake up the sleeping monitor. “It’s asking for a password!” she cries, unsure what to do.

“Try the guest log in,” Becky suggests, coming around to stand next to Sandy. Clicking some keys to take them back to the main screen, their faces glow blue as the monitor casts light into the dark room.

“Got it!” Sandy shouts, quickly slapping a hand over her mouth. She lowers her voice and works feverishly, logging into her email account and typing out a desperate letter to her dad. Outlining everything that’s happened, she explains that two of her friends are in grave danger and she needs his help. Begging him to come as soon as he gets the message, she closes by saying that it could all be because of him trying to buy the camp.

She asks Lexie and Becky to read the email before she sends it. “If my father feels that his actions might be responsible for someone else’s trouble, he’ll be sure to come,” Sandy explains.

Lexie and Becky cross their fingers as Sandy hits the send button, hoping it will be enough.

21 UNEXPECTED RESCUE

Sam and Ally have been riding in heavy silence for thirty minutes, since Ranger yelled at them to stop talking. Sam is trying to ignore the sounds of the woods, which feed her wild imagination with terrible thoughts. She figures they have another half hour to go before they reach the edge of the ravine, where she can put her plan into motion. She’ll need to figure out a way to tell Ally. Otherwise, it won’t work.

To Sam’s dismay, Ranger suddenly steers his horse away from the trail and into the trees, on a path that she can’t even see. “Where are we going?” she asks, alarmed.

“We have to give you kids a full day of entertainment when we’re on the trail ride, so we take the scenic route. This is a shortcut and will get us to the camp in less than half the time. Don’t worry,” he continues, misplacing her concern. “Your horses know where they’re going. They’ll follow me.”

Her plot to escape now ruined by the change in direction, Sam looks around with growing fear, not knowing where they are.

“Why are you doing this?” Ally surprises Sam with her bold question. “You could go to jail for a long time!”

“I’m just doing what I’m told!” Ranger protests. “Zorro won’t let nothing bad happen. This is all just a big mistake. You’ll see. Now stop talking!”

Not wanting to push her luck, Ally wisely follows his order and they fall back into an awkward silence. But Sam can tell her friend’s question rattled him and wonders if they can talk their way out of the predicament once they get to the camp.

For the next twenty minutes, they plod along at a brisk pace. Eventually, Ranger starts to pull ahead and Sam takes the opportunity to come up alongside Ally.

“So?” Ally asks hopefully. “Should we make a run for it, or something?”

“Nah,” Sam whispers, shaking her head. “We wouldn’t get far with our hands tied up. I’ve been pulling as hard as I can at these ropes and they won’t budge. He’ll catch right up to us. My idea was to-” Sam breaks off when she hears frantic neighing up ahead.

Straining to see in the murky darkness, she can just make out stirrups flashing in the moonlight as Ranger’s horse begins to buck wildly. Confused, Sam looks over at Ally, who is starting to struggle with her own horse.

Suddenly another sound rises above the squeals of the mare, the same raspy breathing they’d heard the other day near the craft hut. But now, it’s much louder and there is a new guttural roar mixed in that’s making the hairs rise on the back of Sam’s neck.

“What is that?” Ally shouts in terror, as her horse sidesteps and slams into Sam’s leg, making her wince in pain.

“Get away!” Ranger yells, and then grunts as he’s thrown from his horse and hits the ground hard. The out-of-control horse stampedes back down the trail, its eyes rolling as it careens in between Sam and Ally.

The last thing Sam sees is a dark form stepping out from behind a tree close to Ranger. Then her own horse rears up and takes off in a panic. She holds on for dear life, but her horse swerves and kicks, trying to lighten its load. Her saddle slips to the side, but the rope tying her foot into the stirrup keeps her from being unseated.

The night becomes a blur as trees rush past, branches clawing at her body and face. Sam can hear Ally screaming from behind her as her own horse charges blindly. She finally risks turning to look back.

Sam watches in horror as Ally flails in desperation, her body completely out of the saddle, but arms still tethered to the saddle horn. “Stop!” she wails, her feet dragging on the ground. “Stop the horses, Sam!”

For several minutes, Sam fights to bring her mount under control. His neck is lathered in sweat, his side heaving, but eventually the horse slows. Using her knees, and pulling at his mane the best she can to steer him, she circles back to where Ally managed to stop and is now leaning against the saddle.

“Are you okay?” Sam demands.

“I don’t know,” Ally breathes, trying to hold back tears. “I think I sprained my wrist. I can’t believe these stupid ropes are still tight!”

“Can you get back on the horse? We need to get out of here.” Jumping at a branch cracking close by, Sam edges closer. “Now.”

“Maybe.” Ally places her foot in the stirrup and pulls herself up, wincing in pain. Settling into the saddle, she takes a deep breath and looks around nervously. “Which way do we go?”

Good question, Sam thinks, unsure of where they are. Her sense of direction is totally turned around, and there’s no sign of any kind of trail. “I think the best thing is to let the horses lead us. They’re more likely to find their way back than we are.”

“You’re probably right,” Ally agrees. “Do you think whatever that was is still…following us?”

“I doubt it. The horses would still be freaking out.”

Sam’s horse takes the lead and the two friends keep up a nervous banter. They seem to wander endlessly in the mist-shrouded mountains.

“This might actually have been the best thing that could have happened,” Sam observes, trying to keep the silence at bay. “It was better than my plan, anyway”

“Seriously?” Ally asks. She is slumped forward, leaning her chin on her fists, fighting exhaustion. “I can’t imagine what you had in mind, then.”

“It was risky,” Sam admits. “I was going to try to charge my horse at Ranger as we were passing the spot where the deer trail goes down the ravine. I figure they’ve been using it to dump those barrels, so his horse would automatically go down if pushed in that direction. I thought it might be enough distraction for us to get away.”

Staring at Sam for a full minute, Ally finally shakes her head in disbelief. “I hope that being caught in helpless situations doesn’t become a habit, because we’re not very good at getting out of them on our own.”

Sam laughs in agreement, but her smile fades quickly as she looks around at the unfamiliar woods. They are far from being out of their predicament. She has no idea where they are, and the first faint rays of morning light are already beginning to appear.

22 REVELATIONS

“Sam! Ally! Can you hear me?” The voice is distant, but recognizable.

“Cowboy!” both Sam and Ally call out together. It’s late morning, and they were beginning to lose hope of ever finding their way back.

“We’re over here!” Sam adds, searching the trees for the older man. To her surprise, not only Cowboy comes into view, but also two other camp employees and a deputy sheriff!

Sam can’t imagine how she and Ally must look: dirty, cold, tired, and covered with scratches and bruises. In addition, they’re still tied to their horses. Earlier, Sam had succeeded in breaking off a small stick in her mouth, while passing under a low hanging branch. With it, she’d tried prodding at the fibers of the rope cutting into her wrists, attempting to loosen it. But her sideways fall in the saddle actually caused the knots to tighten. Her fingers are now numb. Ranger might not be that smart, but he sure can make a good knot, she thinks to herself in a daze, as their rescuers get closer.

“Are you tied to that saddle horn?” Cowboy asks in disbelief, racing forward. His expression of concern clouds with anger as he takes hold of the reins and pulls out a pocketknife to free her.

Once Sam and Ally explain the confrontation from the night before, the sheriff immediately radios dispatch and calls for backup. This is suddenly much more serious than some kids missing in the woods.

Cowboy describes the scene from earlier that morning. Sandy’s dad arrived shortly after Sam and Ally’s mothers. Ms. Cooper had just finished telling them that the girls had run away, when Mr. Hollingsworth read his disturbing email out loud.

A heated discussion followed as everyone weighed in with opinions. In the end, the authorities were called and a search party was organized. The sheriff’s department determined that they couldn’t take any other action until the girls were found and their side of the story heard. The police seemed inclined to believe Ms. Cooper at first, but that changed quickly when the officer saw the two supposed ‘trouble makers’ tied to their horses, exhausted.

Now that Sam has a chance to explain, she produces the label from her back pocket as evidence that Zorro’s company is illegally dumping material. She describes the conversation the girls overheard.

The officer makes a second radio call, asking another officer to search the creek for the missing barrel. The authorities are not as quick to believe the Bigfoot encounter, but they add looking for Ranger to their list.

Over an hour later, the weary group finally arrives back at Camp Whispering Pines. They step into the courtyard just in time to see the police leading Ms. Cooper and Zorro towards the administration office. Both of them are handcuffed!

“That camp counselor broke down and confessed to everything when she heard you found them tied to the horses,” one of the officers tells the sheriff. “It backs up those other girls’ stories, so we’ve taken these two into custody for kidnapping.”

“I have a feeling there are going to be several more charges added to that,” the sheriff replies, looking accusingly at the conspirators.

“Kidnapping!” Sam turns to see Nurse Pine emerge from her first aid station, looking pale and frightened. “Katie,” she moans, approaching Ms. Cooper. “What have you done?”

“Yes, please tell us. We’d all like to know what it is that you’ve done,” a new voice demands.

Sam assumes correctly that this statement comes from Sandy’s father, an imposing, middle-aged man who has just reached the bottom steps of the main lodge. Gathered behind him are the rest of the Cabin Navaho campers. Sam quickly spots two other familiar faces.

“Mom!” Ally shouts, running towards the group.

Sam doesn’t know where Ally has found the strength to run. A brisk walk is all that Sam’s able to muster. Her mom meets her halfway and gathers her up in a strong embrace.

“I’m sorry, Mom,” she manages to get out, before being overcome with emotion.

“It’s okay, Samantha,” she sooths. “We know the truth.”

“The truth?” Nurse Pine echoes. Continuing to block the way to the office, she confronts her sister. “Then what those kids said this morning was true?” She had been a part of the early meeting, and like the police, it had been much more…pleasant to believe her sister.

“Oh stop acting so shocked!” Ms. Cooper counters, somehow still managing to be intimidating, even though she’s in cuffs.

“Of course, I know that you’ve wanted to sell the camp since Father passed away, but this?” Nurse Pine implores, spreading her hands wide. “How could you do it?”

“It’s easy for you to stand there and judge me, but you’re only here for a couple of weeks a year! I’m trapped here year-round, Anne. I have been for most of my life! This place is sucking our father’s estate dry. But even when Mr. Hollingsworth offered us a way out, you wouldn’t take it! So I had to find a way to change your mind, and maybe give Sandy’s father some advantage to cutting a deal. You left me no choice!”

“It isn’t your choice to make,” Anne answers sadly. “This is what Dad wanted, Katie. This is his legacy. Those millions of dollars were earned by him. As his children, it’s our legacy to carry out his final wishes.”

“Well, I don’t want it!” Katie bellows, finally starting to show some emotion. Sam finds it weird to know Ms. Cooper’s first name. It somehow makes her seem more human.

“When Mom and Dad got this place, I was just thirteen years old.” Katie explains. “I was forced to come here as a camper, then as a counselor and finally as an administrator. But I never asked for this! Didn’t you ever wonder why I took Mother’s maiden name after she died? Because I don’t want to be a Pine.

“When Dad had his heart attack, I thought I could finally move on with my life. But he made sure that could never happen, didn’t he?” Ms. Cooper erupts into a weird, almost hysterical laugh, and staggers towards her sister. “All that money, but we aren’t allowed to touch it!”

“Katie, I won’t stand here and tolerate you talking poorly of Mr. Pine,” Cowboy interrupts. “I pretty much helped raise you, so you had better listen up. You were given the same opportunities as your brother and sisters. You had an easy life. Mr. Pine tried to do right by you and pay for your education. But, unlike your siblings, you decided that college wasn’t for you. You thought living off your parents until you got your inheritance was the easier road. Just because you didn’t get your way, it’s no excuse for all of this craziness.”

“The irony is that her plan is likely going to succeed,” Anne interjects. “There’s no way the camp is going to survive this fiasco, and the fines that will be imposed by the state for the illegal dumping will likely tie the estate up in court for years.”

“Oh, but you can’t shut the camp down!” Sam cries, stepping away from her mom. “Mr. Pine was right about this place. We need it,” she continues, turning to face Cowboy and Mr. Hollingsworth. “Where else can girls like Lexie go, who just need a safe retreat for a while? Or kids like Becky, who would never suspect how brave and strong they really are without their friends to tell them? Or Sandy, where this camp is probably the only place that girls her age can see her for who she really is? Or someone like me,” she pushes, looking now at Ms. Cooper. “Who came to realize over the past week just how much I have to learn about myself. That sometimes I can’t do everything on my own.”

Sam’s friends gather around her as she speaks, confirming her statements and lending their support.

“Maybe there’s another option,” Sandy’s dad replies, studying the group of girls. “I’m willing to let my previous offer stand,” he announces, speaking now to Nurse Pine. “Only there would be a new clause written into it, one that would stipulate that the property remain a camp for girls, overseen by… err…Cowboy.”

“Oh Daddy, really?” Sandy shouts, throwing her arms around her dad. “But what about your company retreat?”

“This is a huge piece of property,” he says, holding her out at arm’s length. “I have no doubt there’s plenty of space for our own lodge on it. Except, it wouldn’t be for my company…it’d be for our family. All this has made me realize the importance of the time we spend together, and we need more of it.” Pulling her in close, Sandy hugs him back happily.

“Well, sir, I’d be honored,” Cowboy replies. “Do you think the rest of the board would go for it?” he asks Nurse Pine.

“I don’t think they’re going to have any other option now,” she answers. “And the offer is very generous of you, Mr. Hollingsworth. Thank you.”

As the police begin to escort a very disgruntled Ms. Cooper and Zorro to the office again, Sam thinks of something and hurries to catch up to them. Ally scrambles after her, unsure of what her friend is up to.

“Zorro!” Sam calls, walking alongside him. Turning his head, he glares at her.

“What do you want?” he demands. “I don’t feel much like talking.”

“Your saddle bags,” she says matter-of-factly.

“Huh?” he asks, confused. “What about them?”

“One of them has a hole in it. How’d you get it?” she digs.

Staring at her silently for a moment, he shrugs in bewilderment. “Okay...I’ll play. I got it caught up on a barbed wire fence and tore it a few years ago. Why do you wanna know?”

“Because we thought we saw you in the woods by the craft hut a few days ago…making some odd sounds.”

Throwing his head back, he laughs loudly. “Sweetheart, I might be a lot of things, but a Bigfoot impersonator isn’t one of them.”

Sam and Ally hang back as Zorro, Ms. Cooper and the officers climb the steps of the administration building and disappear inside. Zorro’s laughter still echoes. Feeling numb, Sam turns slowly towards Ally and they look at each other in stunned silence.

23 BARGES

The rest of the afternoon goes by in a blur as the police conduct interviews with those involved. The investigation is kept isolated to the administration office. Since there isn’t a present danger, the camp activities are allowed to continue.

Just before dinner, the officers assigned to searching the creek return with the missing barrel, as well as a very upset Ranger. He’d been found trying to carry the container out of the ravine. He’d tried running from them, but didn’t make it far. His behavior, combined with the dying trees and fish, will be enough to launch a full investigation into the poisoning of the creek. When questioned about what happened in the woods, Ranger admitted there was something unusual, but refused to talk about it.

The mood at Cabin Navaho’s table is a mix of relief and apprehension as the dinner dishes are cleared. When Sam found out what the rest of the girls had done to get help, she was speechless. Their friendship even stronger now, she knows they’ll always remember this summer.

Sam, Ally, and Sandy are leaving that evening with their parents, so Lexie and Becky have been moved into another cabin for the last night. Sam hates to tell them goodbye, even though they’ve all promised to keep in touch.

“Girls.” Looking up at the sheriff who’s approached their table, Sam hopes he doesn’t want them to tell their story again, or write anything down. “We’ve concluded everything that needs to be done this evening,” he tells them. “You’re all free to go. Thank you for being so helpful throughout all of this.” Tipping his hat, he leaves them all staring uncertainly at each other.

“We should go collect your things,” Sam’s mom suggests, “before it gets too late.”

As they all head for the exit, Nurse Pine greets them on her way in. “Oh good, you’re still here!” she exclaims, clapping her hands together. “I know this has already been an incredibly long day, but I was hoping you’d join us for the barge ceremony before you leave. It’s a long-standing tradition here at Whispering Pines and I think you’d enjoy it.”

Looking hopefully at their parents, Sam, Ally, and Sandy are all relieved when they quickly agree to it.

“Wait here!” Lexie calls to them as she and Becky run outside. They’re soon back with a completed barge, the candleholder, and the slips of paper with their wishes.

“We finished it this morning, while we were waiting for you,” Becky explains, her pride in the final product evident. The barge is impressive; everything fits perfectly on the huge piece of bark that Lexie salvaged.

Dusk is just starting to settle over the Cascade Mountains. The campers walk the trail to the lake, talking with excited anticipation of the ceremony to come. They’re greeted by water smooth as glass, the rocks on the beach still warm from the late afternoon sun.

An owl calls out hauntingly from the opposite shore as they gather along the water’s edge. One of the counselors gets into a kayak and paddles out, holding a long pool net, ready to scoop up the barges as they sink.

One girl from each cabin steps forward to place their barge on the lake. Cabin Navaho’s campers unanimously chose Lexie to launch theirs. Standing in waist-deep water, her face glows as a lit candle is passed down from one camper to the next, representing the unity of the camp.

The barges slowly start to float away, and Nurse Pine leads them all in one final camp song about hopes, dreams, and lasting friendship. Linking arms, they form a chain that can’t be broken.

Most of the boats sink almost immediately, the creators laughing good-naturedly when the lights are snuffed out. It becomes a game to see if one of them can swim to retrieve the wreckage before the counselor in the kayak can scoop it up.

As they begin the third round of the song, only two barges remain, and then finally…Cabin Navaho claims victory when theirs is the lone flame flickering on the darkening waters.

Laughing and clapping, the five friends face each other, and Sam can’t think of a better way to end this adventure. As frustrating and terrifying as it was, she wouldn’t trade any of it for the amazing friends she made.

“This means that our wishes will come true!” Lexie says, smiling broadly.

“Mine already has!” Sandy answers, looking over at her dad. “It’s funny, too, that I’ll probably end up spending the time I wished for with my family right here!”

“Well, you all proved to me that I didn’t need my wish answered,” Becky admits. When they eye her questioningly, she shrugs. “I wished to be brave…but I found out that I already am, and I can swim!”

“You didn’t need us to figure that out!” Ally assures her, putting an arm around her shoulders. “And you inspired my wish, Becky.” When the smaller girl looks at Ally in surprise, she laughs lightly. “Sometimes, I judge people too quickly. I know I’ve probably missed out on some great friends because of it. You reminded me that I need to try harder, because you totally blew away my first impression.”

“I’m not coming back to camp for the next session,” Lexie says abruptly. “I mean…even if they get things worked out, I still won’t go.”

“Why not?” Sam asks. She knows how much the camp has come to mean to Lexie, and hopes that she’ll be okay.

“My parents have been trying to get me to go on a camping trip with them,” she answers softly. “Maybe it’s time…to, you know, give them a chance. How about you, Sam?” she adds quickly, not wanting to give anyone an opportunity to make a big deal out of her revelation. “What did you wish for?”

Sam watches their barge as it continues to bob on the lake, the hypnotic chant of the camp song swelling around them. Turning back to Lexie, a huge grin spreads across her face and she reaches for Ally’s hand.

“I wished for more mysteries, of course!”

THE END

I hope that you enjoyed, The Secret of Camp Whispering Pines. Please take a moment to leave a review at:

http://www.amazon.com/dp/B00SY3CPEY

Want to be notified when Tara releases a new novel? Sign up now for her newsletter!  eepurl.com/bzdHA5

Be sure to look for Sam and Ally in other exciting adventures in The Samantha Wolf Mysteries!

ABOUT THE AUTHOR

Author Tara Ellis lives in a small town in beautiful Washington State, in the Pacific Northwest. She enjoys the quiet lifestyle with her husband, two teenage kids, and several dogs. Tara was a firefighter/EMT, and worked in the medical field for many years. She now teaches CPR, and concentrates on family, photography, and writing middle grade and young adult novels.

Visit her author page on Amazon to find all of her books!

http://www.amazon.com/author/taraellis

The Beach House Mystery

THE BEACH HOUSE MYSTERY

Samantha Wolf Mysteries

#3

TARA ELLIS

ISBN-13: 978-1515141877

ISBN-10: 151514187X

The Beach House Mystery

Copyright © 1st Edition July 2015 Tara Ellis

2nd Edition November 2015

Cover art design Copyright © Melchelle Designs
http://melchelle.designs.com/

Models: Breanna Dahl, Janae Dahl

Photographer: Tara Ellis Photography

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted by any means without the written permission of the author.

This is a work of fiction.  Names, Characters, places and incidents either are the product of the author’s imagination or are used fictitiously, and any resemblance to actual persons, living or dead, business establishments, events or locals is entirely coincidental.

When I first sat down to brainstorm the next adventure for Sam and Ally; all I knew was that it would happen during the last part of their summer break. Like so many other authors, I once again drew from some of my own experiences to conjure up a story. The coast of Washington State and Oregon hold some very special memories for me. As a child, my family would often travel there over the summer, and as always, my best friend Lisa would come along! We might not have dug up quite the same level of mysteries that Sam and Ally manage, but we always had fun trying. Once I decided on the setting, it was a fun challenge to imagine all of the things that would make this a true seafaring tale! I hope that you enjoy this installment as much I have while writing it.

A special thanks (as always!) to my ever-faithful BETA readers: Lisa Hansen, Cindy Pierce, and my biggest fan and mom, Linda Morris!!

Samantha Wolf Mysteries

1. The Mystery of Hollow Inn
2. The Secret of Camp Whispering Pines
3. The Beach House Mystery

4. The Heiress of Covington Ranch (coming soon!)

Find these and Tara’s other titles on her author page at Amazon!

http://www.amazon.com/author/taraellis

CONTENTS

Samantha Wolf Mysteries

CONTENTS

1. A LATE SUMMER SURPRISE

2. FINDING THE COVE

3. THE BEACH HOUSE

4. SAND ON YOUR FEET & WIND IN YOUR HAIR

5. ODD NEIGHBORS

6. THE SECRETS OF WOOD COVE

7. BROTHERS!

8. EXPLORING THE MARINA

9. A CHANCE ENCOUNTER

10. TRAIL OF CONFUSION

11. A DARING RESCUE!

12. COMPARING NOTES

13. MOVING SHADOWS

14. CLUES AND ACCUSATIONS

15. MAYBE BROTHERS AREN’T SO BAD AFTER ALL

16. HERE BE DRAGONS

17. CAPTAIN BROWN

18. NO TURNING BACK NOW

19. DEAD MAN’S POINT

20. THE TREASURE

21. GOT A LADDER?

22. PIRATES AND A SEA MONSTER

23. A NEW TALE TO TELL

1 A LATE SUMMER SURPRISE

Sam would have never guessed what her next adventure was going to be, even if given the chance to dream one up. Sitting at the dinner table with her two-year-old twin sisters to one side, and her older fourteen-year-old brother on the other, she’s completely unsuspecting of the grin her father has on his face when he sits down.

Her mom passes the roast to him without comment, but Sam notices the look that they exchange. Pausing with the fork halfway to her mouth, she sets it back on the plate and crosses her arms.

“Okay, what’s up?” she asks cautiously, raising her eyebrows when her dad tries to act innocent.

“Why do you ask?” he says coyly, while making a mountain out of his mashed potatoes.

“Come on, Dad,” Sam insists. “You know you’re no good at lying. I can see right through you!”

Curious now, her brother Hunter breaks away from devouring everything on his plate. Narrowing his eyes, he stares first at his dad, and then their mom. Looking approvingly at Sam, he is apparently impressed with her observation skills. “Definitely hiding something,” he mumbles, nodding vigorously, his mouth still full of food.

Butterflies suddenly come to life in Sam’s stomach as her hopes swell over whatever the obvious surprise is. She’s been begging for a horse of her own for years, so that’s her first thought. The old, empty barn in the far corner of their three-acre property is the perfect spot for one. The money and time that her parents insist are lacking is the only hang-up.

The fluttering settles almost as fast as it began though, when Sam quickly realizes how unlikely it is. Her mom and dad were talking last night about how tight money is again this month. Sam also recently had her twelfth birthday, a few months ago, so any chance of a horse is probably a good year away still. But what could it be?

“Don’t talk with your mouth full, Hunter,” their mom scolds. “You’re going to choke one of these days.”

“Classic distraction tactic,” Hunter counters, still chewing.

Grinning now, Kathy Wolf looks to her husband and gives him an obvious wink. “They’re onto us, Ethan,” she whispers loudly.

“Nothing gets past you, Samantha,” Ethan laughs, pushing his full plate to the side and slapping the table with his palms. “I do have an announcement!”

Ignoring the use of her formal name, Sam leans forward eagerly. Her dad doesn’t usually put on this kind of a show. It must be good.

“You know that I was talking about how my boss, Mr. Stiles, was shopping around for a new boat?” Sam and Hunter both nod, while the twins paint their highchairs with gravy.

“Well, he found one, but it needs a lot of work. It’s in dry dock in a small town out on the Olympic Peninsula, and he wants me to oversee the job.”

Sam’s smile wavers as her dad reveals the big news. She doesn’t really see how this is supposed to be exciting. He works as a commercial fisherman for several months out of the year up in Alaska, and often does maintenance work for his boss in the off months. Mr. Stiles has several boats, so he has men fishing for him almost year-round. Her dad goes after halibut, and runs a boat from August through November. Since it’s now late July, money’s getting tight.

So he’s going to be in charge of some guys fixing an old boat, Sam thinks to herself. I guess that means we don’t have to worry anymore about money this month. That’s great, of course, but it still doesn’t explain why her parents are acting this way.

“That’s good news, Dad,” Hunter offers. “But what does it have to do with us?”

Sam glances at her brother, relieved that she’s not the only one confused, even though he dedicates most of his free time to finding new and creative ways to drive her crazy.

“Because Mr. Stiles has offered your dad the use of his vacation cabin on the beach, while he’s there in Wood’s Cove!” Kathy interjects, clapping her hands. The twins pick up on their mom’s excitement and begin clapping their hands too, squealing in delight.

Shushing the two little girls, Ethan tries to explain. “The cabin has four bedrooms, and is located right on the beach in the cove. He’s given me permission to use it for as long as I’m there, and I can bring whoever I want.”

“The town, Wood’s Cove,” Sam’s mom continues, “is a neat little tourist spot. They have all sorts of activities on the private beach. I think you kids would just love it!”

“Four bedrooms?” Sam questions, her hopes rising. The fluttering has returned, as she realizes the potential for something great, after all.

“Yes,” Ethan confirms. “Plenty of room for all of us…plus you and Hunter can each bring a friend.”

Jumping up from her chair, Sam almost knocks it over in her excitement. Everyone already knows she’ll bring her best friend, Ally. The two have been inseparable for years. They’ve already solved two mysteries this summer, although both could have ended badly. Fortunately, no one was hurt, but her parents have kept a very tight leash on her for the past few weeks, as a result.

“We figure the best way to keep an eye on you and Ally is to have you with us,” Kathy states while looking closely at her daughter. The message is clear.

Sitting back down slowly, Sam tries to contain her emotions. Her parents had thought that she and Ally would stay out of trouble at summer camp, but trouble seems to have a way of finding them. Although nothing that happened on their other adventures was really their fault, they’ve earned a reputation. Sam knows that if her parents were able to see the escapades she was already dreaming up for the beach…they might just change their minds.

“Oh, I know, Mom!” she agrees. “I’m sure we’ll spend most of our time on the beach by the house, and of course we’ll help watch the twins!”

Sam watches her mother squint her eyes suspiciously and study her. While Sam’s tall for her age, she’s not too slim, but rather sturdy. Her long brown hair is pulled back out of the way, as usual. A nice row of freckles, brought out by the summer sun, dance up and down as she crinkles her nose at her mother. “What?” she asks, innocently.

“You know what,” Hunter interrupts. “You’re totally going to get into trouble somehow. Probably get us all arrested, and make dad lose his job.”

Mustering up the dirtiest look she can, Sam crosses her arms and bites her bottom lip in response. She knows better than to get into an argument with him.

“That’s enough,” Ethan reprimands, effectively ending the confrontation. “I think even Sam would have a hard time finding mischief at Wood’s Cove,” he adds good-naturedly. Turning his attention to Hunter, he asks, “Are you going to ask Jeff to come?”

Distracted by the question, Hunter turns from Sam to his father. “Nah…he’s still in New York with his parents, at his sister’s wedding. They won’t be back for more than a week. When are we going?”

“Two days. We leave early Monday morning,” Ethan says, eying his son closely. He knows that Jeff is his only close friend anymore.

“Why don’t you ask John?”

“Humph!” Hunter snorts, rolling his eyes for extra emphasis. “Are you kidding, Dad? I’m sure he’s got football practice, or numerous dates lined up.”

Kathy’s brows furrow at her son’s sarcasm, but she refrains from commenting on it. John is Ally’s older brother, and it’s a touchy subject.

Sam briefly considers blurting out a smart comeback that floats through her head, but holds back. Hunter might not be that nice to her, but they used to be very close when they were younger. They’re only two years apart, and Sam can still remember following him around everywhere, copying everything he did, until he wouldn’t tolerate it. That occurred when Hunter started middle school, which Sam is about to do this school year. She kind of understands now how much pressure he was feeling to fit in. It was then that he and John drifted apart, too, because John started high school. He’s still a nice guy and all, but he’s got a different schedule, friends, and sports.

It was a year of change, with her mom having the twins and quitting her job as a teacher to stay home. That in turn caused the money issues, but it never really seemed to put much of a damper on things. They always get by somehow.

Hunter appears to be rethinking his dad’s suggestion, running both of his hands through his thick, dark hair in a gesture that Sam has come to recognize as one that he makes when deep in thought. They both inherited their father’s dark features, but Sam scored on the height gene, while Hunter seems destined to dwell on the short end of the spectrum with his mother. The twins sport the same blonde, naturally curly hair as their mom.

“I guess it might not hurt to ask,” Hunter finally agrees before diving back into his food. This surprises Sam.

“Great!” Kathy says happily, while trying to mop up the gravy from the high chairs before it spills onto the floor. “I’ll call over and talk with their mom tonight. I know that she’ll expect the invitation to come from us, as parents. They’re a bit more formal that way.”

Her appetite gone, replaced with a sense of anticipation, Sam tries to picture the beach house and what the cove might look like. The small town they live in is located in the northwestern part of Washington State, right next to the ocean. But the area south of them, out on the majestic, rain-forested Olympic Peninsula, is much different than home. Picturing craggy cliffs, mysterious woods and sunken treasure, Sam knows she isn’t going to sleep much until Monday.

2 FINDING THE COVE

The red van pulls away from Sam’s house right on schedule, early Monday morning. Ordered to sit in the dreaded space located at the back of the van, in between the twin’s car seats, Sam is doing her best to remain optimistic.

Looking at the back of Ally’s head, covered in vibrant red hair, she focuses on the destination, rather than the journey. Their older brothers are seated to either side of her best friend, and based on the locker-room smell that is already starting to permeate the vehicle, Sam decides that maybe she didn’t get the worst spot.

Twisting around on the bench seat, as if reading her mind, Ally peers over the headrest and squints at Sam. “My eyes are burning,” she gasps, making guppy motions with her lips. “Help me!”

Laughing now, her torment from just moments ago already forgotten, Sam scoots as far forward as her seatbelt will allow. “I’ve got one word of advice for you guys,” she says to John and Hunter, who are now lifting their arms over Ally’s ducked head. “Deodorant.”

“Where’s the fun in that?” Hunter responds, but lowers his arm when it appears that Ally might actually be gagging. Ally’s brother has no pity though. John continues to keep his arm draped across the back of the seat, smiling at Hunter in camaraderie.  With his blonde hair and tall stature, you would never guess that he and Ally were siblings, if it weren’t for the same intense, blue eyes.

It’s good to see them getting along so well, Sam thinks to herself, even if it’s at the expense of her friend’s stomach. Both she and Hunter had been surprised when John called Saturday night. Their mom had just gotten off the phone with Ally’s parents, explaining the trip. Sam had assumed it was her best friend phoning to talk about it.

Turns out that John doesn’t have football this week. To Hunter’s astonishment, he accepts the invitation. Although her brother doesn’t say much about it, Sam knows that it means a lot to him. He’s starting high school this year, and having his old friend to hang out with will be a huge relief.

Doing her best to steady her stomach, Ally holds her breath and elbows John in the ribs, causing her brother to lower his arm. Smiling at his grimace, she refuses to let anything spoil her mood, and happily suggests that they play a game.

The four of them spend the next two hours finding various types of cars, license plates, words on street signs and animals in pastures. It’s been quite some time since they’ve all been together like this, but they fall back into their old habits as if it were just yesterday.

As the van pulls off the main interstate, and onto the highway that will take them into the Olympic Mountains, Sam pauses in their banter to study the rising peaks. Although she’s lived near them all her life, she really didn’t know much of the history until studying about it last year in school. She actually wrote a paper called, ‘The Other Mountains in Washington State,’ because most people thought that the Cascades were the only noteworthy range.

The Olympics were one of the last wilderness areas in America to be explored, and the area wasn’t mapped until nearly 1900. It’s basically a big arm of land that sticks out into Puget Sound, with the Pacific Ocean to the west. Its northern point is the farthest in the states. The massive rainforests cover about half of it, and there are tons of state and federal parks that are filled with natural lakes and rivers, teaming with fish. They’ve been camping there a few times, but this will be the first trip that involves staying on the beach.

Tilting her head, Sam thinks back over the various family vacations and other gatherings they’ve been to. Nope. Never stayed in any sort of beach house before.

“Come on, Ginger. It’s your turn!”

“I’ve told you before not to call me that!” Ally says loudly, doing her best to give Hunter a dirty look. He has his numerous things to tease the two girls about, and Ally’s bright hair is his favorite.

“Shh!” Sam cautions, looking fearfully at the two sleeping twins. Even though their nap guarantees they’ll be running around all crazy after they get to the beach house, she doesn’t care. The silence in the back of the van for the past hour has been worth it.

“Look down there, kids!” Ethan calls out, unaware of the need to whisper. “You can see the cove from here.”

Ignoring the stirring two-year-olds, Sam absently wiggles their binkies back into their mouths while staring out the window. Sure enough, far below them and barely visible through the passing trees is what appears to be a large cove, an inlet of water on the ocean side of the peninsula. The northern end looks to be dotted with houses, while at southern end boasts a large marina, filled with boats.

“Look!” Sam gasps, dropping a binky to point excitedly. “An old lighthouse!”

High cliffs cut a dramatic outline against the ocean, extending out past the homes to the north of the cove. Tapering down to large boulders and an expanse of flat ground, a tall, white lighthouse sits on the farthest point.

Sam moans when it drops out of view and they start to descend into the trees. Her brief delight is rewarded with two crying toddlers. Desperately trying to silence them with various toys and snacks, she misses the sign announcing their arrival to the town.

“We’re here!” Kathy announces enthusiastically. “Oh! Look at all of the shops. This is just perfect!”

Craning her neck to try to see around everyone, Sam continues her efforts to calm her little sisters as her dad looks for the realtor’s office. They’re supposed to pick up the keys to the beach house there. The business is responsible for maintaining the property in the off-season, and sometimes rents it out for Mr. Stiles.

When the van finally comes to a stop, Sam is the first one to fight her way out into the fresh air. Although she doesn’t normally get carsick, the cramped, noisy space got to her. Sucking in the cool, salty offshore breeze, Sam closes her eyes and concentrates on the feeling of solid ground.

“Sam!” Ally practically yells. “You have to see this.” Grabbing her best friend by the arm, Ally drags Sam along the sidewalk. Ignoring the slightly green tinge on Sam’s face, Ally turns her so that she’s facing an entrance to an outdoor courtyard, lined with quaint stores.

“I don’t get it,” Sam admits. “I know you like to shop, Ally, but why do I have to see it?” Already feeling much better, Sam looks more closely at the nice, wooden boardwalk in the courtyard. It’s cute, but not exactly what she would call exciting.

“Not the stores, silly!” Ally laughs, and grasps Sam’s shoulders. Turning her to the right, she points at a large, wooden statue near them. “That!”

Blinking, Sam tries to figure out what she’s looking at. It’s a carving depicting something part fish, part shark and part man. It has the body of a fish, but the head and fins of a shark…with very distinct, human looking eyes and arms. Next to it is an ornate, wooden sign that reads “Wood’s Sea Creature,” with no further explanation.

“Well, that’s creepy,” John says from behind Sam. Turning, she sees that all of the kids have gathered on the sidewalk, including her mom with the twins.

Looking back to the ‘creature,’ Sam manages to hide the growing smile from her mom, but Ally spots it and moves closer. Silently, she puts an arm around her best friend.

“I think we’re going to like it here,” Ally whispers.

3 THE BEACH HOUSE

Their break is cut short when Ethan returns dangling the keys and orders them all back into the van. Since the whole town is essentially next to the ocean, it only takes a few minutes to reach the beach house. It’s located at the end of a wooded, private road, and isn’t too impressive from the driveway. But from the water-facing side, its vast rooms, featuring enormous windows, reveal its true size.

The kids all race up the porch and scramble to be the first inside, wanting to get dibs on the best room. As soon as they see the decorations though, it’s clear that it isn’t going to be an issue.

In the far back corner of the house, there’s a large bedroom with two twin beds. The walls are painted various shades of blue and are adorned with everything having to do with boats. The curtains have sailboats on them, the light is a big anchor, and the bedspreads depict various pirate ships. In addition to the boyish décor, there’s also a big TV equipped with a gaming system. John and Hunter throw their bags on the floor and start looking at the games piled up in front of it.

Across the hall on the ocean side is an identical space. But when Sam and Ally step into it, they’re transported to a very different world. While Sam doesn’t normally like girly stuff, she has to admit to herself that the explosion of pastel colors is welcoming. One of the walls is covered with a large mural, depicting the old lighthouse Sam saw on the way in. Soaring seagulls surround it, and water sprays up from waves crashing against jagged rocks beneath it.

The bedding, curtains, throw rugs and pictures all seem to match the colors used in the painting and continue with the ocean theme. The best part, though, are the double glass doors that open onto a private deck overlooking the beach.

“Oh my gosh!” Sam exclaims, holding the doors wide. “Ally, you’ve got to look at this view. This is so much better than I thought it would be!”

Coming to stand beside her, Ally links her arm through Sam’s. The briny smelling breeze lifts their hair and billows the curtains behind them. Gulls cry out overhead, looking for food. A white-sand beach spreads out below them, meeting up with the ocean not more than a few hundred feet away. Surprisingly, there are only a few people visible on the open stretch, giving them a sense of privacy.

Far off to the right, the pictured lighthouse rises up impressively from the peninsula that ends in a sharp cliff-face. Thick evergreens spread out to either side and reach more than halfway out on the spit of land, before giving in to the rocky, windblown surface.

Turning to look more closely for neighboring houses, Sam can just barely make out a white clapboard structure through the woods on their left. It appears that they truly are the last place on the block, though, reaffirming the feeling of isolation.

The hairs on the back of her neck rising due to more than the brisk wind, Sam finally looks at Ally. She finds that her friend is already staring at her with a knowing, telltale grin on her freckled face.

“Sam…” Ally says cautiously. “We can’t get into any trouble while we’re here!”

Giving her arm a reassuring squeeze, Sam turns back to the ocean. “How could we possibly get into trouble? I’m just thinking how much fun it’s going to be to go exploring. Look at this place!”

Pulling her smart phone out of her back pocket, Ally holds out her prized possession to take a picture. Turning it around, she tugs Sam towards her for a selfie. Lining it up so that the lighthouse peaks out from in between their heads, she takes several shots until the angle is just right.

Tapping her foot impatiently while waiting to get Ally’s attention again, Sam watches as she attempts the sharing and uploading process.

“Why am I not surprised?” Ally finally says in disgust, jamming the phone back into her pocket.

“No service?” Sam guesses, trying to hide a smile. She couldn’t care less if they’re ‘connected’ or not. She had only just gotten her first phone a few months ago, for her twelfth birthday. Their trip to Montana earlier in the summer had been the first time in a long time that Ally had gone without constant cell access. It turned out to be a good thing, though. It gave them the chance to get back to the basics of what had made them such good friends in the first place.

At the summer camp they went to recently, the phones hadn’t been allowed. So while Sam suspects Ally will make a big stink about it, she also knows that her friend will do just fine without it.

“There’s one bar of phone service,” Ally replies, leaning on the weather-beaten bannister. “But it’s not letting me connect to the internet.” Shrugging, she squints up at the summer sun high overhead. “Do you think we could go swimming?”

“Sam! Hunter!” Sam’s mom starts calling for them, and she raises her eyebrows at Ally.

“I have a feeling we’ll have to do a few other things first,” she tells her friend. “But it’s barely noon. Plenty of time!”

Linking arms again, they make their way back out to the kitchen, where everyone is gathering. The twins apparently found a room well suited for them, too. They both have toys in each hand that Sam has never seen before.

“Ball!” Tabitha shouts, holding it out to show everyone. They refer to her as the oldest, since she was born twenty minutes before her sister. Thankfully, her hair is growing much faster for some reason, making it easier to tell them apart.

“My ball!” Addison cries, dropping her own loot so she can try to take it. This leads to a screaming match, and then to both of them sitting on the floor crying, when Kathy takes the ball away.

“Time for lunch?” Ethan asks his wife, plugging his ears.

Nodding, Kathy takes the car keys from him in exchange for the ball, and gestures to the kids. “They’re all yours. I’m going back into town to get some grocery shopping done. Sam,” she adds, turning to the two girls. “Please help with the twins until I get back. After we all eat, you guys can go explore the beach.”

Meanwhile, John and Hunter have been slowly making their way back towards the hall…and escape. “Hold up boys!” Kathy calls. “Don’t think I forgot about you.”

Groaning, Hunter drags his feet dramatically the few steps back. “Sam’s practically been gone all summer,” he nearly whines. “I’ve been stuck at home with the super duo.”

Crossing her arms in an ‘I’m not falling for that’ stance, Kathy tilts her head in his direction. “Oh really? Because that’s not quite how I remember it. Seems to me you’ve spent just about every minute this summer doing exactly what you wanted. The only time you sat for the twins, was when Sam traded you for it. I expect you to do your fair share of helping this week. Understood?”

“It’s okay, Mom,” Sam interjects, before Hunter has a chance to weigh in. “I know I’ve gotten to do a lot this summer, and I really don’t mind playing with them.”

The room is silent for a minute, as even the twins seem surprised by their sister’s generosity. But they break the spell by giggling over a spinning gadget, their earlier fight already forgotten.

Eying her daughter suspiciously, Kathy hesitates. “Okay…I guess you two can start your free time now,” she finally says to John and Hunter. Looking back at Sam, her eyebrows furrow. The boys join Kathy in staring suspiciously at Sam, but then quickly run off before anyone has a change of heart.

“What?” Sam finally blurts out when even Ally acts confused. “I’d rather just play with Tabitha and Addison by ourselves, is all. The boys will just tease us and make them cry. It’s easier this way.”

Apparently convinced, Kathy shrugs and then blows her husband a kiss. When the front door closes behind her, Ethan settles his own questioning gaze on Sam.

“Remember,” he warns. “No funny business while we’re here.” Not looking for a response, he picks up the remaining bags from the front hall and leaves to put them away.

“What gives?” Ally questions her friend immediately.

“Sleuthing 101,” Sam explains. “It’s much easier to do it without someone looking over your shoulder. I just effectively got rid of our two biggest problems.”

Grinning with appreciation, Ally gestures towards the two little girls still playing on the floor. “What about them?”

“These guys,” Sam says lovingly, rolling the coveted ball across the floor towards them. “Can’t talk in complete sentences.”

Laughing now, Ally shakes her head. “That won’t matter, because we aren’t going to do anything that we aren’t supposed to!”

“I never said we were,” Sam agrees. “But if there is something mysterious here for us to find, this is the best way to do it. And we’re going to start with learning the history behind that lighthouse.”

4 SAND ON YOUR FEET & WIND IN YOUR HAIR

After having a late lunch of sandwiches and chips, Sam and Ally are cut loose to do what they want until suppertime. Although they already spent nearly an hour on the beach with the twins, they weren’t able to go far, so it’s promptly decided that exploring the beach is their first mission.

They quickly change into their swimsuits, then tiptoe past the room where the little girls are taking a nap and stop at the kitchen for a drink. Finding a water bottle, Sam fills it at the dispenser built into the fridge.

“Is it okay if we walk into town later?” Sam asks her mom, who is sitting in the adjoining family room, with her dad. They’re going over a map of the area, and he’s explaining where the marina is.

After a brief pause, Kathy looks at Ethan. “I don’t see why not. Are you okay with that?” she asks her husband.

“It’s probably no more than a ten or fifteen minute walk, on a residential street,” he ponders. “Sure, so long as you don’t go any farther than Main Street,” he adds, turning his attention to Sam and Ally. “Everything you might want is located there. But beyond that is the main freeway, and there aren’t sidewalks.”

“We just want to check out the shops,” Ally assures them. Taking her phone out, she holds it up for emphasis. “And maybe find some Wi-Fi?”

Laughing, Kathy smiles at her warmly. Ally is like a daughter to her, and she understands her perfectly. “I’m sure you can put those detective skills to good use and find it, if it’s there.”

Ally’s grin falters at the suggestion that she might have to go yet another week this summer being disconnected from the rest of the world.

“Come on!” Sam urges, pulling at her arm. “We’ve got four hours until dinner. Let’s go!”

Propelled by her friend’s enthusiastic grip, Ally stumbles after Sam out the large glass sliding door off the dining area. Already familiar with the decking, the girls scamper down the two flights of weather-beaten steps and jump into the soft, warm sand.

Ally heads for the water, where they can see John and Hunter splashing around, but Sam veers off to the right.

“Where are you going?” Ally calls, while holding a hand up to her eyes to shield them from the bright afternoon sun.

“We can go in the water anytime! Let’s see how close we can get to the lighthouse.” Sam is walking backwards as she talks, and nearly trips over some driftwood. Laughing, she catches herself and then looks pleadingly at Ally. “Please?”

“Oh, okay,” Ally agrees. “But there’s no way we can walk all the way out there! It’s got to be at least five miles, and I don’t think your parents would be happy about it.”

“We won’t go that far,” Sam reassures her. “I just want to see what’s down this way, and look for anything…interesting.” She says the last bit with a knowing twinkle in her eye, and Ally can’t help but give in.

Running awkwardly in the heavy sand, Ally reaches Sam and then passes her, grabbing her towel out of her hand as she goes by. Crying out in mock anger, Sam does her best to catch up as Ally heads for the wet, compact sand.

The boys spot them and call out, but their voices are carried away by the wind. Ignoring them, they continue running the other way, towards the distant lighthouse. Although both Sam and Ally are athletic, the sand and stiff breeze take a toll quickly, and they don’t get that far before slowing, and then finally walking.

“Here,” Ally gasps, giving the towel back and freeing herself of the extra weight. Hands on hips, she breathes deeply while studying the stunning shoreline.

While the interior of the peninsula is all rainforest, here on the outer edges it changes back to your normal woods. Tall cedar trees mark the clear transition from beach to forest, bent over from years of offshore winds. The foliage becomes thick just a short distance in, making it hard to see what lies beyond.

“Look at how tall it is!” Sam exclaims, interrupting Ally’s thoughts.

Turning, Ally sees that Sam is focused on the lighthouse. She’s right, too. It’s still a very long ways away, but it has to be close to a hundred feet high, reaching far up into the cloudless sky.

“Can you imagine what it must have been like to build that?” Ally wonders.

“Maybe we can find a library when we go into town, or a historical book at one of the shops,” Sam suggests, finally looking away. “There’s got to be some information about it there. Maybe they have tours, or something!”

A bit relieved that her friend is thinking along the lines of a guided tour, rather than an unapproved exploration on their own, Ally waves at the greenery behind them. “Even if we can’t get into the lighthouse, I’ll bet there are hiking trails around here!”

Seeming to notice the woods for the first time, Sam’s smile spreads even wider. Throwing her arm around Ally’s shoulders, she steers her towards them. “That’s why I like you so much, Ally,” she says sincerely. “You always know what will make me happy!”

Trudging awkwardly through the drifts of warm, heavy sand, they eventually reach the tree line. “We’re going to need our shoes,” Sam states, looking down at their bare feet.

Swinging the stuffed beach bag off her back, Ally pulls out their flip-flops and they quickly put them on before stepping onto the forest floor. Sam marvels at how quickly the scenery changes. Even the air is several degrees cooler in the shade of the huge trees.

“There’s a sign up there!” Ally exclaims, picking up her pace. The two of them scamper through the foliage until they come to an obvious trailhead. It’s clearly marked by an ancient looking, wooden sign.

“Caution.” Sam reads the sign aloud. “Trail is not maintained. Use at your own risk.” Chewing on her bottom lip, she looks at Ally with eyebrows raised.

“We shouldn’t,” Ally states, answering the unspoken question. “At least, not wearing bathing suits and sandals!”

“Don’t you mean not before you ask Mom and Dad to make sure it’s okay?”

Spinning around at the unexpected voice behind them, Sam and Ally are surprised to see Hunter and John standing there. Hunter’s arms are crossed over his chest, and he’s looking at them rather smugly.

“Mind your own business, Hunter!” Sam retorts, hands on hips.

“Whoa!” John says, hands held out in between the two of them. “He just means that it doesn’t look that safe, Sam. It might not be a good idea to go traipsing in there without knowing where the trail goes.”

“Come on, Sam.” Pulling at Sam’s elbow, Ally leads her best friend back towards the water and away from their brothers. “He’s just trying to start an argument with you.”

Giving the boys with a dirty look, Sam allows herself to be steered clear of them. As soon as she turns back to Ally, a smile replaces her scowl and they both laugh. Sparring with their brothers is a natural thing. It happens on a daily basis and certainly isn’t enough to sour their moods.

“We might as well swim for a bit before heading into town,” Sam suggests, kicking her shoes back off.

The girls leave a trail of clothes and towels behind them as they race to the water and plunge into the churning waves.

Having grown up on the coast, both girls are well aware of the dangers associated with ocean swimming. Although they are in a somewhat protected cove, there’s still a risk of undertows and riptides, which are rivers of water under the surface that can quickly pull you out to sea. Watching the wave patterns with a practiced eye, Sam is careful to stay in waist deep water. They won’t go out any farther until they’re familiar with the area. For now, they’ll just do some body-surfing, close to shore.

“I’ll never get used to how cold it is!” Ally gasps, wrapping her arms around herself and shivering as the waves lap at her thighs. The water of the Pacific Ocean on the Washington coast never gets much above the mid-fifties. So even on a hot, late July day, it’ll suck the heat out of you quickly. Unless you have a wetsuit, you’re limited to spending a brief time near the shore, before having to warm up again.

“Wimping out already?” John shouts, as he runs past them with a boogie board. With a hoot, he flies through the air, splashing down into an incoming wave, and riding it to shore. Hunter is close behind him, and then the two jump back up to race into the next big swell.

“Who said anything about wimping out?” Sam calls, racing after them. After some begging, the boys let them use the boards, and the four of them spend the next hour soaking up the sun and saltwater.

Eventually, Sam and Ally drag their half-frozen bodies back up the beach and collapse in the baking sand. As the sensation slowly comes back to her fingers and toes, Sam turns over onto her stomach to seek out the source of a new sound. Finally spotting some movement in the shade of the house next to theirs, she nudges Ally.

“Huh?” Ally moans, her arms and legs splayed out.

“Check out our neighbors,” Sam whispers, poking her in the ribs again.

Curious now, Ally shades her eyes against the sun and then rolls onto her stomach, too, to get a better look. Sure enough, in front of the only other house near them, a little girl that looks to be about six sits playing with a shovel and bucket. It’s the cheap kind you can get for a couple of bucks, and the shovel has already broken so that she’s forced to hold it down close to the scoop. The sound Sam had heard was the scraping of the sand, and then the soft thud of it landing in the bottom of the plastic container.

The little girl’s long, blonde hair is loose and blowing wildly in the breeze, causing her to pause frequently and pull it out of her eyes. Perhaps the lighting under the shade of the trees makes her appear paler than she is. Her face seems to glow in the shadows. Sensing that she is being watched, the girl looks up at them, and Ally is certain that she sees dark bags under her piercing blue eyes.

Pushing up to her knees, Sam waves a warm hello and smiles at her. She might be several years older than the twins, but they could still have a lot of fun playing together. When the girl doesn’t wave back, Sam hesitates…but deciding to introduce herself, she stands and starts making her way over, Ally right behind her.

“Hi there!” Stopping at what they think is an acceptable distance, Sam and Ally stand just beyond the reach of the shade so that the sun still warms their backs. Sam doesn’t see an adult anywhere, and she doesn’t want to frighten the poor thing. Sam notes the hollow look on her young face and wonders what could possibly cause such a haunting expression on someone that age.

“My name is Sam, and this is Ally,” she offers, pointing to herself first, and then Ally. “We’re staying at the place next to you. What’s your name?”

Looking back and forth between the two older girls, she drops the shovel, the large hole she was working on seemingly forgotten. Standing cautiously, she then looks first towards the smaller beach house behind her and then at the girls, eyes wide. Is that fear? Sam wonders.

“Are…are you okay?” Ally asks, apparently sensing the same thing as Sam. “Where’s your mom?”

“I’m not supposed to talk to you!”

The whispered response is spoken with such terror, that Sam and Ally both take an involuntary step backwards, looking at each other with concern.

“Why can’t you…” Before Sam can finish her question, a door on the back of the house bangs open, setting the little girl into motion. Spinning on her heel, she races up the steps leading to a small porch, her bare feet banging out a beat as she goes.

“Erica! What are you doing out here by yourself?” The man doesn’t say it with menace, but concern, and he kneels down to embrace the girl approaching him. Erica dashes off to the side, avoiding his grasp. Instead, she runs behind him and grabs onto the leg of a breathtakingly beautiful woman leaning in the open door. Although wearing simple blue jeans and a non-descript, black top, she somehow appears regal. Full, slightly parted lips grace a flawless face, without a trace of make-up.

Reaching down, she absently rests a hand on Erica’s blonde hair while holding Sam’s gaze. Unsure of what to do, Sam raises her hand half-heartedly in another vain attempt at introductions. The dark-haired woman squints her eyes in reply, giving her head a slight shake before ushering Erica inside, the screen door slapping in their wake.

5 ODD NEIGHBORS

“Hello there, girls! My name is Kevin Moore.”

Refocusing on the man now walking towards them, Sam tries to shake off the odd feeling the encounter has given her. He seems pleasant enough, and looks a bit embarrassed.

“I’m Sam, and this is Ally,” Sam replies, accepting his now offered hand. “We’re staying next door for the week,” she adds quickly, feeling a bit awkward. He has a limp handshake, leaving her with an impression of insincerity.

“I feel like I have to apologize for my daughter, Erica,” he adds, stepping out from the edge of the shade to join them in the sunshine. Slowly, he looks back and forth between them, as if making a point of addressing them both like adults. “She has…some behavioral issues. It’s very difficult for her to communicate normally, and she needs constant supervision. I’m afraid my wife has taken to keeping them both somewhat isolated because of it. We’ve had a few episodes where Erica has wandered off and we even had to call the police to help find her. I thought a nice trip out here to the beach for a vacation might be relaxing, but it’s been a bit of a trial. Erica isn’t comfortable being away from home,” he adds for extra emphasis, looking down with a gesture of defeat.

“Oh, that’s okay!” Ally offers, reaching out to touch his arm encouragingly. “Don’t worry about it. Sam here has two younger sisters Erica can play with, and I babysit all the time. We’re used to kids behaving differently, so it doesn’t bother us. I’m really sorry though that you’re having such a hard time with her.”

While Ally is quick to accept his explanation, Sam hesitates. There’s something about the man that just doesn’t sit right with her. Crossing her arms over her chest, she gazes back at him when he looks up. Briefly, she sees an expression of annoyance flicker across his handsome features before breaking out in a warm smile.

“Thank you, Ally. It’s nice that you understand. It’s sometimes hard to fit in with a…troublesome child.”

Turning to Sam, Kevin’s smile falters slightly. “I wish that Erica could play with your sisters, Sam, but it would be too difficult. I hate to request this, but I think it best if everyone were to stay away for now, so that we don’t upset her any more than she already is.”

“Sure,” Sam says. “Whatever you think is best, Mr. Moore. But my mom used to be a schoolteacher and she had several students with special needs. Maybe she could talk with your wife about it. She might be able to help.”

Watching the man carefully, Sam notes his reaction as the fine lines on his face crinkle when his eyes narrow. A bit more of the friendly façade falls away, and his stance becomes rigid.

“My wife doesn’t like company,” he says flatly. “I hope you enjoy your stay, girls.” With that, he turns abruptly without another word and walks back to the little house with long, purposeful strides.

“Well, that was weird,” Sam eventually murmurs in his wake. She and Ally stand staring at each other for a moment, until a particularly big gust of wind swirls sand up and into their eyes, breaking the spell.

Turning their backs to the little dust devil swirling across the beach, they wipe at their faces and run to where their towels are spread out. The boys are still splashing in the water, having missed out on the encounter entirely.

“What do you think that was all about?” Ally asks, sitting down next to Sam. Digging her toes into the sand, she lets the sun erase the goosebumps from her arms.

“I dunno,” Sam shrugs. Looking over her shoulder, she peers into the shadows surrounding the vacation home. “Mom always talked about how impressed she was with the parents of her special needs kids. Most of them were extra outgoing and involved in the classroom. I guess everyone is different though. If Erica really is that troubled, they might not have a choice. But…”

Raising her eyebrows, Ally looks more closely at her friend. “But what, Sam?”

“I don’t trust him.”

“Time to get wet!” Freezing cold water sprays over the girls at the same time that the boys call out to them. Screaming, they do their best to shield themselves with the towels, but they still end up half-soaked.

“Hunter!” Ally yells, covered once again in goosebumps. “I was finally getting warm!”

“Exactly why you needed to cool off,” Hunter laughs, giving one final shake of his boogie board in their direction.

“I think it’s time to go to town,” Sam says quietly to Ally, not wanting their brothers to follow them. Pretending to run to the beach house to get dry, they go straight through and out the front door, waving at Kathy and the twins on the way.

Pulling their shorts out of the beach bag, they quickly slip them on over their swimsuits as they walk up the quiet, residential street. “We have less than a month until school starts,” Ally declares, kicking at a pinecone. “I wish we could stay here. I’m not so sure I want to be in seventh grade.”

Sam struggles to focus on what her friend is saying. Her mind is still trying to wrap itself around the odd behavior of their new neighbor. Looking sideways at Ally, she sees that the other girl’s mood has changed drastically, and it surprises her. Sam had always thought Ally enjoyed school, and was looking forward to middle school. At least, that’s how she acted around their other friends.

“What are you worried about?” Sam finally asks, her longer legs easily matching the quick pace that Ally is setting.

“Well, you saw what happened with our brothers, when John got into high school. It all changes, Sam,” she says a bit more desperately, stopping suddenly. “What if that happens to us?”

Skidding to a halt and turning back to face Ally, Sam grasps her firmly by the upper arms. The spattering of freckles across her nose seems to stand out in starker contrast under the shade of the trees. “Ally, why are you worrying about this now?” Her brows furrowed, Sam tries to figure out what’s really behind her friend’s anxiety.

“It’s all different, Sam.” Breaking free of Sam’s grasp, Ally starts walking again, but more slowly. “We know everyone at school, and we’ve been friends with most of them since kindergarten. But now…there’s going to be a ton more kids at the middle school, and we won’t know over half of them! We might not have any classes together, and what if we have a different lunch? You know they have two lunches, right?”

The elementary school for their small, seaside town consists of barely two-hundred kids, total. They have to be bussed to a central middle school in the next town over, where all of the incoming seventh graders arrive from neighboring districts. While it’s a much different, larger setting, Sam still hadn’t suspected that her popular, outgoing friend was worried about it.

“The class list should be up when we get back next week,” Sam says, trying to think of something positive to add. When nothing good comes to mind, she decides to just be honest.

“Ally…I thought you loved school. I don’t understand why you’re so worried about it. You know that everyone is going to love you and you’ll just have twice as many friends as before.”

“I’m not worried about making new friends!” Ally says forcefully, pushing at a low-hanging branch. “I don’t want to lose the ones I already have,” she adds, looking down at her feet so that Sam barely hears her.

Now it’s Sam’s turn to stop. When Ally realizes she’s no longer beside her, she turns back and is surprised to find Sam standing in the middle of the road, hands placed firmly on her hips.

“Ally, we’re making a pact right now!” she announces. Now that she knows what her friend’s fears are, it’s easy to solve. At least, to Sam it seems obvious enough. “We’re going to promise each other, that no matter what, we’ll always be friends.” Sticking her hand out for emphasis, she raises her eyebrows at Ally in expectation.

Unable to maintain her negative attitude in light of Sam’s positive outlook, Ally grins and steps up to take her hand. “Best friends forever, ‘till the end of time!” she declares with conviction.

“Until the end of time!” Sam repeats, making an exaggerated shake of their hands. But she doesn’t let go. Instead, she pulls Ally close to her and gives her a fierce hug. “Till the end of time, Ally,” she whispers into the fuzzy, red hair that she loves so much.

6 THE SECRETS OF WOOD COVE

Sam’s dad was right. It takes the girls less than fifteen minutes to reach the center of town. Standing once again in front of the curious statue, they glance around at the various stores. Although it’s midafternoon on a Monday, there’s still a sizeable crowd. Tourists come and go from the nearest gift shop, and they decide to start there.

A little bell hanging over the entrance announces their arrival, but no one behind the counter takes notice. They’re too busy loading various trinkets into paper bags, after ringing them up on an antiquated register.

There’s so much random stuff to choose from that it’s overwhelming. Sam is fascinated by some dried seahorses, while Ally looks through the shop’s shelves of T-shirts. The small space is crammed tight with merchandise, so it’s hard to move around. Finally, after more than half an hour, they find a rack in the far corner that’s full of brochures and pamphlets with local info.

“I found one!” Ally cries triumphantly, after looking through everything twice. Holding the small booklet out to Sam, she reads the title. “Wood’s Cove Lighthouse - the history behind its construction and demise.”

“Sweet! But how much is it? I didn’t even think to bring money!” Sam pats at the empty pockets of her shorts.

“It’s just two dollars,” Ally answers. “I’ve got a few bucks on me.”

Back at the counter, Sam is eager to learn more about the local legend. “So what can you tell us about that monster thing?” she asks the checker, while pointing out the window towards the carving.

Shrugging, the teen girl snaps her gum and drops the book into a small bag. “Just a tourist thing,” she answers, obviously bored by the conversation. “I wouldn’t worry about it.”

Unsatisfied with the response, Sam tries to push the issue, but the girl turns to help a couple of kids in line behind them. Clearly dismissed, she picks up their bag and follows Ally back outside. Taking the booklet out, they sit together on a small, wooden bench and thumb through it.

“There’s nothing in here about Wood’s monster,” Sam says with disappointment. “It just gives some dry history on when the lighthouse was built. Apparently, it was constructed shortly after Mr. Wood founded the town in 1845, as a way to help guide the fishing vessels back into the cove. But it doesn’t say anything about its condition now.”

“At least it gives some background on the town,” Ally says encouragingly. Holding the book up in front of her nose so she can read the small print, she clears her throat. “Mr. Wood and his wife settled in Wood’s Cove in 1840, and it quickly became one of the largest fishing communities on the Washington coast at the time. To this day, the town still relies on the fishing industry for the bulk of its economy, second only to tourism.”

“You’re never going to learn the real story of Wood’s Cove in a book, young miss.” The dry cackle that follows the hoarse declaration is unnerving, causing both Sam and Ally to spin around in search of the source.

Leaning against a corner of the building is an old weathered man who has to be at least eighty years old. His pale blue eyes sparkle with intelligence as he slowly raises an antique-looking pipe to his lips. It’s smokeless, so Sam guesses he’s simply puffing on it out of habit. Her uncle, who lives in Montana, smokes sweet smelling pipes sometimes. But mostly, he’ll just sit with an unlit one hanging from his mouth.

The dry laugh trails off, and he looks back and forth between the two expectantly. “Well?” he demands, sounding disappointed. “Aren’t you going to ask me what I mean?”

Sam takes in his dirty, hole-ridden jeans and baggy white t-shirt. He stands stooped over so that he’s barely taller than Ally. While his one hand holds the pipe, the other one tugs absently at his long, greasy grey beard. Wild hair frames his line-creased face and matches it in color, completing the old sea captain look. He just needs a sailor hat or bird on his shoulder…or something.

“So, what do you mean?” Sam asks good-naturedly while suppressing a laugh, having decided that he’s most likely harmless.

Scrunching up his face in an exaggerated scowl, the old man seems to consider whether Sam is making fun of him. When Ally also smiles encouragingly at him though, he finally removes the pipe and breaks out in a wide, toothless grin.

“Old man Wood did create this town,” the man croaks, waving the pipe around to encompass the surrounding buildings. “He was the best fisherman in these parts, and always brought his men home safely. That was largely due to Dead Man’s Point Lighthouse,” he continues, nodding to the distant structure barely visible through the trees.

“Dead Man’s Point?” Sam interrupts, suddenly more interested in the story.

“Plenty of lives were lost to the rocks before the lighthouse was built,” the old man explains, his voice even gruffer. “Not all of the captains were as good as Wood was. Even so, his time finally came, too.” Pausing for dramatic effect, the storyteller slowly looks to Sam, and then Ally. “One particularly foggy night, the keeper failed to light the candle. Wood’s ship bashed against the rocks and went down, but the captain was credited with getting her close enough to shore that all hands survived…except for him.”

Looking morosely at his dirty feet, clad in slippers that appear as old as he is, he pauses again. Sam wonders how many times the man has told this sea tale to tourists, and suspects he’ll want some form of compensation for it when he’s done. Meeting Ally’s gaze over the top of his bowed head, they share a knowing look. Ally winks slowly and jingles the change in her pocket, putting Sam’s concern at ease.

“His body was never recovered!”

Startled by the sudden exclamation, Sam and Ally jump before giggling at themselves. Sam decides that she rather likes the storytelling abilities of their new acquaintance, and leans in to listen closely to rest of the folktale.

“Now, the captain had long told his story of the cove monster,” he continues, not disappointing them. “He claimed to see it often sliding just below the surface, keeping pace with the ship as it approached the entrance to the cove. While no one else saw it, they did hear an eerie sound on nights when there was an extra thick fog. Wood said it was his sea creature speaking to them, reminding them of his existence, and vowing to protect the cove. This is why it’s believed by most that the sea creature took the captain to the depths below when he slipped into the water that night. Finally together, they continue to protect the cove and all the ships that come and go.”

Mistakenly taking his silence as a sign that this is the end of the story, Sam starts to ask a question, but he quickly stops her with a raised hand.

“Every night after his disappearance until her death, the captain’s wife walked the dark trail to the lighthouse, bringing a candle with her to light the way. She would climb the stairs and ensure that the lighthouse shone bright, convinced her husband would still find his way back to her. To this day,” he continues, looking ever so seriously at both of the girls, “on foggy nights, you can hear the wail of the creature and see the dim light of the candle still shining at the top of the lighthouse, beckoning him home.”

Delighted with the story, Sam and Ally clap when he finishes, and Ally gladly gives him all of her change. With a barely concealed moan at the small amount, he nonetheless drops it into his jeans pocket and starts to turn away.

“Wait!” Sam calls, stopping him. “How can we see inside the lighthouse?” she asks hopefully.

“That’s not possible,” he answers abruptly, shaking his head for emphasis. “It’s over a hundred and fifty years old, and hasn’t been used for nearly fifty of those. It was wired for electricity in the early nineteen hundreds, but it became too expensive to maintain. With the fancy equipment the new fishing boats had, it just wasn’t needed anymore. When the trails were washed out from landslides and it became inaccessible other than by boat, the town committee decided they couldn’t afford to keep it going. It’s been sitting there falling apart ever since.”

“Are you sure there’s no other way?” Sam presses.

Ally gives her a warning look, afraid that her friend is already planning something dangerous.

“You’d do best to stay away from there,” the old storyteller cautions, but with a new tone. No longer weaving a tale, he’s standing a bit straighter and his words have a sharper edge. “There’s nothing there for you to see. Nothing good has ever come from that place. Its walls echo with sorrow.”

Surprised by his conviction, Sam watches as he walks away, mumbling something under his breath. Looking guiltily at Ally, she shrugs. “I just wanted to make sure, is all,” she explains sheepishly. They begin to walk back the way they came, both of them silent as they think about the somber story.

Without warning, Ally throws her arm up in front of Sam to stop her. Looking sharply at her friend, Sam finds Ally has a finger to her lips to silence her retort, and mouths the word ‘listen.’ Taking a moment, Sam hears what seems to be a very heated conversation going on nearby.

Stepping a bit closer to the nearest building, they slowly edge towards the corner so they can look down the alleyway. Standing about twenty feet away is a group of three men, one of them waving his arms in anger as he speaks with a heavy accent.

“I don’t care how much I’m paid, man. I didn’t sign up for this!”

The man is dressed like any other tourist, but he’s very large and has a dangerous look about him. Sam’s eager to retreat, when she focuses on the guy he’s talking to…and gasps. It’s Mr. Moore!

Just as their neighbor starts to turn his head in their direction, Ally pulls Sam back, out of sight. Now worried the men sense someone listening, the girls run quickly in the opposite direction and duck into the nearest store.

Doing their best to walk calmly to the farthest corner, they find a big rack of stuffed animals to hide behind. Peeking between plush whales and starfish, the girls watch as Mr. Moore steps through the doorway and slowly looks around. Holding their breath for what feels like an eternity, he finally scowls before disappearing back outside.

7 BROTHERS!

Dinner is almost ready by the time Sam and Ally get back to the house. They hurry to help set the table while the boys assist with putting the final touches on the sandwiches.

A Philly Steak/French Dip combo is a favorite dish in the Wolf household, and Ally is always sure to be invited over when they have it. But it’s been a while since John has eaten with them, and he makes it clear that he’s missed it. Sam notes how he and Hunter have fallen right back into their familiar routine with each other, their constant banter light and easygoing.

Helping the twins into their highchairs, Sam cuts up some grapes to put alongside their French fries. Grapes are one of the few fruits they’ll eat, so they always try to have them handy. It’s not unusual for a good portion of their meals to end up on the floor and getting them to eat is always a challenge.

“Find anything interesting in town?” Kathy asks, pouring water into the glasses they set out. “Any Wi-Fi?” she directs to Ally.

Groaning, Ally pats at the phone still in her pocket. With their unexpected encounters, she had completely forgotten to even check!

“I forgot,” she admits dismally, looking at Sam with a little guilt. They weren’t sure whether to share the encounter with Mr. Moore. It was dangerously close to snooping.

“So what happened?” John presses. “No way Ally wouldn’t be jumping all over her phone unless something more interesting came up.”

Ethan Wolf raises his eyebrows questioningly at the girls as everyone takes a seat at the big table. He knows his daughter well enough to interpret the furtive glances at her best friend. “So?” he finally asks when no one volunteers an answer.

While she might have been able to make excuses for not offering to tell her parents about Kevin Moore, now she doesn’t have a choice. Sam might be curious and maybe a bit too bold when it comes to taking risks to help people, but one thing she won’t do is lie.

“Well…” she starts, looking to Ally for input. When her friend returns a blank stare instead, Sam sighs in resignation. “We sort of….kind of…well, almost had a run-in with our neighbor, Mr. Moore.”

“Who?” her mom asks. Her sandwich is paused halfway to her mouth, bits of roast beef, sautéed onions, and cheese oozing out the sides.

Realizing that her parents don’t even know about the odd Kevin Moore and his family next door, Sam quickly explains the weird introductions from earlier in the day. She then recites the old fishing tale in detail, including a fairly decent imitation of the old man’s voice that has the boys laughing. By the time she describes the scene in the alley though, and their hiding out in the gift shop, her parents aren’t amused anymore.

“I’m disappointed that we’re having this conversation,” Ethan admonishes. “Especially this soon into our trip.”

“But Dad, we didn’t do anything,” Sam pleads.

“It’s what you didn’t do…like walk away. From now on, if you find yourself having to hide from view in order to listen or see something, just don’t do it. Okay? Is that so hard?” Tapping his fingers on the table in beat to his words, it’s obvious that her father is frustrated with them.

Hanging their heads, both of the girls nod in understanding and continue eating in silence.

It’s not long before the quiet is interrupted by squeals of joy from Tabitha and Addison, who seem to be having a contest to see who can throw her grapes the farthest. Glad to have the distraction, Sam busies herself retrieving the food.

The commotion breaks up the awkward silence and the boys start telling them all about their day in the water, the new friends they made, and about a sand castle festival that’s happening on the beach Friday.

Her scolding nearly forgotten in light of this exciting development, Sam sits back down in her chair and leans forward eagerly. “A sand castle festival?” she asks. “Do you mean the kind where they have contests and stuff?”

“Yup.” Hunter answers before John can speak up. “We met these kids staying down the beach a ways, and they told us all about it. Happens every year. Sand castle building contest, food, music, swimming contests, paragliding and everything! I guess your old sea captain forgot to tell you, huh?” he adds mockingly, wiggling his eyebrows at his sister.

Doing her best to ignore the bait, Sam turns back to her mom. “That sounds like a lot of fun! We can go, can’t we?”

Relieved that her daughter appears more interested in the festival than the local legend and mysterious neighbor, Kathy is more than happy to say yes. “It sounds like something the whole family can enjoy together. Good timing,” she adds, turning to Ethan.

As they all start talking about it at once, Sam is reminded of the trail they discovered earlier in the day. With everything happening since, she had almost forgotten!

“Dad, would it be okay if Ally and I hike a trail we found near the beach?” she asks when there is a break in the conversation. “It’s marked with a sign and everything. We wouldn’t go far.”

“Do you mean the one with the sign that says not to use it because it’s dangerous?” Hunter asks, a self-satisfied grin on his face.

At the look of disappointment her father turns on her, Sam can’t help herself, and lashes back.

“It says no such thing, Hunter!” she fumes, eyes flashing. “It just cautions that the trail isn’t maintained, is all. Not that it’s dangerous. Stop trying to make it seem like I’m being sneaky!”

“All right. kids,” Kathy warns, “that’s enough. Hunter,” she continues, turning to him and waving a fork in his direction for emphasis. “I know exactly what you’re doing, and it isn’t going to work. Stop trying to cause trouble.”

His grin widening, Hunter goes back to finishing his second sandwich, satisfied that his input had the desired effect.

“Now Sam, you know how I feel about you going on random trails by yourself. Whether it says caution or danger doesn’t really matter,” her dad quickly adds, when she starts to argue.

“You and Ally are twelve years old, and while you have proven yourselves capable, I still don’t agree with you running off to wherever you feel like. If you want to go on a hike, that’s fine. But you’ll either wait until I’m done with my work and available, on Sunday before we leave. Or you can take the boys with you.”

With that declaration, Hunter and John exchange a knowing smile and it’s all Sam can do to not blurt out what she thinks. Biting her tongue, she reaches under the table and nudges Ally’s leg, cautioning her. While Sam is the more vocal of the two, she wouldn’t put it past Ally to say something to her brother. They have to be careful. They’ve been in trouble too many times before and it wouldn’t take much to get them grounded.

“Okay, Dad,” Sam finally says evenly, surprising everyone. With satisfaction, she watches the smiles fall from both Hunter and John’s faces, and reaches casually for more french fries. “I understand. We won’t go without you or the boys. Do we still get to go to the marina with you in the morning?”

During the drive to the cove, he invited them to visit where he’d be working for the week. Sam has always been fascinated with the different fishing boats, and she’s been looking forward to exploring the new marina. When her dad nods in confirmation, obviously surprised by her lack of argument about the trail, she feels a twinge of excitement.

If there was a good spot to learn more about Old Captain Wood and his sea monster, it’s where all the current fishermen hang out. Ally returns the nudge under the table, and Sam figures she’s thinking the same thing. A small prickle crawls up the base of her spine. She knows without a doubt that their trip is about to get more interesting!

8 EXPLORING THE MARINA

Early the next morning, Sam sits in the front seat of the van, next to her dad. She yawns loudly. Her optimism about the day ahead isn’t quite as positive as it was last night, but that’s only because the sun has just started to break above the waterline. She wishes now that she and Ally had gone to bed the first time her dad hollered at them to be quiet last night. But it was nearly impossible to fall asleep with the waves crashing outside, and the silhouette of the lighthouse visible in the moonlight, through the thin curtains.

When the warm sunshine reaches them on the narrow road that winds along the shore, Sam turns her face into it and finally smiles. It’ll be worth it. The boys opted to stay behind and get the beach to themselves, although they’ll have to watch the twins for a while. With her dad occupied with his work, and no one else to bother them, she and Ally should be able to do some sleuthing. Is there really a sea creature? Is there a way to get to the lighthouse? And who were those scary-looking guys that Mr. Moore was arguing with? Sam has been around marinas enough to know that in a small fishing town, that’s where you go for answers, not the local tourist trap.

In less than twenty minutes, they pull into a massive parking area, and Sam is not disappointed. It’s a huge harbor, with dozens of large commercial fishing vessels mixed among smaller, private boats. There’s at least one restaurant, a tackle shop, a rental store and numerous smaller booths housing various wares.

Turning in her seat to point out the shops to Ally, Sam sees the wide-eyed expression on her friend’s face. Although they live by the ocean and there’s a marina there at home, she’s never seen anything quite like this before.

“I didn’t think it’d be this big,” Ally says in awe, looking around as they get out of the van. “Where do all these people come from?” she asks, as they dodge out of the way of a group walking by at a brisk pace.

Ally is right; the population here is likely higher than in town. “A lot of them live on their boats,” Sam explains, looking to her father for confirmation.

“That’s right, Sam,” he agrees, directing them towards what must be the main office. “I imagine a fair amount of them live here year-round. You have to keep in mind that most of the town’s population also works here in one aspect or another. Add to that the commercial vessels that come and go on a regular basis, and you get quite the gathering. One of the reasons my boss chose Wood’s Cove for the work on his boat is because of the particular craftsmanship that’s needed. It’s very hard to find nowadays, almost a lost art. Some of the woodworkers here have been doing it their whole lives. You just can’t hire the same kind of help anywhere.”

Following closely behind her dad, Sam holds onto Ally’s hand so they aren’t separated in the throng of people. It’s barely seven in the morning, but the place is awash with activity and noise. Huge cranes lift crates of fish from ships to waiting transport, the men barking out orders from all directions. Workers tromp past them on the boardwalk, going about their tasks with a single-minded purpose. Vendors move at a slower pace, setting out their goods with a practiced ease and waving as the workers go by, recognizing them as potential customers.

Once inside the large, main building, the marina noise is replaced with a different variety of sounds altogether. Ringing phones, tapping keys and intense conversations fill the space, echoing so that it’s even more disorienting than the scene outside.

It’s not long before a tall, silver-haired man greets Ethan, shaking his hand enthusiastically. They’re obviously at the right place. After a brief discussion, the man leads them all back out onto the main dock and towards one of the larger ships, moored at the end. When they reach the gangway leading to the deck several feet above them, Ethan turns to the girls and leans in so they’re sure to hear him.

“I’ve got business to take care of now,” he explains, motioning to the boat behind him. “It’s going to be a lot of boring paperwork at first, checking over all of the documentation to make sure everything’s on track and accounted for. But here,” he continues, taking out his wallet. “There’s enough to explore to keep you busy for hours, Sam. Find some souvenirs for everyone,” he continues, handing her some money. “Let’s meet in front of that big restaurant at noon. After we eat, I’ll be able to give you guys the full tour of this beast here, once I’m familiar with it. Deal?”

Smiling broadly, Sam takes the cash and looks around at all of their options, unsure where she wants to start. The atmosphere reminds her of a carnival. Mixed with the salty, crisp sea breeze, it’s energizing. “Sure, Dad!” she exclaims, bouncing on the balls of her feet. “Don’t worry about us!”

Her dad’s grin falters slightly as he suddenly questions if it’s wise to leave the girls to their own devices. Sam can tell he’s about to suggest a new plan, but the silver-haired man looks back to see what’s keeping him and calls out impatiently. Shrugging, Ethan finally turns and hurries to catch up.

“Phew! That was close,” Ally observes. “I thought he might make us sit in some remote corner of that boat for the rest of the morning.”

Laughing, Sam tugs at her arm and then walks quickly back down the long dock. “Nah…we could have talked him out of it. I’ve been coming to places like this with him for years now. It’s not like we can get lost or anything, and most of the people here are honest workers, not trouble makers.”

Not completely convinced, Ally studies a scary looking group of men clustered around a breakfast vendor. They look as if they haven’t shaved for weeks, and their clothes are ragged and filthy. One of them turns, as if sensing her stare, and smiles broadly at her, exposing several missing teeth. Blushing furiously, Ally stumbles back into Sam and nearly causes them both to fall over.

Sam laughs as she catches her friend and whispers in her ear. “They’re just fishermen, Ally,” she explains. “They’ve been out on the boat working for weeks straight. See their waders and boots?” she points out, nodding at their specialized gear. “Some of them might look a bit shady, but they have certain codes they live by around here. We don’t need to worry.”

Deciding that the food smells good, they take the men’s place after they walk away and order breakfast burritos. It takes some time, but Ally eventually relaxes when no one attempts to kill them. By mid-morning, she’s having as much fun as Sam is.

Every booth has something unique to offer, and the girls are entranced by the assortment of boats anchored along the maze of interlocking docks. They could easily spend the whole day just looking at them, and still not see them all.

By eleven-thirty, they’ve made their way to the far end of the boardwalk, and end up finding the perfect gift for the twins. This particular saleslady has a variety of inexpensive trinkets geared for children. Holding up two slightly different bouncy balls, Sam turns them in the sunlight. Inside the clear plastic, starfish light up when the ball is tapped or bounced.

“Those are very unique!”

The deep voice makes Sam jump. She spins around to find their neighbor, Kevin Moore, standing there.

“Umm, yeah…” Sam stammers, unsure if he’s aware that the two of them were spying on him the day before. “I thought that my little sisters would like them.”

“Oh, absolutely!” he says pleasantly. “I think that I’ll pick one up for Erica, too. She loves toys that have flashing lights or glow in the dark.”

While Mr. Moore is going out of his way to be polite, Sam detects an edge just below the surface, making his friendliness feel forced. But he was that way when they first met him on the beach, too. Perhaps it’s just the way he is all the time.

After paying the woman her two dollars, Mr. Moore tosses the ball up and then snatches it out of the air dramatically before turning back to the two girls. “Enjoy your afternoon, ladies,” he says grandly, nodding to each of them before walking away.

Without a word, Sam buys the two toys and then hurriedly guides Ally around the backside of the booth. Groaning, she follows, but drags her feet, suspecting what her friend is up to.

“We can’t follow him again!” Ally protests.

“We’re not,” Sam answers. “We’re just walking back towards the restaurant where we’re supposed to meet my dad. If we happen to see where Mr. Moore goes…” Lifting her hands in a ‘so-what’ gesture, she looks sideways at Ally.

“So the fact that we’re walking behind the booths has nothing to do with trying not to be seen?” Ally counters with disdain.

“Wait!” Sam suddenly mutters, putting out a hand to stop Ally. “Look!”

Reluctantly, Ally looks to where Sam is pointing. Sure enough, Mr. Moore is talking with the same two men he met in the alley the day before. Although she can’t help but think they’re doing something wrong, she feels a twinge of excitement and moves in closer to Sam.

Hidden among dozens of other people, they watch silently as the group moves down one of the smaller docks and stops at a boat near the end. The two strangers board first, and then Kevin follows, looking around suspiciously before disappearing inside the craft.

“If he’s really here on vacation, then what’s he doing with those guys?” Ally whispers, forgetting to feel guilty.

“Well, he isn’t buying fish,” Sam declares, unafraid of being heard this far away. “That’s not a fishing boat and those aren’t fishermen. It’s not a houseboat either, so I doubt they’re local. In fact,” she continues, walking several feet out onto the dock. “It looks like it’s a custom build. Very expensive.” Studying the forty or so foot vessel from afar, Sam squints in the early afternoon sun. “I wish we could get a peek inside.”

Before Ally has a chance to object to that idea, the men re-emerge and walk back towards them. They’re so engrossed in their conversation, that Mr. Moore doesn’t even notice them when they pass within five feet of each other. Exchanging a look of relief, Sam and Ally naturally walk the other way…and towards the boat.

When they come alongside it, Sam looks back just in time to see the men go inside the restaurant, the same one they’ll be eating at soon. “I’m just going to see if that porthole is covered or not,” she tells Ally, scooting in close to the impressive boat. It has a two-story upper deck, with gold-trimmed portholes spaced every few feet, so they’re almost eye level with them on the dock.

Without waiting for a response from her friend, Sam leans out over the gap, bracing her hands to either side of the window, the water sparkling several feet below. Inside, she can just make out a table made of rich mahogany, with several laptops and papers strewn across it.

Pushing back, Sam moves to the next porthole, closest to the ramp leading down to the deck. Unlike the large fishing boat, this one sets below the dock. But as she leans forward, one of the bouncy balls crammed into the pocket of her sweatshirt breaks free and bounces away.  Gasping, Sam spins to grab it but misses, watching in dismay as it rolls down the footbridge and into the boat.

“Oh no!” Ally cries, peering in the window next to Sam.

They watch helplessly as the lights flash inside the ball while it rolls across the floor and then comes to rest under the table.

“When Mr. Moore sees that, he’s going to think we went inside!”

“I’ll just go grab it. Stay here,” Sam says hurriedly, already rushing towards the ramp.

Once inside, Sam’s eyes quickly adjust to the dim lighting, and she crosses the small but lavishly decorated living area. Beautiful wood trim is everywhere, buffed to such a shine that it almost looks fake. Sam has seen boats like this before on tours, and knows how much they cost.

Not slowing down to admire the work, she squats at the table and reaches blindly for the ball that stopped flashing. Her eyes are level with the table, making it impossible not to notice the odd documents on top. I’m not really snooping, she tells herself, as her hand closes over the ball and she scoops it up. Not if I just happen to notice something during a totally innocent act.

The papers are covered with long strings of math equations and diagrams of odd, hexagonal structures. At the top of each sheet is a logo, a simple design she’s seen before, but can’t quite place. The letters W and M are written in fancy text above and below the image.

Before she can look more closely, she hears the unmistakable sound of heavy footfall behind her. A flood of fear begins in the pit of her stomach and quickly spreads. Turning, her worst fears are confirmed as she sees the two unknown men blocking the light of the entrance, Ally cowering before them.

“Which one of you wants to explain what it is you’re doing on my boat?” the largest one growls threateningly.

9 A CHANCE ENCOUNTER

Her mouth suddenly dry, Sam tries to swallow but nearly chokes on her fear. Up close, the two middle-aged men are even more intimidating. Both are large, with a polished and dangerous look. Not like common street criminals, but smart, with a hard edge. The man who spoke is closest to Sam. He’s wearing what appear to be brand new clothes, from a local shop. She notices his boots aren’t even broken in.

“Well? Speak up!” he demands, his blue eyes flashing. He has a thick accent, which Sam can’t quite place. German? Russian?

Her paralysis finally broken, Sam stumbles away from the table and trips over something on the floor, nearly falling at the man’s feet. Putting her hands out to catch herself, she grabs onto a bag that’s now tangled in her feet. Sam vaguely registers that it’s a backpack…the type kids use for school. It has a bright tie-dye design. Clipped to the outside of it is a cellphone, encased in a bejeweled holder with the name ‘CARRIE’ carefully printed on it with a marker.

Blushing furiously, Sam struggles to her feet and focuses her attention on the men blocking the exit. “I’m really sorry, s…sir,” she stutters. “I was getting this ball.” She holds out her hand, revealing the bouncy ball inside. “Honest. It fell out of my pocket and rolled in here,” she rushes, near tears.

The words continue to pour out, running together until Sam isn’t even sure they can understand what she’s saying. “It went under the table, and I was going to get it and leave. I promise we weren’t doing anything else. I’m really, really sorry,” she says again, looking back and forth frantically between the two hardened faces.

Evidently unsure what to think, the man who seems to be in charge looks over his shoulder at the other guy, who shrugs, but remains silent. When he turns back to Sam, she gives the ball a little squeeze, causing it to light up. Perhaps it can somehow help prove their innocence. A slight spasm tugs at the corner of his mouth and Sam prays that he’s fighting against a grin.

“Get outta here!” he finally orders, stepping aside to allow them to pass. “If I ever catch you near my boat again, I’ll turn you into the harbormaster and let him deal with you!”

“Yes sir,” Sam mumbles, looking down at her feet. “I’m sorry,” she repeats one more time, before grabbing a still-frozen Ally and dragging her up the gangplank. Almost running now, they make it onto the dock and head straight for the restaurant.

Finally daring to look back, there’s no sign of the men or Mr. Moore. Thank goodness he hadn’t returned to the boat with the other men, or things might have been a whole lot worse. If they had made a scene with the harbormaster, it could have jeopardized her dad’s job there.

“What if they tell that Moore guy, and then he tells your parents?” Ally whispers, voicing Sam’s fear.

“Then we’ll probably be on the first bus back home,” Sam answers morosely. “What was I thinking?” she moans, finally stopping. They’re in the spot her dad told them to wait, but there’s no sign of him yet. “Why didn’t I just leave the ball? Sometimes I wish I’d stop doing things without thinking first,” she adds, crossing her arms over her chest and looking at Ally.

“I’m the one who said we’d get in trouble if they found the ball,” Ally adds, trying to point out that it’s not all Sam’s fault. “Besides, It’s not like we really did anything wrong. They probably won’t even tell Mr. Moore. Why would they?”

Sam tries to think about the situation rationally. Ally’s right, the men have no idea that the girls are staying in the beach house next to Mr. Moore. They’ve never even seen them before. They’re just a couple of kids getting a lost ball. It might not be so bad, after all.

“Sam! Ally!”

Expecting the worst, Sam spins around, but finds her dad waving at them and smiling happily. Relaxing, she lets out a big breath she didn’t realize she was holding. “Hey, Dad!” she says in return, hoping she sounds normal.

Ushering them inside the restaurant, Ethan leads them to a booth and announces that they can have whatever they want to eat. Sam figures things must be going well with work.

After ordering burgers, onion rings and milkshakes, Sam and Ally sit back and listen politely to Ethan’s detailed descriptions of the project he’s overseeing. It’s normally the kind of stuff Sam likes discussing with her dad. But the nagging guilt she’s battling is preventing her from enjoying it.

Several times during the conversation, she’s tempted to interrupt and tell him about her poor decision to go onto the boat. But he’s in such a good mood that she can’t bring herself to do it. I’ll tell him later, she promises herself. On the way back to the beach house.

After they finish eating, Sam’s dad takes them on an hour-long tour of the fishing vessel. It’s massive, and by the time they’re through, Ally has a better understanding as to why Sam is so fascinated by it. There are nearly a dozen workers spread out, performing various tasks. It’s Ethan’s job to make sure they’re all on track and able to have it completed in time for the coming season.

The two girls are turned loose with a few more hours to kill before her dad is done for the day. Sam’s anxiety has finally settled enough that she’s starting to relax, but as soon as they walk back out onto the dock, it comes back with a vengeance.

“Look!” Ally urges, elbowing Sam in the ribs and then pointing out towards the marina.

Sam follows the direction of Ally’s arm, sure that the harbormaster must be barreling down on them. She doesn’t even know what he looks like, but she imagines he’s large, with a patch over his eye. To her surprise, she sees a very distinctive boat heading out to sea instead.

“They’re leaving!” Sam exhales, all the stress of the past couple of hours going with it. “They must not have reported us.”

“Well, they said they wouldn’t unless they caught us snooping again,” Ally reminds her, always the rational one. “I’m sure it was no big deal to them.”

Her mood vastly improved, Sam smiles and starts to skip back towards the vendor area. “Come on!” she calls, waving for Ally to follow. “Let’s go see if we can find out more about the Wood’s Sea Creature or the lighthouse!”

They spend the remainder of their time browsing the rest of the businesses and talking with some of the locals. Well, those who were willing to talk to them. Most either laugh or wave them away at the mention of the old legend, but one lady in particular is helpful. She runs a small booth filled with small, hand-carved wooden figurines, and is likely even older than the man from town. Everything from seagulls to whales lines the shelves, but the item that catches Sam’s attention is identical to the large statue in the town square.

On the ride back to the beach house, Sam rolls the replica of the sea creature around in the palm of her hand. The woman’s tale had been almost identical to the old man’s, with one important addition. After selling Sam the trinket for just a few dollars, she’d given them a dire warning: “Stay away from the beach at night, or you might end up in the beast’s belly, too,” she cackled, her voice harsh. “And the lighthouse!” The woman had directed the last statement pointedly at Sam, who’d been hounding her with questions about the structure. “It’s cursed! There’s a reason the town council voted unanimously not to repair the trails. You’d be smart to mind the signs and stay away.”

Sam looks out the window at the passing scenery, now starting to look familiar. The woman’s voice echoes through her thoughts. Could there really be something to the story of the haunting? Does Mrs. Wood’s ghost return to the lookout, trying to lead her husband home?

Fighting rising goosebumps, Sam looks sideways at her dad and briefly considers telling him about their encounter on the boat. Now that the threat of being found out has passed, it doesn’t seem as important. In fact, it all feels somewhat silly, and she wonders why she was even so upset about it. If she were to tell him now, he would feel obligated to track the boat owners down and apologize himself. It would make him look bad, and possibly spoil his whole week.

No, Sam decides. I’m not going to let something that I did ruin this job for my dad. He doesn’t need to know.

Feeling better about things, Sam’s step is a bit lighter when they get back. Everyone had a good day, and they all exchange stories over dinner that evening.

Sam and Ally go to bed early, having had just a few hours of sleep the night before. Setting the odd-looking sea creature on the nightstand next to the bed, Sam falls asleep staring at it, wondering if something like it could actually exist.

***

Waking with a start, Sam sits up abruptly and looks around the dark room, confused. It takes a moment to shake the weird images of sea monsters from her head and remember where she is.

“It was just a dream,” she whispers to herself, looking over at the figurine to assure herself that it wasn’t real. Getting up from the soft bed, she walks quietly over to the big, double glass doors that lead to the balcony. The room is stuffy, and she desperately needs some fresh air.

Pushing the doors open, Sam steps out into the blessedly cool, nighttime air. Leaning against the railing, she becomes fully awake, the dream already almost forgotten. Looking out at the beach, she can hardly see the water in the oily blackness. The moon lends little light as it’s hidden behind a solid wall of thick fog rolling in off the crashing waves.

Beginning to shiver from the dramatic change in temperature, Sam turns to go back inside, but pauses when she hears an odd sound. Straining to hear it, she tilts her head and closes her eyes. There! Mixed in with the booming surf is a high-pitched wail unlike anything she’s ever heard before. Eyes flying open, she turns to where she knows the lighthouse stands in the distance. To her astonishment, a dim light glows in the dark!

10 TRAIL OF CONFUSION

The sound still haunts Sam the next morning as she absently eats a big bowl of cereal. She’d dragged Ally out of bed the night before, but by the time they got out on the deck, both the wailing and the light were gone. Half convinced now that she’d still been dreaming, Sam’s reluctant to tell anyone else about it. Her brothers would tease her for months!

It had taken a long time to fall back asleep with the weird mix of thoughts tumbling around in her head. Only Ally’s threat of pouring water on her face finally got her up.

Already after nine, her father left for work hours ago. The twins are outside with the boys, playing in the sand. Her mom has left a note on the table, explaining that she’s gone into town.

Sam considers the events of the past two days. “I think we need to try and forget about our neighbors and all of this other weird stuff,” she finally says, looking hopefully at Ally. “Let’s just try to have fun today.”

Surprised by the uncharacteristic announcement by her friend, Ally lowers her own spoon and stares back at her. The whole experience last night must have scared Sam more than she’s willing to admit. Eager to help put her at ease, Ally nods in agreement. “I think that’s a great idea, Sam,” she says lightly. “It’s a perfect day outside! We can spend it working on our tans.”

By the time Sam’s mom returns home, the boys have left to go swimming with their new friends, and Sam and Ally have taken over watching the twins. They’re happy to unload the groceries and make lunch while Kathy gets the two-year-olds changed and ready to eat.

It’s close to one in the afternoon when the girls finally get to spread their towels out and fulfill their goal for the day. Tabitha and Addison are down for their afternoon nap, so they don’t even have to worry about them. And their older brothers won’t be bothering them for a while.

“I saw a sign in town the other day for a theatre,” Ally says lazily. “Do you think your parents would let us go to a movie later?”

“I don’t see why not,” Sam answers, propping herself up on her elbows. “Maybe Dad would let John take us all in the van? He’s past his probation, isn’t he?” In the state of Washington, the rules for teen drivers are strict. For the first six months, they aren’t allowed to drive anyone that isn’t a family member unless there’s an adult present.

“Yeah, he’s been able to drive his friends around for a couple of months now, but Mom and Dad have their own set of rules. Taking us to the movies would be fine, though.”

“Do you think it’d be worth it?” Sam asks, biting at her lower lip. “Or would they torment us through the whole show?”

“Nah…John isn’t like that anymore,” Ally counters. “We’d sit far away from them, anyway. I think it’d be fun!” Agreeing to look into what movies were playing later that afternoon, they spend the next hour sweating under the blazing summer sun until they can’t stand it anymore. Even with their existing tans and generous amounts of sunscreen, they’re starting to burn.

Running for shade, they end up walking along the edge of the woods and soon find themselves at the mysterious trailhead. To Sam’s surprise, she isn’t that tempted to explore it. Intuition tells her that there’s a very real danger involving that lighthouse. She’s learned to listen to her instincts. Normally, she would at least suggest they walk parallel to the trail for a little ways, so that they could see what was around the first bend without really going on it. Her curiosity stirs a bit at that thought, but her brother abruptly interrupts it.

“Did you already forget what Dad told you, Sam?” Hunter announces loudly right next to her ear, causing her to jump. Laughing at her reaction, he takes a few steps onto the overgrown path and then turns back. “What’s the matter? Feeling a bit guilty at being caught trying to break the rules?”

“We weren’t even on the trail, Hunter!” Ally shouts, stepping forward.

Both Hunter and John look at her in silence, startled by the venom in her voice.

“We don’t even want to go to the lighthouse anymore…not after what happened last-”

Sam reaches for Ally, but fails to stop her in time from saying too much. She gives Ally a warning look, letting her friend know she doesn’t want to talk about it.

“What happened?” John asks,

“Nothing,” Sam replies, much too quickly.

“No…really,” Hunter urges, without any hint of sarcasm. “What did you hear?”

Staring at her older brother, Sam notes the way he’s shifting from foot-to-foot, looking over his shoulder into the woods nervously. Something’s spooked him, too. “Wait,” she says, as Hunter’s last question sinks in. “What makes you think that we heard something?”

John and Hunter exchange a look, obviously trying to decide what to tell the girls. “Because we had a strange…experience the first night we were here,” John finally says.

“How?” Ally presses, hands firmly planted on her hips. “Your room is on the back of the house, away from the water.”

Again, the boys hesitate. Running his hands through his blonde hair in frustration, John shrugs sheepishly. “The guys we met on Monday invited us to go body surfing by moonlight,” he admits. “They’re good guys,” he’s quick to add, when he sees shock register on the girls’ faces as they realize that their brothers had snuck out. “They live here, and do it all the time, but we knew your parents probably wouldn’t approve so rather than ask and be told no…we just, well…we just went.”

“We aren’t going to go again,” Hunter tells them, cutting off the expected reprimands. “It’s no big deal, we were just swimming. But…” He looks over his shoulder again, into the woods. “After about an hour, this thick fog started to build up, totally blocking the moonlight so we couldn’t see very well. The other guys got all weird and said we had to go. On our way back, there was this bizarre wailing sound.”

“At first, we thought someone might be in the water and need help,” John says, picking up the story. “But when we stopped and tried to figure out where it was coming from, it was like it was all around us, in the fog. Freakiest thing I ever heard. We ran the rest of the way back!”

Sam is encouraged by the story, and shares her own experience from the night before.

“I didn’t see any lights out there,” Hunter says to Sam, gesturing in the direction of the lighthouse. “But I didn’t really look, either.”

After a moment of silence, Ally shakes her head. “I know that I’m the only one who hasn’t heard it,” she begins. “But don’t you all think you’re letting the whole sea legend thing get the best of you? It’s got to be some sort of strange atmospheric thing involving the fog, and shape of the cove, and maybe the waves on the rocks or something.”

Impressed with Ally’s rational explanation, Sam is just glad that someone else did hear it, so she knows that she isn’t going crazy. “Whatever it is,” she says, stepping up to loop an arm through Ally’s, “it’s definitely interesting!”

Chuckling now at their fear, it’s easy for the boys to imagine that it wasn’t all that bad, while standing in the daylight. “So we were going to explore this trail now,” John says, happy to change the subject. “You can come with us, if you want.”

“Nah,” Hunter mocks. “Look at ‘em,” he says to John. “They’re too scared.”

Almost relieved to have her brother behaving more like his normal self, Sam takes the bait. “We’ll just see which one of us is really scared!” she retorts, pushing past him to lead the way. Ally has no choice but to follow, her arm still securely locked in Sam’s.

Within minutes, they’re transported to a different world, one filled with evergreens covered in hanging moss, and dense underbrush. Unlike the woods they were in at camp that had little groundcover other than dried pine needles, the rain forest has a spongy surface filled with ferns and moss. Fallen, rotting trees are hosts to huge mushrooms.

Any fears quickly forgotten, Sam and Ally race along the narrow path dappled in sunlight, where it manages to break through the canopy overhead.

After half an hour, the level trail begins to climb uphill. Before long, it becomes obstructed with deadfall and small rockslides. Still in their sandals, the girls struggle to get through.

“Maybe we should wait for the guys to catch up,” Ally suggests. Standing with one foot up on a particularly large boulder in the middle of the trail, she looks back the way they came. Nearly falling off the top of a huge log she’s climbing over, Sam is about to agree when she’s interrupted by someone yelling for help!

“Please! If anyone can hear me….help!” It’s the voice of a woman, and it isn’t that far ahead of them. Spinning around towards the source, Sam doesn’t wait for Ally, but starts running awkwardly up the slope.

“I’m coming!” Sam shouts, her feet slipping. She nearly falls as she reaches the crest.

“Carrie!” This time it’s a little girl screaming the name in desperation. “Carrie!” she cries again, drawing closer.

Sam can hear footsteps coming towards her, and is shocked when the little girl from next door suddenly comes into view. Her blonde hair is matted to her face, stuck there by mud and tears.

“Erica?” Sam says in disbelief.

“Oh…I thought you were Carrie.” The small child says in dismay. Fresh tears course down her pale cheeks.

“Who’s Carrie?” Sam asks, kneeling down in front of Erica and gently taking her by the shoulders.

“My sister,” Erica whispers, looking back the way she had come. “We’re trying to find her.”

“Who?” Sam presses, as Ally joins them, looking bewildered by the scene. “Where’s your mom? Is she the one calling for help?”

“Mommy!” Erica jerks away from Sam, as if remembering why she was running. “She fell, trying to find Carrie. Can you help her?”

Taking the girl by the hand, Sam leads her back up the trail. “Of course we will! Show us where she is, Erica.”

It doesn’t take long to reach the top of the slope, where it opens up to expose a huge bluff nearly bare of trees, overlooking the ocean far below. To the right is a vertical cliff of jagged rock protruding far above them.

Originally, the trail had followed a narrow span of dirt at the base of the rocks, cut into the hillside. To the left of it, a steep slope descends a couple of hundred feet down to the water. At one time, it allowed a fairly wide surface to walk across to the other side, where it disappears back into the trees. However, at some point, a massive rock and mudslide washed it out, leaving behind a dangerous course to navigate.

Shading her eyes against the sudden onslaught of sunlight, Sam tries to find the source of the cries for help, which have gotten fainter. Unbelievably, she sees Erica’s mom about halfway across the destroyed trail. She must have been trying to get to the other side when she lost her footing, and nearly plunged to her death. The only thing that saved her is a rotten-looking branch of a tree that was knocked over and caught up in the slide. Her body is tangled up in it a few feet from the top, precariously balanced, and with no way to get back up.

Without even thinking about what she’s doing, Sam orders Ally to keep Erica there, and then runs out onto the cliff.

11 A DARING RESCUE!

Stepping cautiously over the slippery rocks and debris, Sam quickly makes her way towards the woman. She does her best not to look down, but once she reaches the spot where Erica’s mom slid off, she no longer has a choice. Lying flat on her stomach, Sam inches towards the edge and then peers down into her terrified face.

“Where’s Erica?” she croaks, her voice hoarse from either yelling or fear.

“She’s okay,” Sam reassures her. “My friend Ally has her. I’m Sam…we kind of met the other day, but I don’t know your name.”

“Lisa,” the woman says, somewhat reluctantly. “I don’t know how much longer the dead branch will hold me,” she adds urgently, looking first at the limb under her, and then at the ocean and rocks far below. Staring back up at Sam desperately, a small whimper escapes her and a lone tear spills down her cheek. Even covered in dirt, with her long dark hair a frantic mess…she’s one of the most beautiful women Sam has ever seen. Her large, emerald green eyes are bright and full of intelligence, demanding attention.

“I’m afraid to move,” she tells Sam, which explains why she hasn’t tried to pull herself back up. She’s located just a couple of feet down, but if the branch were to snap under her weight, there’s a good chance she would plummet to her death.

Reaching down as far as she can without slipping off the trail herself, Sam barely touches Lisa’s outstretched hand. Grabbing it firmly, she tries to pull, but it’s immediately obvious that Sam won’t be able to lift her. She tries to get ahold of the black t-shirt Lisa’s wearing, with her other hand, but it’s short-sleeved and she just can’t reach it. Her weight shifting under the strain, Sam starts to panic at the hopeless situation and her own danger.

Suddenly, a much larger hand covers hers in a strong grip, and Sam looks up in surprise at John, who’s stretched out beside her. She was so focused that she hadn’t heard him approach. Then, she’s practically lifted off the ground when Hunter grabs her securely around the waist, preventing her from slipping any farther. Working together, the three of them manage to lift Lisa to safety while Ally and Erica watch anxiously.

Panting from the effort, Sam smiles at her brother and John, who are crouched on either side of her, then turns her attention to Lisa. The older woman is slowly getting to her feet. Having spotted her daughter, she’s intent on reaching her. Without a word to her rescuers, she walks off on wobbly legs. Sam scrambles to follow to make sure she doesn’t fall again.

Did she hit her head or something? Sam wonders, noting her odd, disjointed behavior.

As soon as they’re back on solid ground, Ally releases Erica’s hand, and the little girl runs to her mother. Kneeling down, Lisa gathers her up and starts murmuring to her that everything is okay.

“What happened?” Sam asks gently.

Looking at her again with those piercing green eyes, Lisa glances towards the lighthouse…visible from the bluff, but still a good distance away. Without a word, she stands and clearly forces all emotion from her features. Tugging once at Erica’s hand, they begin to walk away.

“Wait!” Sam persists, remembering what the little girl had said. “What about Carrie? Do you need help finding her? Should we go call someone?”

Pausing, Lisa’s shoulders go rigid before she slowly turns back to face the four kids. Sam notices gold stitching on the front of her shirt that’s caught in a ray of sunlight as she twists. Even from this distance, she recognizes the same odd diagram that was on the paper in the boat. Briefly distracted, Sam almost misses the raw terror that flashes in Lisa’s eyes.

“What are you talking about?” Lisa says evenly, her eyes darting back and forth among them.

“Erica thought Sam was Carrie,” Ally explains, spreading her arms wide in a non-threatening gesture. “She told us that she was trying to find her sister.”

Lisa lets out a big sigh. Was it relief? Hesitating, she looks fleetingly at Erica before seeming to make up her mind.

“You were already told that Erica has…problems. She made it up. There’s no one named Carrie, and we don’t need your help!” Without another word, she yanks at Erica’s hand and then heads back down the trail at a brisk pace.

“But-” Sam persists, before a hand on her arm stops her.

“She obviously doesn’t want to talk to us, Sam,” Ally tells her. “Just let her go.”

“Yeah,” Hunter agrees. “She didn’t even thank us for risking our lives to help her!”

Remembering the green, troubling eyes that first greeted her, Sam isn’t convinced. “There’s something wrong here,” she tries to explain, shaking her head.

“Wrong in her head, you mean,” John counters. “Look, Sam, we offered to help her and she clearly doesn’t want it. For whatever reason, that woman put herself and her little girl in a really dangerous situation. We shouldn’t get involved. We’ll tell your folks what happened when we get back, and let them decide what to do.”

Sam knows that John is right, but there’s still something nagging at her. Something she should remember.

“I think we need to go back now,” Ally suggests. “It’s not like we can go any farther.”

No one disagrees, and they all file back the way they came, each lost in thought. They haven’t gone very far when Sam, who’s in the lead, stops dead in her tracks, causing Ally to walk right into her. Hunter starts to laugh at them, but stops when he sees the serious look on his sister’s face.

“What is it?” he asks, glancing briefly into the shadowy woods.

“Erica wasn’t lying!” Sam blurts out. Seeing her friend’s confused expressions, she rushes to explain. “There’s really is someone named Carrie, and I think she might need our help!”

12 COMPARING NOTES

“I think that’s a pretty big stretch, Sam.”

John is leaning against the trunk of a huge cedar tree, his arms crossed over his chest. Ally and Hunter are sharing a stump, and all of them have been listening to Sam explain about the backpack and papers she had seen while on the boat.

“What?” Sam demands, frustrated. “There’s a girls backpack with the name Carrie on the phone clipped to it, on the boat that Erica’s dad was on! Don’t you think that’s a huge coincidence?”

Sam had nearly forgotten about the bag. She hadn’t even said anything about it to Ally yesterday. Compared to the confrontation with the men on the boat, and fear of getting into trouble, it simply didn’t seem important.

“And what about that logo thing Sam told us about?” Ally presses, turning to look at her brother. “If the same one is on Lisa’s shirt, don’t you think that proves that she’s connected to the boat, too? Erica mistook Sam for this girl, Carrie, so the backpack would be something Sam might have. That means the girl would be around our age.”

“So what exactly do you want to do about it?” Hunter asks, annoyed. “Because as soon as you explain how you saw that backpack, Mom and Dad are going to stop listening. You’re going to get us all sent home, and I’m actually having a good time here. I’d like to still be around on Friday for the sand castle festival. If that lady wants to run around in the woods with her crazy kid, then let her. It’s none of our business!”

All four of them start talking at once, debating both sides of the argument. Sam regrets having shared the encounter on the boat with her brother. She should have known that he’d try to use it against her! “Well, I’m sure that Dad would be thrilled to find out about your midnight swim!” she blurts out at an opportune moment, and then immediately wishes she could take it back when she sees the look on John’s face.

Throwing his hands in the air, John pushes away from the tree to stand his full six feet before bellowing at them all to stop. It has the desired effect. “We’re all right,” he says reasonably. “I agree that the backpack makes the whole thing with Lisa and Erica seem suspicious. Also, that the company shirt that Lisa was wearing might tie her into whatever her husband is doing with those weird foreign guys. But that doesn’t change the fact that our only option right now would be to go to your parents and call Lisa a liar, based on something that Sam saw while sneaking onto a strangers boat without permission. Even if they were able to see past that and listen to us, what could they do? Go over to their house and accuse them of…what? Don’t you see? There’s nothing to accuse them of. To even talk to them about it, would be admitting to trespassing, which really is something you could legally get in trouble for.”

Now that John has broken it all down, Sam is feeling pretty stupid. Thank goodness he was with them so that she didn’t make the huge mistake of running to her parents. He’s absolutely right; the only thing that would happen, is that she would get into trouble. That would mean that Carrie would still be lost, and they wouldn’t be able to help her.

“So now what?” Ally asks quietly, after a long moment of silence.

“Stick with the original plan, and tell my parents exactly what happened out here,” Sam states with a new resolve. “But we’ll be sure to keep an eye out for any clues about this girl Carrie, and maybe try to figure out what kind of business they’re involved in.”

Smiling, Ally is glad to see Sam’s confidence returning. She really is quite smart, and can come up with some amazing ideas.

“How do you plan to do that, Sherlock?” Hunter’s smart remark cuts into her thoughts, making Ally frown at him.

“The way we always do it,” Sam says without hesitation. Looking at Ally, she gives her friend a big wink. “By paying attention.”

***

Sitting in the window of a small ice cream shop, Sam looks out at the throng of tourists walking by. Even though it’s nearly nine o’clock at night, it’s still busy. The boys had agreed to the movies, which they just got out of, and her dad was happy to let them take the van.

Earlier, Ethan and Kathy Wolf had sat and listened in amazement to the story that the kids told them. When they had finished, they were clearly disturbed by it, but not angry. The girls had done what they were told by not going on the trail alone, and they had all helped someone who obviously needed it. They immediately went next door to check on Lisa and Erica, but no one answered.

“I’ll go over tomorrow and visit with Lisa,” Kathy assured them. “Don’t worry. I’ll make sure they’re okay, and maybe I can put her in touch with some resources for getting help with Erica. I still have several contacts at the state level for various programs.”

Disappointed that her parents had failed to focus on the whole ‘lost sister’ issue, Sam couldn’t blame them. They didn’t have a reason to, since they believed Lisa’s explanation that Erica just made it up. Content that her mom would at least talk to Lisa, she had to let it go. Well…with her parents, anyway.

Now, Sam concentrates on the people walking by, but she hasn’t seen the men from the boat, the old man who told them the Captain Wood story, or any young girls that look like her.

Turning her attention back to the conversation at their table, she has to laugh. Hunter and Ally have been discussing the ending to the movie for a grueling fifteen minutes now. It was a cliffhanger and they have differing ideas as to what it meant.

“She clearly got away!” Ally insists, her ice cream dripping down her hand, forgotten. “That’s why they’re already making a second movie, Hunter.”

“No,” Hunter rallies. “The crystal skull was activated and transported all of them! So they-”

“Did you read the books?” John interrupts. When both Hunter and Ally look at him with blank stares, he laughs. “Because I did, and I know what happens in the next movie. But I’m not going to tell you,” he continues, obviously enjoying the frustration he’s causing. “So you’ll either have to wait until next year, or…you can borrow the trilogy from me!”

Shaking her head at the new round of bickering this causes, Sam turns to look back out the large window…and freezes. Directly across the street, Kevin Moore has just stepped away from the post office. There must be post office boxes there, Sam thinks. Their own small town has the same set-up. The little room is basically a wall of small, locked mailboxes, and can be accessed by the owner anytime. Sam imagines the people who live on the boats must get their mail this way.

Elbowing Ally, who’s seated next to her, Sam points towards Mr. Moore silently. They watch as he rips open a large envelope, pulls out a small, bubble-wrapped item, and then tosses the paper into a wastebasket before walking away.

Once he’s out of sight, Sam nudges Ally to scoot over so that she can get out of the seat. “Wait here,” she says quietly.

The boys don’t have a chance to ask her what she’s doing before Sam is out the door and running across the street. They watch in confusion as she walks pointedly to the open-topped garbage can and reaches in.

In less than a minute, Sam is back inside, re-joining them at the table. Her face is flushed, and she’s clearly excited about something. “Our next clue,” she announces matter-of-factly, setting a large brown envelope on the table.

The three other kids all lean forward to get a clear look at the distinct logo in the top corner, in the return address space.

“That’s a double-helix,” John says with certainty. “Well, sort of. It’s a drawing based on the double-helix. That’s DNA,” he explains to the others.

“I remember now!” Sam exclaims. “We studied that in our science class last year. I knew I had seen it somewhere. But yeah, it’s not exactly like it, which is what threw me off. What’s the company name next to it?”

“BioCore Resources,” Hunter reads. Under the heading, the double-helix design blends into the M and W above and below it, which then spell out ‘Meckling and Wesseler Enterprises.’

“There’s no address,” Sam notes, both intrigued and disappointed.

“It’s a bioengineering company in Denmark,” Ally announces, and they all look at her in surprise. Holding her phone up, she shrugs. “They’ve got Wi-Fi here,” she explains happily.

“Let me see that,” John asks, taking the phone from his sister. Reading intently for several minutes, he finally looks up, brows furrowed. “It’s some sort of research facility, but most of their contracts are with governments and aren’t publicized,” he summarizes.

After that bit of interesting information sinks in, they sit looking at each other for a moment before Sam breaks the silence.

“Well,” she whispers, looking around the store with a new sense of danger. “This all just got a whole lot weirder.”

13 MOVING SHADOWS

After several more searches on the internet, Sam, Ally, and their two brothers still lack information. They try rearranging words, and also try adding Lisa and Kevin’s names, but without results.

“If those are even their real names,” Sam ponders, feeling a bit defeated.

“Don’t you think you might be making this into something bigger than it is?” Hunter complains, working on his second sundae. “Maybe they really are just on vacation, and have a kid that likes to run off and make stuff up.”

“Then why would Mr. Moore be meeting up with those foreign men on the boat?” Ally points out. “I bet those guys are from Denmark. There was company stuff all over the inside of that boat.”

Shrugging, Hunter licks the last of the hot fudge from his spoon. “I dunno. Maybe the guy is important and his business partners needed something from him. Who cares?”

Drumming her fingers on the table, Sam considers her brothers comments. “Sometimes,” she explains, “you need to just follow your gut. There’s something wrong here, and I think that the backpack is a key to it all.”

Rolling his eyes, Hunter looks to John for support. To his surprise, the older boy is nodding in agreement with Sam.

“Hunter, your dad invited us to the marina tomorrow. I think we should go, and try to find the boat. We won’t go inside, of course,” he says pointedly to Sam, with a smirk. “But we can snoop around it, and look in the windows if no one is there. Maybe we can find out if there’s been a girl seen on it.”

“And then what?” Hunter continues his campaign against their investigation. “What are we gonna do if we find something?”

“If we can get enough evidence that there’s some sort of foul play, we’ll share it with my parents and let them go to the authorities,” Sam says with conviction.

Coming from another twelve-year-old, this might seem like a ridiculous plan. But this isn’t just any twelve-year-old. This is Samantha Wolf, who has a knack for finding…and solving mysteries.

They make it back to the beach house just before their ten o’clock curfew, the envelope safely folded and tucked in Sam’s back pocket. Ally had been wary of holding onto it, but John reminded them that it was thrown out in a public garbage can, making it okay to keep.

Sam finds herself lying in bed a couple of hours later, reading the words on the envelope for the hundredth time. The sender didn’t put down the name of the recipient, only the post office box number and town. Very cryptic.

Rubbing her eyes, Sam wishes she could fall asleep, but there are too many thoughts racing through her mind. Is there really a missing girl named Carrie? What were Lisa and Erica doing in the woods today? What kind of work does Kevin do for a secret bioengineering company? And why are those men on the boat here?

Finally giving up on sleep, Sam rolls out of bed. Checking first to make sure Ally is actually asleep, she then tiptoes to the French doors. Before she can pull them open, there’s a light knock on the bedroom door. Jumping, she turns in time to see Hunter let himself in.

“Can’t sleep?” She whispers when he joins her at the entrance to the balcony.

“Nah,” he mumbles. “Figured I’d come check things out. See if that crazy sound was out here again.”

Smiling as they step outside, Sam realizes she and Hunter might be more alike than either of them would ever admit. Glancing sideways at her brother, she can barely make out his form as he leans against the banister. Sam suspects that his criticism earlier wasn’t all that sincere.

“No fog,” he observes.

He’s right. There isn’t a hint of the thick condensation that blanketed the beach the past two nights. But the moon hasn’t risen above the Olympic Mountains behind them yet, so it’s still nearly impossible to see anything.

Peering in the general area Sam thinks the lighthouse should be, she doesn’t see any sign of the light, either. Disappointed, her eyes drift to the dark beach. The water, sand, and woods all blend together in the inky blackness.

Wait. What was that?

Straining to focus on an area where Sam thinks she saw movement, she can’t be sure if her eyes are playing tricks on her or not.

No, she’s definitely not imagining it. There’s someone running on the beach! The shadow dances in and out of focus, far down at the other end of the cove.

“Hunter!” Sam shouts, not daring to look away.

“What? I don’t see any floating candles up in your lighthouse.”

“No! There’s someone down on the beach!”

The lone shadow is joined by two other, bigger ones. Sam watches as they weave around each other, then a spray of water erupts near them, and when Sam tries to re-focus on them, they’re gone! Wishing for some moonlight, she waits to see if they reappear, but it’s just too dark. She’s lost them.

“I don’t see anything,” Hunter replies. “I’m going to bed.”

“Wait! Don’t you think it’s odd that someone is down there this late?”

“Not really. John and I were doing the same thing a couple of nights ago, remember?” Hunter’s teeth flash in the dark as he smiles before turning and opening the door. “I dunno if you’re right about any of this,” he adds, pausing. “But if you are, I hope we can help figure it out.”

He’s gone before Sam can answer, but she doesn’t need to. Thankful to have her brother and John here, she turns back to study the beach again. Is there some mystical creature out there? she wonders, a cool breeze working its way through her nightgown. Or do we need to worry more about the people next door?

14 CLUES AND ACCUSATIONS

Although Sam didn’t get much sleep the night before, she’s still the first one up, eager to go examine the beach. It’s a very low tide this morning, but it’s quickly coming back in. Any clues as to who was out there last night could be washed away soon.

It takes a full five minutes of pushing and pulling to coax Ally out of bed. Sam almost leaves without her, but Ally finally stumbles into her shorts, still half-asleep.

“I don’t understand why you think we’ll find something useful,” Ally yawns after Sam explains what happened the night before. Pulling on a matching tank top, Ally throws her messy hair up in a loose bun. “You don’t even know for sure that you saw someone.”

Ignoring her complaints, Sam takes Ally by the shoulders. “We’re collecting sea shells,” she whispers, steering her out of the room and through the silent house.

They pass Sam’s mom, who just sat down in one of the big wicker chairs in the family room with a steaming cup of coffee. The early morning hours are often her only free time from the twins, other than when they take naps.

“You should take a bag!” Kathy calls after them as they scoot past her. “You might find a conch shell with the water this low!”

Although Sam’s family lives near the ocean, it’s in a part of the Puget Sound. The tide rises and falls, of course, but when it retreats, it leaves behind huge beds of mud. It’s nearly impossible to do anything there other than dig for clams. It’s a treat to be out near the open ocean now, with bigger waves and nice sand to search for shells.

“Thanks, Mom!” Sam says, turning back to grab a plastic grocery sack off the kitchen counter. “We won’t be too long. I’ll help feed Tabby and Addy when we get back.”

Her mom grimaces at her use of the nicknames, but doesn’t comment. Sam’s parents have a thing with naming them after their grandparents. That’s fine, except for the fact that the names are very formal. Sam insists on going by the shorter version of her own name, but usually respects her mom’s wishes for calling the twins by their proper ones. Unless, such as now, she’s in a hurry and doesn’t have time to protest. Besides, she thinks the rhyming names are cute.

Over half an hour later, they reach the general area where Sam thought she saw the shadows. They could have gotten there sooner, but ornate shells, littering the ground. distracted them. With their bag half full, they make their way along the empty stretch of beach. They’ve only encountered a handful of people, in spite of the prime beachcombing conditions. The tide is swiftly coming in now, causing Sam to rush Ally along.

“Okay, so now what?” Ally questions, jumping forward when a particularly large wave nips at her heels. The morning is still cool and she doesn’t want to get wet.

Unsure how to answer, Sam walks a bit farther before throwing her hands up in frustration and turning back to her friend.

“I don’t know, Ally! I guess that maybe I’m being stupid for thinking we might actually find something. Like they’re going to leave us a sign or something that says ‘look here.’”

“What about ‘help?’” Ally says excitedly.

“Huh?”

“No! I mean a sign that says ‘help’!” Ally explains, still not making any sense. When Sam just stares at her, she rolls her eyes and points behind her. “Look!”

Following Ally’s outstretched hand, Sam searches the sand near her feet and then gasps in surprise. Sure enough, scrawled into the sand are big capital letters: H  E  L  P.

“Oh my gosh!” she shouts. “This had to have been made by whoever I saw last night. We got out here right after sunrise and there wasn’t anyone out this far.”

“Or else it was written earlier in the day yesterday,” Ally suggests, studying the words.

Watching the water wash away the lower end of the P, Sam straightens up abruptly. “No. It had to have been last night. The tide didn’t go out until well after dark. This was under water until then…like it’s going to be again in just a little bit,” she adds, realizing that the evidence is being rapidly erased. “There’s no way to go get my mom and show her before it’s gone!” she moans, wishing they had gotten out here sooner.

As a new wave bubbles up to the bottom edge of the E, Ally shouts at Sam to step back. “I can take a picture of it!” she tells her, producing the ever-present cell phone from her back pocket.

Relieved to have a way to preserve the message, Sam looks around for anything else suspicious while Ally gets several shots of it. Coming up empty-handed, Sam joins Ally in watching the last of the letters get reclaimed by the ocean. With nothing more to do, they head back to the beach house.

Sam can tell right away that something is wrong when they approach the deck where her mom is standing, obviously waiting for them. She’s got her arms crossed and a troubled expression clouds her face. “I need to have a talk with you, girls,” she says, her tone serious.

Glancing uneasily at each other, Sam and Ally climb the stairs and leave the smelly bag of shells outside, then follow Kathy into the family room. The house is quiet, and Sam figures her dad and the boys have already left for the marina, and the twins are sleeping in.

Did Mr. Moore or the harbormaster make a complaint about us? Sam wonders, the all too familiar feeling of guilt welling up inside her.

“Lisa Moore saw me outside drinking my coffee, and came over to speak with me,” Sam’s mother begins, eyeing them both closely. When neither girl says anything, she continues. “Her version of the story is much different than yours. Apparently, she and Erica saw you two enter the woods earlier in the day and that’s what compelled her to create the story of a lost sister that looked like you, Sam. Well, that and a cartoon she had just watched. She tends to confuse reality and make-believe, I guess.”

Sam is trying to digest what her mom just said. “Wait,” she cries in alarm. “Lisa told you that she saw us go into the woods before them? That’s a lie!”

Holding up a hand, Kathy stops the expected tirade. “Let me finish,” she says evenly, leaving no room for discussion. “Shortly after watching you disappeared onto the trail, Erica snuck out when she was supposed to be down for a nap. Lisa finally found her a short distance into the woods, after locating a dropped hairband near the trailhead. It was a nice walk, so she decided to explore it further with Erica. That was when she slipped. She wants to thank for helping her. However,” Kathy continues, “she also made it clear that she has no interest in speaking further with me, or in having you two around Erica.”

“Mom, she’s lying about seeing us and she’s totally downplaying what happened. She didn’t just ‘slip.’ She almost died!”

“I know, Sam. I already spoke with the boys about it and they swear that you two were on the beach the whole time and that they followed  you to the trail, and then had to talk you into going on the hike. They confirmed that Erica and Lisa had to have gone in there quite some time before the rest of you. I have no idea why she would bend the truth like this, but I think it best that we all steer clear of them from now on. Understand?”

Hesitating, Sam looks at Ally seated silently beside her, firmly gripping her phone, the picture of the word ‘help’ still lit up on the screen.

“But what if Erica wasn’t making it all up?” she asks cautiously, peering sideways at her mom.

“Sam…,” Kathy says firmly. “Do not start. I mean it. While Lisa’s response to her daughter’s problems is troubling, I won’t let you turn this into something it’s not.”

“Shouldn’t we at least consider the possibility that Carrie might be real? Or that she could need our help?” Glancing back at the phone, Sam watches the picture go dark, perhaps a sign that now isn’t the time to bring it up.

Kathy covers her face with her hands, and speaks through her fingers. “No. We shouldn’t, Sam.” She utters the words tiredly, rather than with anger. Coming to what appears to be a hard decision, she slides her hands up through her hair before leveling both girls with a hard stare. “Your father and I talked about this before he left for the day. We both agree that we made it clear before coming here that we weren’t going to put up with any…unacceptable behavior. You aren’t going to get another warning about this. Push the issue, and I’m taking you home.”

Sam watches Ally slowly put the phone with the incriminating photo back into her pocket. Swallowing hard, Sam reaches for her friend’s hand and gives it a reassuring squeeze.

“Okay, Mom.” Forcing the expected answer, she hopes it sounds sincere. It’s clear now that they’re on their own.

15 MAYBE BROTHERS AREN’T SO BAD AFTER ALL

John stands in a wide stance on the dock, shading his eyes in order to get a good look at the suspicious boat. He and Hunter have just completed the guided tour of the larger fishing vessel with Ethan. It didn’t last nearly as long as the same tour did with Sam and Ally, who asked a ton of questions. While he enjoys boats and all, he just isn’t that interested in how every little thing on them works.

What he is interested in is getting closer to their current target. They’ve cautiously circled around the marina from a distance, making sure there isn’t any obvious activity onboard the boat in question. They haven’t seen anyone come or go, but there could still be someone inside.

They can’t afford to have Mr. Moore or the other thugs complain about them. Sam and Hunter’s parents are already on edge after Lisa Moore came over, giving her lame excuse and lies. John understands why they want to stay out of it, and not get involved…but to be honest, he’s beginning to see how Sam and his sister get themselves caught up in this stuff. It’s kinda exciting. Hunter, on the other hand, doesn’t appear to share his enthusiasm.

“Can we get outta here now?” Hunter says earnestly, looking over his shoulder for the third time. “It’s not like we’re going to be able to learn anything that could help. This is stupid.”

Ignoring him, John silently approaches the bow and tries to read the name painted boldly across the front. “Her Vaere Drager. I wonder what that means,” he mumbles under his breath.

“I’m going to peek in the window real quick,” John tells Hunter, deciding to look the name up later. Unaware how closely he’s mimicking Sam, he moves towards the nearest portal. Before Hunter can object, John leans out and cups his hands to either side of the small, round glass.

It’s dark inside, but he can still make out the room. It’s very close to how Sam described it, except that the table is cleared of everything but a torn sheet of bubble wrap. There’s no sign of the laptops, paper, or backpack. Disappointed, he pushes away from the boat and then crosses his arms over his chest, thinking about the situation.

“Well?” Hunter asks impatiently. “What’d you see?”

“Not much,” John says quietly as he turns away abruptly. Making his way along the length of the boat, he looks around again, then peers into the last window on the exposed side.

The view through the porthole is partially blocked by a curtain, but he can still see beyond it, into a small bedroom. The bed is unmade and there are towels and blankets strewn across the floor…and in the far corner, a backpack. A tie-dyed backpack with what looks like a phone case hanging off it. It’s too dark to see any writing on it, but he’s certain it’s the same one Sam tripped over.

“Bingo!” John says triumphantly, but then frowns again when he turns to Hunter. “I can see the backpack your sister told us about, but that’s pretty much it. No one’s in there, and there’s no real evidence someone is staying there, just a bunch of towels and blankets.

“Whatchya doin’?” A small voice behind them makes the boys jump. They both stumble guiltily away from the boat.

Hunter’s convinced he’s about to have a heart attack, but then breaks out laughing when he sees their accuser. Hardly more than three feet tall, the small boy has a head full of tight, blonde curls. His vivid blue eyes are wide and sparkling with curiosity. Wiping at his runny nose with a small fist, he continues to look back and forth between the older boys, seemingly unoffended by the laughter.

“We’re just admiring this cool boat,” John says politely, squatting down so that he’s eye level with the little boy. “My name is John, what’s yours?”

“Bucky,” he says happily, rocking back on his heels. “My momma says it’s not polite to look in people’s windows,” he adds in a hushed voice. “But don’t worry, I won’t tell no one.”

Chuckling, John glances at Hunter and raises his eyebrows. “Thanks, Bucky,” he says, turning back to him. “I’m wondering if you’ve ever seen a girl on this boat. Her name is Carrie.”

Scrunching up his nose so tight that John thinks it must hurt, Bucky shakes his head dramatically. “Nope! Just those mean guys who yelled at me.” He hugs himself at the memory. “Told me to mind my own business. Pappa says I gotta stay away from them. They don’t act normal.  They wake me up almost every night, ‘cause they go someplace late and don’t come back sometimes until I’m eating breakfast. They’re weird.”

Not convinced that Bucky ever took a breath while he was talking, John breaks into a wide smile. This is good stuff.

“That is weird, Bucky. They ever have anyone with them?”

“Nah…I just only seen the four of them.”

“Four?” Hunter echoes, sharing a surprised look with John. It’s safe to assume that the third guy would be Kevin Moore, but what about the fourth? “Are you sure?”

“Uh-huh,” Bucky drawls. “I know how many four is. I can count to ten! They all talk real funny, except for the one ‘merican. Momma says it’s ‘cause they’re from a different… umm…whatchya call those places?”

“A different country?” John suggests good-naturedly.

“Yeah! That’s it. A different country. I still think they’re mean, though. I don’t care if it’s ‘cause they’re from….umm…someplace else.”

“Bucky!” a voice calls sharply. Looking for the source, John finds a young woman standing in the bow of the boat that’s docked next to Her Vare Drager. “Come back here and stop bothering those young men.”

“Bye!” Bucky says cheerfully, obviously used to being called away from strangers. He’s skipping across the dock before either boy has a chance to say goodbye.

Standing up, John suddenly finds himself as eager as Hunter to put some distance between themselves and this place. Mr. Wolf was happy to let them take the van, so they didn’t have to stay at the marina all day. They just have to come back later to pick him up.

“Let’s go get some lunch at the restaurant before going back to the house,” John says. “I’ll bet there’s Wi-Fi in there that we can use.”

“Why do we need Wi-Fi?” Hunter asks, already making his way back towards the buildings.

“Because I’ve got my tablet. I brought it to read books on, but I can use it to search for some more info on this bioengineering company. The search function is a lot easier to use than the one on Ally’s phone. Plus, we can try and figure out what the name of the boat means.”

“Why does that matter?” Hunter wants to know. They’ve stopped in the shadow of the restaurant, and can finally face each other without being blinded by the harsh sunlight.

“The name chosen for a boat usually holds some form of significance,” John explains. “You should know that, Hunter. Hasn’t your dad talked about it?”

Shrugging, Hunter looks a bit chastised. “Probably. I guess I don’t always pay attention.”

“Well, I read about it a couple years ago. And if these guys are from Denmark, then it’s probably even more likely. I think that your sister might be right,” he continues, the change in subject catching Hunter off guard.

“Right about what?” Hunter wants to know.

“That something isn’t right here.” A lone cry of a bald eagle circling overhead pierces the air, adding a sense of urgency to the observation. “We need to figure out what it is.”

16 HERE BE DRAGONS

“Here Be Dragons. What does that mean?” Ally asks her brother. “And how did you figure it out?”

The four of them are gathered in the back of the house, in the boys’ room, under the guise of playing video games. After sharing their encounter with Bucky, and what they did and did not see inside the boat, the boys then explained their findings on the name.

“Well, first I just tried a search for the name, but that didn’t lead anywhere,” John tells her. “Then, I figured that since the company is based in Denmark, that I should try a translation using the common language there, which turns out to be Danish. It was easy then to just plug it into the online program.”

“Very smart,” Sam says approvingly, just a little bit disappointed that she hadn’t been in on it. “I know I’ve heard that before, but I can’t remember where.”

“It’s been used in lots of things,” John confirms. “But the original meaning was on old maps.”

“Old maps?” Ally questions. “What kind of maps?”

“It goes back to medieval times,” John tells them. “It means that it’s dangerous or unexplored territory. On some of the oldest maps recovered, they put the pictures of dragons and sea serpents in the regions that were unknown, as a warning.”

“So these guys like to brag about being dangerous.” Hunter has been pretending to be engrossed in the video game he’s playing, but Sam knows that he’s just as interested as the rest of them. Putting the controller down now, he turns around to look at them. “Doesn’t that bother any of you?”

“I’m not convinced that’s why they chose it,” Sam counters, not really answering her brother’s question. When he raises his eyebrows at her, she searches for the best way to explain her thoughts. “I think we’re missing the bigger picture here,” she finally states, including John and Ally in her observation. “John, you said you found out some more stuff about BioCore Resources?”

“Yeah…,” he confirms, pulling out a folded napkin from his back pocket. It was the only thing available to write on at the restaurant.

“It was a lot easier to try some different searches with my tablet, and the Wi-Fi was much faster there than in that ice cream shop. It isn’t much, but aside from the secret government contracts, they also manufacture vaccines for WHO, the World Health Organization. I only found that out because of an article on the company’s CEO, or Chief Executive Officer. He’s part of a special vaccine board for the non-profit group, and has been active in some programs going into poorer countries. There was a scandal last year, where he was accused of having some ulterior motives. That rather than being a humanitarian, he was using the people as guinea pigs.

“Apparently, one of the biggest hang-ups in producing vaccines, or any sort of medicine, is getting to the point of doing human trials. Especially in the developed countries, where they make the people who create it jump through a bunch of hoops before allowing them to test it out on real people. He got around that by being put in charge of this program, and then sending out his own unfinished vaccines to the un-monitored countries. They tested it on unsuspecting people, improved it, and then turned around and sold it for a profit of billions of dollars.”

“How could they get away with that?” Ally demands, arms crossed angrily.

“They shouldn’t have, but they did,” John replies. “They’re smart, and knew exactly what they were doing. While it was unethical and wrong, nothing they did was illegal. At least, not in the countries they were doing it in. Some of the claims couldn’t be proven, so it never went anywhere legally. I guess the big pharmaceutical companies don’t care, because they keep buying their stuff. It’s all about the money. But…I found some other things, too. It’s a bit more controversial. One doctor over in Africa wrote a paper claiming that BioCore wasn’t just testing vaccines. He believed that they were creating something much more dangerous. I only found the one article though, and then nothing else.”

Nodding her head as if expecting it, Sam claps her hands together. “That’s it!” she exclaims, “That’s what the name on the boat means!”

“Sam, what are you talking about?” Hunter asks in frustration. Sometimes he just can’t figure out how his sister’s brain works, and it drives him crazy.

“It isn’t because the people in the boat are dangerous,” she says, unfazed by her brothers tone. “It means that the kind of work the company does is dangerous and uncharted. What if the vaccine or drug, or whatever it is they’re creating, is something never seen before and considered dangerous?” Sam asks, her eyes wide. “Kevin and Lisa must both work for this company. But why are they here in Wood’s Cove? And I have no idea why Erica and her missing sister, Carrie, would be involved,” she adds, a bit deflated.

“Whoa…,” John says, holding his hands out defensively and grinning. “We might be getting ahead of ourselves here. I admit that this new info makes this company a lot more suspicious, but there’s a good chance that it doesn’t have anything to do with what’s going on here. Heck, we don’t even know if those rumors are true!”

“But what about the missing, fourth man that Bucky saw?” Sam presses, refusing to let it go. “And the late nightly trips that the boat makes? They have to be going to the lighthouse! I’ll bet that the light I’ve seen is from them.”

“That’s another big leap to make,” John says, his frown deepening. “We’ve never even seen a boat out there!”

“Well, I think that Sam is right about the boat’s name,” Ally says, coming to her friend’s defense. “And there’s enough evidence to link it, Kevin, and those other guys to BioCore Resources. Since they only do secret work for governments, and make vaccines, and they’re getting stuff mailed to them here from the company in Denmark, then it’s safe to assume that they’re up to something.”

“Or they could be on vacation,” Hunter suggests, back to playing his game. “I’m sure that even mad scientists have to take a break sometime.”

In spite of wanting to be mad at Hunter’s lack of enthusiasm, Sam laughs. He could very well be right. But that little nagging voice in the back of her head won’t allow her to believe it.

***

Once again, it’s a fogless night. The four of them are huddled on the small deck, patiently watching the dark ocean for any signs of the gathering mist. They’ve been out there for over half an hour already, and Sam is cold, tired, and very frustrated.

“Can we go back inside now?” Hunter asks, visibly shivering.

Gripping the railing tightly, Sam leans back from it and gazes up at the endless twinkling stars above them. Maybe Hunter is right, she thinks forlornly. I might be trying too hard this time to find a mystery where there really isn’t one.

“There obviously isn’t going to be any fog,” John observes. “I vote we go to bed before your mom and dad discover we aren’t in our rooms, and come yell at us.”

The two boys begin their retreat as Sam pulls herself back up to look in the direction of the lighthouse. “Wait!” she cries. “Look at the lighthouse!”

Joining her again, they strain to see what she’s all excited about. Sure enough, in the distance is a weak light, clearly visible above the cliffs. As they watch, it blinks out and then back again.

“Odd,” John murmurs, more to himself than anyone else.

The light continues to flicker, and it’s quickly apparent that it’s a consistent pattern.

“Why is it doing that?” Ally asks, both confused and enthralled at the same time.

“It wasn’t doing that the last time I saw it,” Sam tells her friends. “What do you think it means?”

“That someone is using a cheap candle?” Hunter suggests, always the comic.

“It’s Morse code!” John exclaims, tapping out the rhythm on the bannister. “Three quick flashes, three slow ones, and then three fast ones again: SOS. It’s the universal message for distress!”

He’s right, Sam realizes, as she watches the message repeat one more time. “How in the world do you know that?”

“Scouts,” John replies. “It’s pretty much standard learning for any kind of survival training.”

“What are we going to do?” Ally demands, more concerned with how to handle the distress call.

“We’ve got to go get my parents,” Sam says without hesitation. “Then they’ll have to believe us!”

“Good luck with that,” Hunter says flatly.

“Why do you always have to be so negative?” Sam questions, going to the door. “Can’t you just agree with me for once?”

“I’d love to, but I don’t think our parents are going to believe anything, because now the light stopped.”

Her hopes crashing, Sam spins back and searches frantically for the flashing message….but Hunter is right, it’s gone. Dejected, she flops down on one of the two folding chairs, and covers her face with her hands. “They’ll never believe it,” she says, her voice muffled. “If I go in there and try to convince them that somehow there is a girl name Carrie in the lighthouse signaling us for help…I’ll be going home in the morning.” Looking up, she struggles to see their faces in the faint starlight. “And then no one will help Carrie, or whoever it is that’s out there!”

“Then we have to go there ourselves,” Ally says with surprising resolve. Normally, she’s the one who needs to be persuaded to do anything dangerous or against the rules.

“How?” Hunter asks. “The trail is gone. Plus, we don’t even know that the signal is real. I mean, it could just be some kids that think it’s funny….you know, scare the tourists with the whole ‘ghost in the tower’ thing.”

“The only way we can know for sure is to check,” Sam says. “At least get close enough to hear any calls for help. I promise to let it go if we don’t find her there, ok?”

Hunter and John lean towards each other and talk quietly for a moment, before turning back to Sam and Ally.

“Okay,” John agrees. “But only if it isn’t dangerous, and we can do it during the day, without lying about it.”

“The old man who told us the story said that there’s a way to get there by boat,” Sam answers, her spirits already lifting. “We just have to go back, find him, and convince him to tell us how.”

17 CAPTAIN BROWN

The next morning, they are in Wood’s Cove before nine a.m. They didn’t even have to come up with an excuse. Turns out, they have to pre-register for the sand castle contest happening early that afternoon, and the booth is in the town center.

After standing in line briefly with some sunburned tourists with cheap gift-shop sand buckets, they sign up, then slowly wander around the boardwalk in front of the stores.

Sam bites nervously at her already short nails, worrying that the old man won’t show up. After forty minutes, they are all hot and getting hungry. This is the first time that Sam hasn’t been sure about what to do. With their other mysteries, it’s always been so clear.

It’s hard to believe that it’s already Friday. So not only does Sam feel time slipping away because of the distress call last night…but they have to go home in a couple of days. Groaning in frustration, she wipes the sweat off her forehead and flops down on a bench.

“You’re looking like you lost your best friend there, missy.” Leaping to her feet, Sam spins around eagerly to face the man she’s been searching for. He’s wearing the same dirty clothes as before. Leaning against a lamp post, he has the unlit pipe sticking out of his mouth, bobbing up and down in time to his laughter.

“Ally!” Sam calls out, without looking around for her friend. She’s afraid the old storyteller will disappear if she turns away. Ally, John, and Hunter are soon beside her. As she goes to introduce them, Sam realizes she doesn’t even know the man’s name.

“Captain Brown, at your service,” he announces when asked, with the typical dramatic flair the girls have grown accustomed to. “One of the last real sea captains left in this town,” he adds somewhat grudgingly.

“It’s an honor to meet you, sir,” John says politely, shaking the man’s old, weathered hand. “My name is John Parker. You’ve already met my sister, Allyson. This here is Hunter Wolf, Sam’s brother.”

Turning his attention to Hunter, Captain Brown scrutinizes him for some time before breaking out in a fresh smile. “Hello, lad. Did you come to hear the Wood’s Cove story?” he asks a bit eagerly.

“Actually,” Sam interrupts, stepping around the bench so she can stand next to the captain. “We were looking for you for another reason.”

Raising his bushy eyebrows questioningly, Captain Brown tilts his grizzled head and looks at each of them in turn. “What other purpose could you possibly have for an old captain?” he asks suspiciously, pulling absently at his long beard.

“We’re hoping you can tell us how to get to the lighthouse,” Sam explains. “You said before that you can get there by boat. I figure there must be a special place to go, because the whole thing looks like a cliff.”

Already shaking his head, Captain Brown spits out his pipe and waves it at them earnestly. “I told you before that the place is dangerous!” he barks. “Besides, I haven’t used my rowboat for years and you two girls have no business trying to handle it.”

“A rowboat?” Ally repeats, looking at Sam with a smile.

“But we won’t be by ourselves!” Sam rushes to say, making a note of Ally’s observation. “Our brothers would be with us. My parents won’t allow us on the trails without them.”

“I can handle just about any rowboat, sir,” John adds convincingly.

“And we aren’t going to go inside the lighthouse,” Sam continues when the older man seems to hesitate. “We’re just looking for something fun to do this afternoon, and thought it would be neat to see it up close.”

“You boys would be with them?” Captain Brown finally asks, after drumming his chin thoughtfully for a full minute.

When John and Hunter nod in response, the old man lets out a deep sigh, coming to a decision.

“About a mile up the trail that starts at the beach, there’s a smaller path that veers down towards the water. You have to watch for it, because it hasn’t been used in a long time. It’s marked by a large tree that was struck by lightning over twenty years ago.”

“Oh, I remember seeing that!” Sam shouts. “We’ve been on the main trail already.”

“Don’t interrupt me, child. I’ll forget what I was saying.”

Sam apologizes and then has to wait another minute while the captain gathers his thoughts together again.

“That trail ends at a small, hidden cove. It’s flooded when the tide is up, but nearly dry when it’s out. That’s when you have to go…at low tide. It’s the only way that you can get to the lighthouse. Stay close to shore, just beyond the breakers. When you see two tall rocks shaped like triangles touching at the top, that’s where you need to go. These are under water at high tide, but when it’s low, you can pass right through them, like a tunnel. Beyond them is a protected spot to pull the boat up and go to shore. The trail leading up is steep and rocky, so be cautious. You mustn’t stay once the tide turns, or you’ll be stuck. Do you understand that? Because I won’t be held responsible for any foolishness on your part.”

“We promise that we’ll be careful!” Sam assures him, trying not to sound too excited. “And we’ll take good care of your boat.”

“It’s not the boat I’m concerned about,” he mumbles, already shuffling away. “Beware of Wood’s Sea Creature!” he adds over his shoulder. “He’s always watching his cove.”

***

The Sand Castle Festival is a grand affair, with everything from cotton candy vendors, to paragliding rides off jet skis. Although they begged their parents endlessly, Sam and Hunter were forced to watch the daredevils, rather than participate.

“You couldn’t pay me to do that!” Ally gasps as yet another person is hauled into the air like a kite. The two girls are sitting on top of what is left of their attempt at a sand sculpture. Thinking it would be a popular concept, they had tried to make a replica of the lighthouse. But they underestimated the weight of the sand. When their masterpiece was only half built, it collapsed in on itself. Rather than being upset, they laughed at themselves.

Realizing they didn’t have enough time to create anything before the three o’clock deadline, they decided to make a throne out of it. It’s working rather well in that capacity, giving them a great view of the festivities. Sam spots her mom and the twins at the far end. The two little girls are carrying huge globs of spun sugar, their faces and hands covered with it.

There are at least twenty teams working under the hot sun, with only a few minutes left to go in the contest. Sam is very impressed with John and Hunter’s entry. When John asked to borrow her small wooden carving of the sea creature earlier, she should have known better. He’s using it now as a guide to carving out their masterpiece.

“Where did your brother learn how to do that?” Sam asks Ally.

“Who knows? Probably some random sand castle class in Scouts,” Ally adds sarcastically. “Or maybe it’s a natural talent. He’s good at working with clay, too. You should have seen the sculpture he did in his pottery class last year at high school. I obviously missed out on that artistic trait.”

Laughing, Sam starts burying their feet in the cooler, damp sand, but then stops when she sees a familiar form standing close by. “Erica!” she exclaims, sitting up straight and shielding her eyes from the sun.

The little girl spins towards her, startled. When she sees Sam and Ally, her small mouth forms an o, and her eyes register alarm. Without a word, she takes off towards the water and quickly runs in up to her waist before being knocked down by an incoming wave.

Lunging forward, Sam is momentarily tripped up by the sand covering her feet, and she flails her arms to keep her balance. Ally has better luck and reaches Erica before Sam. Scooping her up under the arms as a wave begins to cover her blonde head, Ally hauls her out of the water just in time. Coughing and sputtering, Erica begins to cry.

“What are you doing? Get away from her!”

Startled, Ally turns and quickly sets Erica on the ground, in front of Kevin. Looking awkward in his street clothes among all of the beachgoers, he picks Erica up and scowls at both Ally and Sam. “You’ve been asked before not to bother my daughter,” he says angrily, stepping away from them.

“We weren’t bothering her!” Sam argues. “She just ran past us and out into the water. You’re lucky that Ally was so quick.”

Unfazed by her comment, Kevin turns to go.

“I don’t wanna go with you!” Erica hollers, wiggling to get out of his grasp. “I want my mom! I want Carrie!”

Ignoring her pleas, he shushes her and stomps back through the sand, towards their house.

Looking at Ally in frustration, Sam then turns her attention to the receding ocean and the distant lighthouse.

We’re coming soon, Carrie, she promises, more sure now than ever that the missing girl is real.

18 NO TURNING BACK NOW

John and Hunter take fourth place in the sand castle contest, and are proudly wearing their victory t-shirts when they meet up with the girls at the trailhead. It’s a little past four and the tide is getting close to its lowest point. They got permission to go on the trail after promising to stay away from the cliff, so Sam’s parents know where they’re going. She’s feeling a bit guilty about the obvious omission of their visit to the lighthouse, but it’s necessary in order for their plan to work.

“Nice shirts,” Ally laughs, holding her sides. Sam was too anxious to pay attention, but now that Ally points it out, she has to agree that they’re silly. On the front is the lighthouse, a murky light shining out from the top. The back of the shirt says ‘Wood’s Cove Annual Sandcastle Festival, 2015’ and the word, ‘Winner!’ in bold letters. Underneath that is a cartoonish picture of the Wood Cove Sea Monster.

“Thanks,” John says, leading the way. Smoothing out the wrinkles, he then tugs at the hem of the shirt. “I think it brings out the blue in my eyes.”

“At least we actually made a sandcastle,” Hunter adds, not taking the joking as well as John.

“I thought you should have gotten third.” Sam surprises her brother with the compliment, and he hesitates, unsure of how to respond. “I heard some people talking about it, and I guess that the mayor’s kid made the shipwreck that won. It was good, but not as good as your monster.”

They’ve gone a ways up the trail by now, and Hunter stops for a moment to look at his sister. “Really?” he asks, all mocking aside.

“Uh-huh,” Sam confirms. “But I think the only other thing third place got that you didn’t, were white ribbons.”

“We don’t need no stinkin’ ribbons,” Hunter says in his best cowboy voice, hopping over a fallen log. “We got these awesome shirts!”

They all keep up the nervous banter and senseless conversation until they reach the tree that was struck by lightning. Now that they’re at the fork, their moods change and they become more serious. With silent looks of confirmation, they take the overgrown trail to the left.

Pushing through the underbrush, Ally is the last to head into the denser forest, and she watches the others with interest. She doesn’t understand how they can all seem so relaxed, because she’s terrified.

“You okay, Ally?” Sam is holding back a long branch to prevent it from snapping at her friend. She can see the fear on her face.

“Well…let’s see,” Ally states, crossing her arms over her chest. “We’re in the middle of the woods, trying to find a boat that we don’t even know will still float, to take out into the ocean to a secret location we might not be able to find. Once there, our goal is to figure out if there is a girl being held against her will by some big scary guys inside a falling down, haunted lighthouse. Why wouldn’t I be okay?”

Sam can’t stop herself from smiling. “I guess I can see your point. Want to go back?”

Ally knows that Sam means it. She would never try to make her do something she didn’t want to, even if it were important to her. But it’s not like they’re looking for a lost dog. Ally would always wonder about the girl Carrie, and if she really existed, if they don’t find out for themselves.

“And miss out on all the fun?” Ally finally answers, taking the branch from Sam’s hand so she can walk past it. “Never!”

Sam’s smile broadens and her pace quickens so that they can catch up with the boys. The twinge of excitement that had been brewing slowly starts to spread, giving her an extra burst of energy. She knows that they’re close to solving this mystery. Now they just have to find that boat!

It isn’t long before they reach a small clearing, and on the other side, they discover the marshy cove that Captain Brown described. It’s obvious by the muddy grass that there’s a much larger area of water when the tide is up, but right now, they’ll have to walk through the muck before getting to where it’s deep enough to float a boat. However, there is no boat in sight.

“Where is it?” Sam cries desperately, her hopes fading.

“Hold on,” John urges, looking around slowly. “If it’s really been a few years since anyone has been here, it could be covered up. We should spread out and look along the edge, where it would be tied up.”

Following his directions, they start making their way clumsily through the overgrown brush and weeds, their feet getting sucked down into the swampy ground. After ten minutes, Sam is on the verge of tears, but then Hunter suddenly whoops triumphantly!

“I found it!” he shouts, waving his arms over his head. He’s on the far end of the open space, underneath some trees so that they can hardly see him. Rushing over, the four of them work together to pull the vines, weeds and debris from the old, wooden boat.

Once they’re done, what’s revealed isn’t that impressive. “Do you think it’ll float?” Sam asks John, not feeling very optimistic.

“I don’t see any holes in it,” John replies. “These old things can go through a lot and still be seaworthy. Come on!” he orders, grabbing an end. “Let’s drag it out.”

It takes several long minutes to get the boat out into the water, and Sam is beginning to worry about the time. The tide has to be all the way out by now and they won’t have that long before it starts to turn back again. She can see the open ocean just beyond the trees overhanging the entrance into their small hideout, and for the first time she questions their plan. She’s so distracted by the thought that she hardly notices that the boat is floating.

“It works!” Ally gasps in surprise. “I don’t see any water inside of it.”

“And there are even a couple of solid oars,” Hunter adds, holding them up for emphasis.

“We have to go now, if we’re going to do this,” John states, thinking the same thing as Sam. “We don’t have much time before the tide comes in and blocks the way.”

It takes some tricky maneuvering, but they manage to drag the decent sized boat out. It’s big enough for four people, so they all just fit. It’s a good thing both of the boys are good at rowing, because navigating is no easy task. Fortunately, they’re in a protected spot, so there are just some large swells to get over, rather than breakers. It’s surprising how fast they move, with the outgoing tide helping them along. In less than fifteen minutes, they're searching the coastline for the telltale triangle shaped rocks.

“There!” Sam calls out, pointing towards the impossible-to-miss rocks. Jutting up dramatically from the water, they form a perfectly sized tunnel. The old rowboat easily slips through.

Once on the other side, they find themselves in a large, protected space. It’s basically a bowl made of rock, and there is only one area that they can pull the boat up on. Sam shudders at the thought of what would happen to anyone caught there during high tide.

They carefully pick their way over the wet slippery rocks, and up the only path available to the top. Sam breaths a huge sigh of relief as she feels the fresh wind on her face when she reaches the surface. Turning, she grabs Ally’s hand and helps pull her up beside her. Together, the four of them look in triumph at the lighthouse that towers over them.

“Now what?” Hunter asks, straining to see the top of the huge structure less than fifty feet away.

“Now we find out if Carrie is real, and if she’s in there,” Sam declares.

“I’m afraid I will have to change your plans!”

Ally cries out at the voice behind them, and all four kids spin as one to face the man standing there. Sam has never seen him before, but he has the same large build and menacing look as the other two on the boat. The one big difference is that he’s holding a gun. And it’s pointed right at them!

19 DEAD MAN’S POINT

“You will come with me!” the man barks, his accent very thick. Pointing at an old wooden building behind him with his free hand, he makes a sweeping gesture with the gun, guiding them towards it. The shed had been at their backs so they didn’t notice it, and the man had obviously come from there. Sam could kick herself for not being more cautious, but the claustrophobia she’d been feeling in the confining rock formation had distracted her.

When the four kids don’t immediately follow his command, their captor gets red in the face and takes a menacing step towards them.

“Do you not understand your situation?” he yells, waving the gun for emphasis. He mutters something in a foreign language before coming up with the words in English. “You will do as you are told. Now!” Spittle flies from his mouth and his eyes widen further, giving him a wild look. This kicks them into motion, and John is the first to move, stepping in front of Sam and Ally with his arms open wide in a protective gesture.

“Okay, okay,” he says quietly, the waver in his voice the only real evidence of his fear. “We’re going.”

Numbly, they file inside the dark building and turn to face the man as he closes the door loudly behind them. Ally has taken hold of Sam’s arm in a desperate, vice-like grip and won’t let go. Although this isn’t the first time they’ve had a gun pointed at them, that does nothing to weaken the cold claws of fear. Sam can barely breathe.

“Sit against that wall,” the man orders, nodding his head towards the other side of the room. “And be quiet.”

While John is nearly as tall as the older man, he’s a good fifty pounds lighter and would be no match in a fight, even if there weren’t a gun involved. They could probably overpower him if they all rushed him at the same time…but there is a gun, so they have no other choice than to do what they’re told.

Sam’s mind races as she settles down onto the hard wood floor. This guy doesn’t know who they are. She’s never seen him before, but figures he must be the fourth man that the little boy told John and Hunter about. As far as he knows, they’re just some kids out snooping around, except for what he heard them say. She might still be able to talk her way out of it.

“We’re really sorry for trespassing, mister!” she blurts out, allowing real tears to blur her vision.

When he turns his attention to her, Sam bravely continues. “We didn’t know we weren’t allowed on this property. You see, we’re renting one of the beach houses, and we met a girl named Carrie that was staying next door. I guess she ran away or something, because she’s been missing for a while now. We just thought she might be hiding out here so we wanted to check. We’ll never come back, though,” she rushes on.

She can see him hesitating and the gun lowers ever so slightly. “I promise! Our parents would kill us if they knew we were trespassing!” she grimaces at her use of the word ‘kill,’ but is encouraged that she has him confused.

Sam’s hopes swell when the gun drops loosely at his side. He seems tempted to believe that they’re just there by chance. She imagines that he would like nothing better than to get rid of them and the hassle they represent.

“There is no one here but me,” he finally replies, placing a hand on the doorknob…the pathway to freedom.

“We can see that now, mister,” John adds convincingly, taking Sam’s lead. “We’ll never come back again. We’re going home in a day, anyway. We’re done trying to find that girl. We’ll let her parents worry about her.”

Nodding his head abruptly as he makes up his mind, the man turns the knob and then opens the door a few inches, telling them to stand. But before they can, a loud crackling static emits from a large two-way radio sitting on the only table in the room.

“Regan. Regan! Check in.” The man releases the door and crosses to the radio in two long steps, motioning at the same time for the kids to stay seated. Sam’s hopes plummet and the dramatic dips in emotion are making her feel a bit sick to her stomach.

“Regan here. Ready for afternoon report. Switch to secondary channel.” The microphone looks small in his meaty hand as he grips it tightly. Looking at the four kids, he must be trying to figure out what to say about them.

“Switching to secondary channel,” the box squawks, followed by a brief pause while Regan reaches out, and turns a nob. “Go with report.”

The voice on the other end has become distorted and there is more static, which is likely why this channel wouldn’t be used by anyone else.

“I have some…young pirates. They were looking for treasure.” Regan watches them as he says this, his expression unreadable.

“How many?” The voice has changed, and Sam looks in alarm at Ally. It’s Kevin!

“Four: two boys and two girls. Claim to be looking for a lost neighbor.” Sam winces as he says this, knowing that the same story that nearly freed them will now seal their fate.

“Does one of them have red hair?” The static has gotten worse, so that his voice is almost drowned out, but the message still comes through.

“Affirmative,” Regan answers with some surprise, looking at Ally with suspicion. “What are your instructions? I was going to release the…trespassers.”

“Negative,” Kevin replies immediately. “We’ll have our order completed tonight. Those four are a liability. Repeat…they are a liability. Put them with the treasure. Rendezvous time is moved up to the next low tide at o-four hundred.”

“What if someone comes looking for the….pirates?” Regan asks after a brief hesitation.

“I doubt they’re there with permission,” Kevin replies logically. “By the time anyone realizes it, we’ll be long gone.”

“Affirmative. Out.” Regan drops the mic on the table and turns on the group with a new sense of purpose. “You,” he says, pointing at John. “Come here.”

Ally grabs at John’s hand when he stands up, but he gently shakes her off and follows Regan’s order. Stopping a few feet away from the man, John crosses his arms over his chest and raises his eyebrows questioningly. Sam knows that he must be scared, but he’s doing a good job at hiding it. She figures that he came to the same conclusions as she has, based on what Kevin just said. Regan wasn’t told to hurt them, just to put them somewhere. Sam assumes that the ‘treasure’ is Carrie, and that they’ll soon be joining her.

“You, too.” Regan then directs Hunter, pointing to a spot next to John. Hunter isn’t quite as good as John is at hiding his fear, and his legs nearly buckle when he rises, but Sam catches and steadies him. When both boys are standing in front of Regan, he keeps the gun pointed at them while rummaging through an open toolbox on the table. After a couple of minutes of searching, he smiles and brings out a bag of zip ties. Tossing it to John, he then nods at Hunter. “Tie him up.”

John’s cheeks burn a deep red in contrast to his blonde hair as he reluctantly secures Hunter’s wrists. Regan doesn’t object to him keeping his hands in front of him, but gives the plastic strips an extra tug to make sure they are tight. He then binds John’s wrists in the same way, before escorting them all back outside into the bright, late afternoon sun.

Sam is a bit insulted that Regan didn’t feel it was necessary to restrain her and Ally, but then nearly laughs aloud at the absurd thought. Barely containing the hysterical giggles, Sam carefully picks her way over the uneven ground and follows the others towards the lighthouse. She focuses on the hope that Regan’s underestimating them will be their one advantage, but it won’t do them any good if she totally loses it. Taking deep breaths, Sam gets a loose control on her raging emotions.

Ally is having a more difficult time. Crying, she turns back to look at the man trailing behind them. “Please let us go,” she begs, tripping over a rock and nearly falling. Catching herself by grabbing onto Hunter, she holds onto his arm. “We promise not to tell anyone you’re here!”

Regan’s cold eyes study the young girl’s face, no sign of remorse registering on his hard-edged features. “That is no longer an option,” he says evenly. “Do as you are told and no one will be harmed.”

As bleak as the situation is, his words seem to have a calming effect on Ally. She straightens her shoulders, and visibly struggles to choke back the sound of her crying. Sam quickly steps up to Ally’s side and throws a steadying arm around her. Ally turns into her sideways embrace, and the two of them approach the base of the lighthouse together.

John is already standing at the large, old wooden door set into the stucco walls. He’s studying them with obvious concern, his hands already turning a bit red from the ties cutting into the circulation. Sam watches his expression change to alarm when the door behind him is suddenly pulled open, and he nearly falls backwards. Standing there is the larger of the two men from the boat, Her Vaere Drager. He takes in the group gathered there, before turning on Regan.

They argue loudly in a foreign language for nearly five minutes. Sam figures it has to be Danish, and she’s thankful that she has no idea what they’re saying. Do all of these guys have explosive anger issues? Reminding herself not to antagonize them, she tries not to stare, and instead studies their surroundings. It might come in handy later.

The huge, hundred-foot structure is set about fifty feet back from the trail they used. The bluff angles up sharply behind it, ending in what Sam imagines must be a sheer cliff. It’s clear that the only way here is by the slippery slope they climbed, in this unforgiving landscape.

“Why don’t they come for us now?” The second man demands in English. It would seem that the argument is over, but he is still agitated.

“I told you, Jacque,” Regan replies, throwing his one gun-free hand up. “We will be done with all of this mess by tonight. The tide will be out again at three-thirty. Take them upstairs, then secure everything, and prepare to leave.”

Still muttering to himself, Jacque pulls his own pistol out from his waistband, and takes over their imprisonment. As the big door closes behind them and he yells at them to start climbing the steep, spiral staircase; Sam suddenly longs to have Regan back in charge.

The stairs go on forever. In what feels like an endless upwards, swirling trek, Sam concentrates on her grip on the loose banister and the creaking wooden steps under her feet. Captain Brown said that the lighthouse was determined to be unsafe years ago, so her fear of falling through the old stairwell to her death is probably not that far-fetched.

Just when Sam’s fear starts to overwhelm her again, they come to a large platform in front of another door. The stairs continue beyond that, but Jacque calls out for them to stop. Shooing them away from the lock, he takes hold of a solid bar that disengages a new dead bolt, recently installed.

As the bolt scrapes against the wood, and Jacque pushes the large door open, Sam eagerly cranes her neck to get a look in the room. On the far side of an impressive chamber, a girl sits on the bare floor. Hugging her knees to her chest, green eyes wide with fear, she looks to be about the same age as John.

They all step into the space without any encouragement from their captor, who slams and locks the door behind them without comment.

“Carrie?” Sam calls out, her terror at their situation briefly forgotten. “We’re here to help you!”

20 THE TREASURE

Carrie sits blinking at them for a moment, confused by the group that has suddenly appeared before her. Pushing herself to her feet, she is taller than Sam had imagined. Her cut-offs are covered in dirt, and the white tank top she’s wearing isn’t much better. She has the same unique eyes and long, thick black hair as her mother. Even though it’s a tangled mess, it doesn’t mask her striking beauty.

“You’re here to rescue me?” she finally says sarcastically, after studying each of them. “Please tell me that your parents or the authorities are right behind you?”

Well, she definitely has her mom’s personality, too, Sam thinks, her excitement at finding the girl quickly fading.

When they all silently exchange knowing looks, Carrie sighs loudly. “Oh, this is just great!” Kicking at an empty can on the floor, she stomps over to a dirty mattress with a lone sheet and plops down on it. “Who are you?” she demands, holding her head in her hands in a defeated gesture.

“Well, you’re welcome,” Hunter blurts back, his tone matching hers. “It’s not like we didn’t risk our lives or anything to get out here and find you.” He holds his bound hands out in front of him for emphasis. “Do you think we’re having fun?”

Blinking again, Carrie lowers her hands and places them loosely in her lap. Sam suddenly realizes that the poor girl is probably in shock. She’s been locked up in here for at least a week. Quickly crossing the room, she kneels down next to her so that they’re at eye level.

“Carrie, my name is Samantha Wolf. That’s my brother, Hunter. This is my best friend, Allyson Parker,” Sam continues, pointing to Ally, “and her brother, John. We rented the beach house next to yours, at Wood Cove. It’s a long story, but after meeting your little sister, mom, and dad, we got a bit suspicious.”

“Wait. My dad?” Carrie interrupts, her pretty face contorting in anger.

“Kevin,” Ally answers, coming to sit on the other side of the lumpy mattress.

“Kevin is not my dad!” she nearly yells, hands balling up into fists. “Is Erica okay?” she asks before anyone can respond, turning quickly to Sam with a concerned expression.

Her rapid change in demeanor makes her hard to follow, and Sam shakes her head briefly to try to think clearly. “Erica and your mom seem to be okay, Carrie,” she says calmly, her eyes flitting to Ally, hoping that her friend understands how fragile she really is. “We suspected that Kevin wasn’t who he said he was, and we uncovered some things that were pretty strange. When we saw your S.O.S. flashing last night, we decided to come find out if you were really here or not, but…” she looks sheepishly at her brother and John. “Things didn’t really go quite the way we had planned. We’re sorry we aren’t more help to you, but we promise we’ll find a way out of here!”

As both Sam and Ally place a reassuring hand on her cold, dirty arms, the young girl finally breaks out in silent, wracking sobs. Scooting up next to her, Sam puts an arm around her waist and motions to the concerned boys to just let her cry. After a good ten minutes, Carrie finally takes a big shuddering breath and smiles weakly at them.

“I’m sorry,” she whispers, wiping at her running nose. “I’ve just been so scared. I didn’t think anyone was ever going to come.”

“You don’t need to apologize.” Ally is quick to reassure her. “I can’t imagine what it’s been like for you!”

“Carrie,” John says gently, leaning against a nearby support beam. “Do you mind if I ask why you’re here? We figured out some stuff, but we really don’t know what’s going on.”

“How much do you know?” Carrie asks, already looking stronger.

John describes everything that has happened since they arrived at Wood’s Cove, with the rest of them adding to the story as necessary. Sam is rewarded with an approving smile when she explains how she made the connection to her cell phone cover on the boat, and Erica’s missing sister.

“I’m impressed,” Carrie admits, when John finishes with his deciphering the S.O.S. signal she sent the night before. “But there’s a whole lot you don’t know,” she continues, the smile vanishing. “My mom is in a lot of trouble.”

“What kind of trouble?” Hunter mumbles around the zip tie that he’s trying to bite through. They’re the thick ones and all he’s accomplished so far are some sore teeth. “And how’d you know how to make that distress signal?”

“I was in Scouts,” she answers the simple question first. “Jacque forgot the lantern again last night, so I got a couple of series off before he remembered and came up.”

Sam once again finds herself wishing she had joined Ally’s aunt’s troop when she’d invited them a couple of years ago. Then she realizes what Carrie’s explanation means. “They leave you alone up here all night without even a light?” she asks, looking at the teen with a new respect.

“I get the lantern until it’s dark enough for it to show from a distance.” She shrugs, as if it’s no big deal. “But forget about the light. I need to explain about BioCore, and then we need to figure out a way to escape.”

“Why?” Hunter questions, having given up on chewing his way to freedom. “According to what Kevin just said over the radio, they’re gonna be done tonight with whatever it is they’re doing. It sounded like they’re picking up those two guys down there at low tide and getting out of here. Why cause problems? We just have to wait until our parents figure out where we are…and they will. They’re good at that.”

“No!” Carrie is shaking her head impatiently. “You don’t understand! They’ll never let my mom go. They can’t! They won’t let me or Erica go, either. I’m sure they’ll leave the four of you up here, but not me.” Standing up, she begins to pace the room.

“Doesn’t your mom work for them?” Ally wonders. “Why are they doing this to her?”

“My mom is a scientist,” Carrie explains. “A geneticist. She has her own small development company. Several years ago, she came up with something that is going to change the world of medicine. A way to genetically alter a virus, and then use that to fight illnesses. Her only problem was that it was theoretical. She didn’t have the facilities or specialized equipment to create it. That’s where BioCore came in.”

Already tired from her few trips across the room, Carrie sits back down in between Sam and Ally.

“Mom had gone to just about everyone she could think of, pitching her idea and trying to get the funding she needed. After a year, she was ready to give up. Her company was struggling by then because of all the time she was spending on it, instead of the paying jobs the rest of her employees were trying to get done. But then Kevin showed up. It was like a dream come true. They offered her a grant large enough to rent out the lab and everything else she needed.”

“Didn’t she know about the shady stuff they did?” John interrupts, hoping he wasn’t going to offend her.

“If you’re talking about what happened over in Africa,” Carrie states, turning her flashing green eyes on John. “That wasn’t reported until just this past year, long after Mom started working for them three years ago. I don’t remember all that much from then, but I do know that at the time, they were only involved in government contracts. At least, that’s all that was publicized. They seemed legit, and Mom was convinced that it was the answer to her prayers. At first…it was. Everything was going great for the first time since my dad died when I was ten. We moved into a huge house so that we could be closer to the lab. Mom was able to hire a special team from her own company to assist her. It was slow, tedious work, but she was always very positive and happy. That is, until a few months ago.”

“What happened?” Sam prompts when Carrie falls silent, lost in her thoughts.

“The article you read was brought to her attention, and after she started asking questions about it, her team began acting strange around her. Kevin gave her a bunch of excuses, but my mom is smart. Like a literal genius. She wasn’t falling for it and I could tell she was nervous and having second thoughts about the whole program. But…she was so close to being able to apply for a patent and start patient trials. That’s when it happened.

“I’ll never forget the look on her face when she came home that night,” Carrie says quietly, her voice going hoarse with emotion. “It was a couple of weeks ago. Mom was getting ready to turn in her final work to BioCore, and file it with the US patent office at the same time. To celebrate, she rented the beach house for a whole two months. We’ve come every year since I can remember, but we usually only stay for a week. We were all really looking forward to spending the whole summer here and taking some time together before she got even busier.

“But something had gone horribly wrong. What was supposed to be a congratulations dinner at work turned into an ambush. Kevin had already gotten to the three other scientists working for Mom and bought them out.”

“Bought them out?” Sam repeats, growing more confused. “I don’t understand. Wasn’t he already paying them?”

“No. BioCore gave my mom several million dollars in grant money, and she in turn used that to pay her employees. They were still technically working for her company. The agreement was that BioCore gets their name attached to the patent, as well as my mom, which is basically the power to control how the invention is used. But BioCore has other plans. They never intended to file it, because they don’t want to use the technology to create just medicine. They want to secretly make the medicine and sell it to the highest bidder, and…” Carrie wrings her hands nervously, looking back up at her now captive audience. “And they’re going to force my mom to use the same methods to turn it into a biological weapon!”

Sam has watched enough movies and read enough books to know what Carrie is talking about, but it’s still difficult to believe it. It was hard to accept that someone would actually be capable of taking something meant for saving lives, and turn it into a way to harm people.

“I still don’t understand how they can make your mom do that,” Sam finally breaks the stunned silence that has settled over the room. “Why didn’t she just go to the police or something?”

“And tell them what?” Carrie retorts, clearly frustrated. “It’s called corporate espionage, and she did try to go to the FBI. But like I said, BioCore had already paid off her team and gotten them to agree to it. For months, they had been working to frame my mom, and make it look like she was the one plotting all of it. So by the time she found out, it was too late. Kevin basically told her to either work with them, or end up in a federal prison for the rest of her life. She pretended to go along with it, but we left in the middle of the night and came out here. The next day she tried to arrange a meeting with the FBI. But…Kevin showed up instead. She really underestimated them. While she was gone, those goons downstairs kidnapped me and brought me here.”

“This doesn’t make any sense,” Hunter interrupts. “If they’re so rich and powerful, why didn’t they just lock you all up at their company until your mom did what they wanted?”

“He has a point,” John agrees. “I don’t understand why they would bother with this whole charade. They knew where your mom was and that she tried to report them to the FBI. Why take a chance of her telling someone by leaving her and Erica at the beach house? There had to be a better place to keep you then here!”

“Oh my gosh,” Carrie huffs, frustrated. “I told you, she was still a week away from finishing. She had to have access to her lab, the equipment, files, and virus samples. It took about two years to build that stuff and it’s the only lab of its kind in the whole country. Only a few places in the world are set up for the kind of virus work she’s doing. They couldn’t just ‘lock her in a room’ until everything was done.

“She’s also well known in her field and very active in several scientific groups. If she suddenly disappeared when she was about to achieve her life’s work…the feds would have swarmed her lab and locked everything down. So they had no choice but to keep her out in the open and let her go to the lab. It’s a two-hour drive from here, and the other scientists that betrayed her are there, watching everything she does. But they had to have a sure way to control her, which is why they took me.

“They didn’t expect her to run, so they had to improvise when she came to the beach house. At first, they had me on their boat, but after I nearly escaped a second time, they brought me out here.

“For the past two weeks, they’ve been coercing Mom into finishing the rest of the work so that they can move forward with the human trials in a country where no one will even know what they’re doing. Don’t you see?” Carrie cries, looking to John because he is the oldest. “She didn’t have a choice but to go along with it. But I know my mom, and she’ll never help them develop it into a weapon. We have to get out of here before they come back! The only way to prove all of this is for Kevin to be caught while he’s here with mom and the incriminating documents are in his possession. Otherwise, they’ll never let us go!”

“Well then, we better get to work.”

Carrie looks at Sam in surprise. Still sitting beside her, Sam has found a tear in the bottom edge of the mattress and has part of a metal spring pulled out of the hole. “And I know how we’re going to escape!”

21 GOT A LADDER?

The spring breaks free from the mattress as Sam makes her bold claim, and she looks up triumphantly with the prize in her hand. Everyone except John looks confused, and he eagerly comes to sit in front of Sam, holding his bound wrists out a little further.

“Good thinking, Sam!” he says approvingly, causing her to blush slightly.

Concentrating on scraping the plastic with the jagged end of metal, she’s careful not to cut into his wrists. This is going to take a while. “I’ve been looking at the windows,” she says, without looking up. “There’s no way any of us could fit through the two small ones, but that old stained-glass one up high might work.”

The two square windows are set low to the ground and face the cove, but there’s a large round opening near the tall ceiling, overlooking the sea. Sam figures it had ornate stained glass it at one point, based on the remnants clinging to the edges and the colored fragments littering the floor below it.

Carrie is straining to get a good look at it, but then slowly shakes her head. “I don’t know, Sam,” she says, standing and going to the wall below it. “We’re about seventy feet off the ground here. I think this used to be the room the light keeper would stay in. The actual spotlight is above us. Jacque took me up there once, to give me some fresh air. They stopped letting me out to bathe after I took off down the beach one time,” she adds quietly.

“Is there a balcony or anything up there?” Hunter asks, suddenly interested in the plan. “It looks like there’s a big widow’s walk around the whole thing in this picture,” he explains, pointing at the lighthouse on the front of his shirt. Ally grabs at his t-shirt and pulls the material tight, so she can see the picture more clearly.

“Yeah, there is,” Carrie confirms. “But I didn’t dare go out on it, even if Jacque would have let me. Who knows if it’ll hold up under any weight? This whole thing is falling apart!”

“Well, that might be our best chance,” Sam tells her. “Or our only chance. There!” she shouts, as John gives his hands an extra tug and the weakened plastic snaps in half. “Next?” she says, turning to Hunter, who is already stepping up eagerly.

After what seems much longer than it really is, due to Hunter’s impatience, they’re all gathered below the window. It’s a good four feet above John’s head, but Sam figures she can reach it by standing on his shoulders. John fastened the bedsheet around her waist, and then added Ally’s long swimsuit cover-up she was wearing, and his and Hunter’s t-shirts to try to make it long enough. Sam could almost laugh at the irony, looking at the distorted lighthouse and Sea Creature dangling at the end.

“What if the balcony isn’t right above that window?” Ally is bouncing back and forth on her feet anxiously. The whole idea of Sam climbing out a window over seventy feet off the ground is terrifying. “Or what if it collapses?”

“We’ll catch her,” John tries to reassure his sister. “If this make-shift rope isn’t long enough, then she isn’t going to even try to reach it. Right, Sam?”

“Right,” Sam confirms, taking a few deep breaths to calm her shaking legs. “Let’s do this.”

John kneels down so that Sam can step cautiously onto his shoulders, with Ally and Hunter on either side to help her. She wobbles precariously as he stands slowly, and reaches out to put a hand against the cold stone wall for stability. She’s able to grab at the windowsill before he’s even all the way up, taking some of the weight off his shoulders. “I got it!” she calls triumphantly, careful not to put her hands over any sharp pieces of glass.

Once John is standing, she’s high enough that she can easily pull herself up into the window, balancing in the opening, the thick stucco wall providing a wide ledge.  Trying hard not to look down at the dizzying ground below, Sam instead looks up, and is relieved to see the underside of the walkway less than two feet above her. “I can reach it!” she calls back into the room. Looking down at her friends, she finds that Hunter is now sitting on John’s shoulders, holding tightly to the end of her rope. This will give her the extra few feet that she needs.

Bracing her hands on either side of the open circle, she squats inside the window and then slowly stands, leaning out slightly so that she can grab onto one of the balcony’s braces with both hands. Having accomplished this, Sam feels a sudden rush of fear, realizing the dangerous position she’s now in, leaning out and away from the window. The bedsheet is pulling tightly at her waist and she knows there isn’t any more slack.

“Sam!” John calls urgently. “What are you doing? Can you make it?”

“Come back, Sam!” Ally pleads, her voice full of dread.

Looking around desperately, Sam tries to find a way to go up, since she isn’t sure that she can make it back without falling. The balcony is made of wrought iron bars, spaced evenly apart. There are several spots where the metal has become corroded and fallen away, and fortunately, one of these areas is just to the right of the brace Sam is clinging to. Still holding onto it tightly, she shuffles her feet over until she is under the hole. Nearly crying now, Sam forces herself to let go with one hand and reach up into the hole, grasping the nearest bar. When it doesn’t come loose, she gives it a little tug and it feels secure. Her confidence growing slightly, she does the same with her other hand. When she stands to her full height, her head and shoulders fit through the hole and she’s able to lift herself up the rest of the way.

Rolling over onto the balcony, she ends up face down, which is a big mistake. The craggy cliffs, buffeted by large waves crashing against them, appear tiny below her. There’s no question that one wrong move would mean the end of her. Temporarily frozen with fear, she might have stayed there forever, if it weren’t for Ally frantically calling her name. Someone is also tugging slightly at the sheet around her waist.

Starting with her left foot, she carefully slides it over until it’s inside the lighthouse. The windows lining the balcony were broken out long ago, so there is nothing standing in her way. Still too afraid to speak, she goes through the same motions with her left hand, and closes her eyes in relief when she gets a firm grip on the inside ledge. Using what strength she has left, she pulls herself across the bars and then finally falls to the safety of the floor.

The tension on the sheet goes limp, followed by a cry of terror from Ally. Sam quickly hops up onto her knees and calls out to her friend. “I’m okay!” she shouts, hopefully loud enough for them to hear her, but no one else. “I made it!”

Encouraged by the following cheers and clapping, Sam sits back against the wall in relief. She needs to take a minute to pull herself together, and isn’t sure if her legs will hold her weight.

After what feels like too much time, she takes one more deep breath and gingerly stands, while looking around the new, round room. It’s very big, with a huge lamp fixed in the middle of it. There’s no light bulb in it, and it probably hasn’t worked for a long time, but Sam can imagine how bright it must have been. Happy to see that she’s alone, she quickly locates the door and tiptoes down the stairs, cringing at the creaking that can’t be avoided.

Breathing much easier once she reaches the landing and the bolted door, it takes her a few tense minutes to work the large bar loose. She’s finally rewarded with four huge grins waiting for her on the other side of the door. Ally is the first to gather her up in a big hug.

“I thought you fell!” she gasps, trying hard not to start crying again.

“Sorry,” Sam whispers, barely able to breath inside the tight embrace. “I was too scared to talk!” Pushing back gently from her friend, she looks anxiously over her shoulder, towards the descending stairwell. They’re a long ways from being free.

“We still have over four hours before the tide will be low enough for us to leave,” John explains, looking in the same direction.

“So we don’t wait,” Hunter says matter-of-factly. “Let’s just make a run for the trail and get as far away from here as we can!” Sam is tempted to agree with him, but Carrie is shaking her head.

“The first day they brought me here, I ran off as soon as I stepped on solid ground,” she tells Hunter. “I knew about the trail from the other times we came to the Cove. But it only goes for a couple-hundred feet on this end, before being totally blocked by rocks on one side, and a cliff on the other. I don’t think there’s anywhere on this point that we could hide without being found right away. They pretty much laughed at me when I tried.”

“What’s their routine?” John asks, choosing a different tactic.

“Well, I already had dinner. Jacque should be back up soon, since it’s getting dark. I usually hand the lantern out to him, and he goes away without even saying anything. He’s a man of few words. If I need to use the bathroom, I let him know. There’s an old outhouse in the back.”

“Where does he go after he takes the lantern?” Ally asks.

“He goes out to the shack. That’s where they sleep.”

“So then I need to go hide back upstairs,” Sam decides. “It’ll be dark in here anyway, with just the one small lantern, so I doubt he’ll even notice that I’m gone. Here, take the sheet,” she continues, untying it from her waist. “Bunch the shirts up under it to make it look like I’m lying on the mattress. After he leaves, I’ll come back down and let you out.”

Everyone agrees that it’s the best option they have, so Sam locks them back inside after another round of hugs. Once she returns to the light room, though, her restored bravery falters. With the sun quickly setting on the distant horizon, the shadows are already becoming thick around her. Trying hard not to think of the ghost story, she sits down behind an overturned table and hugs her knees tightly to her chest.

22 PIRATES AND A SEA MONSTER

Sam can’t be sure how long she’s been hiding, but nearly half an hour has passed since she heard Jacques finally come up the stairs for the lantern, and then go back down. There were several tense minutes while she waited to see if the footsteps would continue up to where she was, but he obviously didn’t notice she was gone from the other shadowy room.

It’s so dark now, that she can barely see her hand in front of her face. The constant feeling that someone is about to grab her back is driving her crazy. Sam has never really been afraid of the dark, but she’s pretty sure that from now on, she’ll want to sleep with a nightlight.

Crawling on her hands and knees, Sam peeks over the edge of what used to be windows, and confirms that there’s a very faint light glowing far below, reassuring her that Jacques and Regan are in the shed, not the lighthouse. Beyond the point, she can see small flickers of a different kind of light on the distant beach. Guilt momentarily replaces her fear, because she knows that it’s probably people out searching for them. She would give anything right now for a flare! But with no electricity, flashlight, or anything else to signal with, there’s nothing she can do. Unfortunately, while it looks like there are boats in the cove, there aren’t any coming their way. Stealing herself to move blindly through the dark, Sam takes a deep breath, scurries over to the door, and then feels her way out onto the stairs.

Scooting down the stairwell on her bottom, the way she used to as a child, Sam then stumbles across the familiar platform. When her hand closes over the cold steel of the latch, she feels an immense sense of triumph.

“It’s me!” she whispers into the room, when no one is waiting for her like before. In the couple of seconds of silence before John answers her, Sam imagines all the horrible possible reasons for an empty room.

“Stay there, Sam,” he orders.

Sam can just make out their shapes in the inky blackness as they move towards her. Hunter grunts as he trips over something, and Ally’s giggle lightens the mood.

Sam quickly fills them in on what she saw from the lookout. “Do you think they might come looking for us here before we can get the rowboat out?” she wonders aloud, while getting a firm grip on the bannister.

John is in front of her, leading the way, and Ally is literally clinging to her back. Hunter and then Carrie bring up the rear.

“Why would they?” Carrie asks. “You told your parents that you were going on the trail. They’ll be searching those woods for hours before even thinking of this lighthouse. The sheriff knows there’s only one way on and off, during low tide. They have no reason to think that you’re here, do they?”

“No,” Sam confirms, feeling even worse for withholding the whole truth from her mom and dad. “They know I was interested in it, but like you said…it’ll take a long time to get through the woods. I bet they think we’ve fallen off a cliff or been swept away by another landslide.”

Sam tries hard to keep the emotion out of her voice, but has to swallow around a rising lump. She suddenly wishes that her dad were here. He would wrap her up in his protective strong arms and make everything okay again.

The group falls silent, as they get closer to the bottom of the lighthouse, with no way of being certain that one of the men isn’t still standing guard there. Thankfully, they find the space empty and thin moonlight is shining weakly through the large, empty windows lining the walls.

“Now what?” Hunter asks John, his face looking a ghostly shade in the moon glow.

“We’ve got to get to the rocks,” he answers quickly, looking at the moon with apprehension. Right now, darkness is the best thing they have going for them.

“We can circle around the back of the lighthouse, and then follow the tree line instead of just running across the open space,” Carrie suggests. “They’ll be much less likely to spot us that way.” She leads the way outside without waiting for anyone to answer, and they all trail after her without a sound.

It doesn’t take long to pick their way through the low bushes and dry grass, its growth stunted by the constant wind sweeping across the point. Once they make it to the trees, they all relax a little and begin whispering to each other again.

“How late do you think it is?” Sam asks no one in particular.

“It’s got to be a little after midnight by now,” John answers. “So we’re still going to have to wait for the tide to go out more before we can leave.”

The wooden shack is now a hundred feet or so to their left and the ground suddenly falls away to reveal the steep, rocky trail. Encouraged, they scramble down, careful not to kick any of the rocks loose on the way. They have to stop short of the bottom because there is cold seawater in the way.

“There’s the boat!” Hunter whispers, pointing to the far side of the enclosure. When he starts to enter the water to retrieve it, Carrie grabs at him and yanks him back.

“Are you stupid?” she nearly shouts, her eyes sparkling in the dim light making its way down to them. “The currents in there are crazy. You can’t see it, but each time a wave comes in and out, the water is sucked through the opening that’s still below the surface. We have to wait.”

“Okay!” Hunter retorts, pulling his arm out of her grasp. “I get it! But if we wait too long, then Kevin and his goons will get here first.”

No one has a reply to that, as they all consider the impossible situation that they’re in. After several minutes, John is the first one to find a rock to sit on. With no other options, Sam and Ally join him to wait. Hunter is too stubborn though, so he continues to pace along the edge of the water, watching the boat. Carrie eventually joins him and they talk to each other in hushed tones.

Even though it feels like forever, Sam knows that in reality, it takes about two hours for the water to retreat enough to reveal the tunnel. At first, she thinks it’s just her eyes playing tricks on her, but then John sees it, too.

“Finally!” he expels, slapping his thighs as he stands. “We’ve got to get the rowboat now,” he continues, taking his shirt off. He and Hunter had put the t-shirts back on at some point. “If we wait too long, it might go through the opening without us!”

Cautiously, he and Hunter enter the water. Although it only comes up to their waists now, the strong currents Carrie warned about tug at their legs, making the short walk to the boat treacherous.

When they finally secure it, the girls all quietly cheer, relieved to be another step closer to freedom. Sam notes that the tunnel is now halfway uncovered, almost enough to slip through. A sense of danger replaces her optimism at the realization that this also means Kevin could be waiting on the other side to come in.

“We have to go!” she urges, the first to climb over the side of the weathered boat. “Let’s at least get to the tunnel so that we can go through as soon as it’s low enough,” she pushes, when Carrie and Ally hesitate.

When all five of them pile in, they end up sitting rather low in the water. It was pretty much at its limit on their way over and no one had given much thought about an extra person on the trip back.

“Are we going to sink?” Ally worries. Splashing at the water just a few inches below the rim, she looks to her brother for reassurance.

“We’ll be okay so long as we aren’t hit by any big waves,” he answers, not exactly putting her fears at ease. “We never should have done this without the proper life jackets in the boat,” he chides. “I know better than that.”

Sam was right. By the time they reach the passageway, they’re able to slip inside. Ducking as low as they can, they use their hands to push their way through, water dripping on them from the rocks just inches above their heads.

When they finally emerge out the other side, it takes a moment for the victory to sink in.

“We made it!” Sam is the first to shout, looking back at Dead Man’s Point in disbelief. While the others join her in celebrating, Sam’s eye is drawn to the top of the lighthouse.

It can’t be! She thinks, rubbing at her face. But no, the light is there. Not like the white light, that’s still glowing from the shack, but the faint flickering of a candle! Spinning back to tell the others, Sam looks out at the ocean for the first time since descending down into the cavern. A thick fog is rolling into the cove, and it’s rapidly making its way towards them.

“Row!” John shouts to Hunter. “We could end up going in circles if we get caught in that fog!”

The boys dig at the water with all their strength, but the overloaded boat is slow to respond. Without really thinking about it, Sam kicks off her sandals and then slips out the back and into the cold water. The boat rises slightly, and she hangs onto the edge while kicking with her legs as hard as she can. It’s not much, but the added buoyancy along with the forward motion is enough to help get them moving.

Just when Sam thinks they’re making some progress, the sound of a motor erupts from behind them! Turning to look, she can see the vague outline of a dinghy not far away, at the edge of the wall of fog.

“That’s the cruiser that Kevin uses to go back and forth from his boat!” Carrie confirms, her voice tight.

“Maybe they haven’t seen us,” Hunter whispers. He and John stop rowing, and the ensuing silence seems intensified by the mist still quickly approaching. Sam also stops kicking; hoping that if they just stay still and quiet, they won’t be spotted.

Suddenly, a bright spotlight flashes on, illuminating the water around them before coming to rest on their upturned faces. The motor responds by revving louder, and they know that there’s no way they can outrun them.

“We have to try!” Sam shouts, kicking furiously again.

John and Hunter row faster than they ever thought they could, the years of being on various outings together paying off. Ally and Carrie lean out on opposite sides, paddling with their hands. Sam can’t help but to look back over her shoulder, and sees that the fog has overtaken the dinghy, it’s light now creating an eerie halo.

As their adversaries race towards them, a new sound erupts to fill the night. Somewhere between the wail of a crying woman and the haunting song of a whale, it’s like nothing Sam has ever heard before. The purr of the motor is drowned out by it as the fog seems to echo the call over and over again.

The hairs rising on the back of her neck, Sam stops swimming and desperately tries to pull herself from the water. But her arms are already tired, and she lacks the strength to haul herself out. Slipping back into the murky ocean, Sam feels something huge brush past her legs, just below the surface. Afraid to move, she watches in horror as the water begins to swell behind her, speeding towards the dinghy.

Strong hands grab at her from behind as the wail increases, and Sam is pulled over the side of the boat as the swell grows into a huge wave that slams into the other racing vessel. There’s a moment of chaos as the dinghy is launched into the air, its motor screaming, and men shouting. It comes down on its side with a horrendous crash, and the light is extinguished before silence settles over the water.

Stunned, the five friends huddle together in the rowboat, unsure of what just happened. The air cooled rapidly with the arrival of the fog as well as a distinct smell unique to the ocean. But Sam realizes that the mist is already thinning out when the goosebumps on her arms are soothed by the returning heat, left in the wake of the odd encounter.

When the men from the capsized boat start to call out to one another, the kids are forced back into motion. Taking up the oars, John and Hunter begin rowing again, laughing nervously about their good luck. But Sam knows that it wasn’t luck that saved them.

“Thank you, Captain Wood!” Sam shouts into the night, as they head for the distant lights on the beach. Lights that represent their safety…and their triumph.

23 A NEW TALE TO TELL

Warm blankets and hot chocolate go a long ways towards making things better. At least, that’s what Sam is thinking while staring into the steam that’s rising from the mug she’s holding firmly in her hands. It reminds her of the fog, and this causes her heart rate to accelerate again.

“Sam!” Jerking her head around, she looks sheepishly at her father. “The officer asked you a question. Can you describe the color of the boat?”

Sam’s head is swimming from the interrogation they’ve been enduring for the past two hours. She’s quite certain that she already answered that question twice already. She’s about to tell the sheriff a third time, when his radio squawks and he puts up a hand to stop her. After several minutes of scratchy conversation, he smiles at everyone.

“The Coast Guard located them!” he announces, looking around the large family room of the beach house that’s nearly full of people. “It’s just how the kids told it. Lisa and Erica were locked below deck, but unhurt,” he continues, nodding towards Carrie, who starts to cry from relief. “If the documents they found are really what you kids say they are, then those men will be facing some pretty stiff penalties, in addition to kidnapping and false imprisonment. The FBI and Homeland Security should be here in the morning,” he adds, sounding a bit overwhelmed.

Sam’s mom puts a hand on her shoulder, the reminder of how serious the situation was likely sinking in. Karen and Ethan were both understandably furious when the kids were first pulled from the water, but as the story unfolded, the anger turned to relief that everyone was okay.

Her parents had started going door-to-door at seven, when dinner passed and they were still gone. At ten, they contacted the sheriff and a search of the woods was organized. When Captain Brown got wind of what “all the fuss in the cove” was about, he quickly made his way to the beach house. He arrived not long before the fog started to form, so that everyone was already out of the woods and arranging for a boat to take them to Dead Man’s Point by the time they rowed ashore.

Now, Captain Brown is leaning against the kitchen counter, the ever-present pipe hanging from his mouth. A grin has been stuck on his face since Sam’s telling of their nearly disastrous capture during the escape.

No one else believed them. The sheriff referred to the ‘unexplained event’ as a rogue wave. He even wrote that out on the witness statement that Sam and the others each signed.

“What about Regan and Jacques?” John asks the sheriff. He’s been unusually quiet this whole time, and Sam suspects it’s because he’s embarrassed. He’s sure to feel that he let her parents down, but she plans on making it clear to them how important a role he played in keeping them all safe.

“They’ve been arrested,” the officer replies. “They didn’t go easily though, and it nearly came to gunfire. But when the Coast Guard arrived to back up my men, they realized they were outnumbered. Turns out they’re criminals, but not stupid.”

Hunter laughs at this, and he and John high-five each other. In spite of everything that’s happened, the four of them are much closer than ever before. Sam can’t imagine how things would have turned out if John and Hunter hadn’t been there this time to help.

Ally has been sitting silently beside her, snuggled in a huge blanket, but now she throws it off to free her arms.  Apparently having the same thoughts, she wraps Sam up in a huge embrace, then motions for their brothers and Carrie to join them.

The five of them barely fit on the oversized couch, but it doesn’t matter. They make it work. With the sun just starting to break over the horizon, the room around them takes on a warm glow, matching their moods.

Over Ally’s shoulder, Sam sees old Captain Brown tip her a salute with his pipe, his grizzled face looking younger from the smile it still possesses.

Although no one else will admit to believing that the Wood’s Sea Creature saved them, Sam is certain that from now on, there will be a new ending to the tale that Captain Brown tells. One that involves pirates, a treasure, a protective sea creature…and plenty of mystery!

THE END

Thank you for reading, ‘The Beach House Mystery’! I hope that you enjoyed it, and will take the time to write a simple review on Amazon!

http://www.amazon.com/dp/B011H7SG0K

Want to be notified when Tara releases a new novel? Sign up now for her newsletter!  eepurl.com/bzdHA5

Be sure to look for Sam and Ally in other exciting adventures in The Samantha Wolf Mysteries!

ABOUT THE AUTHOR

Author Tara Ellis lives in a small town in beautiful Washington State, in the Pacific Northwest. She enjoys the quiet lifestyle with her husband, two teenage kids, and several dogs. Tara was a firefighter/EMT, and worked in the medical field for many years. She now teaches CPR, and concentrates on family, photography, and writing middle grade and young adult novels.

Visit her author page on Amazon to find all of her books!

http://www.amazon.com/author/taraellis